JP2018086428A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a game.SOLUTION: When an imaging command signal is transmitted from a sound light side MPU 93 to a control circuit 74, projection light is emitted from a light-emitting device 72 and reflection light of the projection light is received by an imaging device 73. Prescribed arithmetic processing is executed in a signal processing circuit 75 for an imaging signal received by the imaging device 73. By this, distance data is derived in association with each pixel in an image array part 73c of the imaging device 73. The derived distance data is transmitted from the signal processing circuit 75 to the sound light side MPU 93 and execution control of various types of monitoring and various types of performances is performed in the sound light side MPU 93 by using the distance data. In this case, the shape of a hand of a player is identified on the basis of an imaging result of an imaging board 71 in a battle performance and the contents of a performance to be executed thereafter differ depending on whether the identified hand shape corresponds to a victory result.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a selection period setting means for generating a selection period that allows a player to perform a selection operation;
Information deriving means capable of deriving state information of the monitoring range existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit;
A granting means for identifying a mode of the selection operation based on the state information and for granting a privilege to a player after a selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode is performed in the selection period;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view of the said board | substrate for an imaging and its periphery for demonstrating the board | substrate for an imaging. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process in sound light side MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure for performing the imaging control of the board | substrate for imaging, and the various control using an imaging result. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reference | standard in the case of determining whether the signal received with the imaging device of the imaging substrate is used for calculation of distance data in a signal processing circuit. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode when the sheet | seat for an electromagnetic wave goto prevention is not affixed, (b) Explanation for demonstrating a mode when the sheet | seat for an electromagnetic wave got prevention is affixed FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reference | standard switch monitoring process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the signal processing in a signal processing circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the imaging control process in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distance image storage area of sound-light side RAM. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating recognition corresponding distance. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the event of the monitoring object in the monitoring process for cancellation. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process for cancellation in sound light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state by which distance data below the monitoring distance was stored in the several unit storage area of a distance image storage area, (b) The log | history data storage area of sound side RAM is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is a time chart which shows a mode that abnormality notification is performed based on the monitoring process for cancellation. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the height position of the face of the player who is sitting in the chair arrange | positioned ahead of the pachinko machine and playing a game in a game hall. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the production operation which selects the image currently displayed with the symbol display apparatus is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the height position monitoring process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for face authentication in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the authentication process at the time of return operation in MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that face authentication is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st condition monitoring process in sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that 1st condition monitoring is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd condition monitoring process in sound light side MPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of operation | movement of the movable object unit which operate | moves in the case of notification production. It is a flowchart which shows the notification production | presentation setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st notification effect control processing in sound light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that presentation operation is performed, (b-1), (b-2) The content of the image for 1 frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that presentation operation is performed, (b-1), (b-2) The content of the image for 1 frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that presentation operation is performed, (b-1), (b-2) The content of the image for 1 frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd notification effect control processing in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that operation for 2nd notification production is performed. (A-1), (a-2) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a division | segmentation effect, (b) It is a time chart which shows the flow of a division | segmentation effect. It is a flowchart which shows the division | segmentation effect setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the division | segmentation effect control process in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the image for 1 frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area. It is a time chart which shows a mode that operation for 1st notification production is given priority over operation for division production. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of stop operation effect. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of stop operation effect. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation effect setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop operation effect control process in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the image for 1 frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating stop priority data. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the fish school effect. It is a time chart which shows the flow of a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous production | presentation setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous production | presentation control process in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a prior notice effect is performed using the imaging result of the board | substrate for imaging. It is a flowchart which shows the final effect control process in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that confrontation production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the confrontation effect setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the forced effect control process in sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the flow of forced production. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a forced production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the control process which can be made later in the sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the production which can be made later. It is a time chart which shows a mode that the effect which can be made later is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the post-unloading non-control processing in sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that an effect which cannot be followed out is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing the imaging control of the board | substrate for imaging in 2nd Embodiment, and various control using an imaging result. It is a flowchart which shows the process for face authentication in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the authentication process at the time of return operation in main side MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the board | substrate for imaging in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the division | segmentation effect setting process performed in the sound-light side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the height position monitoring process performed in the sound light side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the imaging range of the board | substrate for imaging in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the monitoring process for cancellation in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation content in a modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending device (for example, CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. On the front side of the ball lending apparatus Y, a bill inlet H1 and a medium outlet H2 are provided. By inserting a bill into the bill entrance H1, it is possible to receive a number of game balls corresponding to the bill. In addition, by inserting a card-type storage medium into the medium entrance / exit H, it is possible to receive a number of game balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium. In addition, what is inserted in the ball lending apparatus Y when receiving the lending of the game ball is not limited to the card, and may be a coin in which cash information is stored. Further, the storage medium is returned via the medium entrance H by performing a return operation in a situation where the information on the number of usable game balls remains. By inserting the storage medium into the medium entrance / exit H of the ball lending device Y provided in the pachinko machine 10 or other pachinko machine 10, the number of game balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium is lent out. It becomes possible.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. And. A main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the main body frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the main body frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. A window portion 21 is formed on the front door frame 14 so that almost the entire gaming area described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a transparent window panel 22 is fitted therein. The window panel 22 is unitized in a state in which two colorless and transparent glasses are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction. Note that a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate may be used as the window panel 22 in place of the colorless and transparent glass.

  A display light emitting unit 23 is provided above the window 21 in the front door frame 14. The display light-emitting unit 23 incorporates a light-emitting body such as an LED, and is turned on or blinking according to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and responds to the occurrence of an abnormality at a predetermined abnormality Lighting or blinking is performed in the manner described above. Further, a pair of left and right speaker portions 24 are provided on the left and right corner sides in the upper region of the front door frame 14. The speaker unit 24 outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the occurrence of an abnormality when a predetermined abnormality occurs.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. The lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  The upper bulging portion 31 is provided with a ball lending operation device 26. The ball lending operation device 26 is provided with a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a frequency display unit 29. Information on the number of game balls that can be used for lending, returning, and using the ball lending operation device 26 in a situation where information on game balls that can be used based on the insertion of bills or storage media into the ball lending device Y is stored. The frequency corresponding to can be confirmed. That is, the ball lending button 27 is operated to obtain a lending ball, and the lending ball is paid out as long as there is information on the number of usable game balls. The return button 28 is operated when requesting the return of a storage medium storing information corresponding to the number of usable game balls. The frequency display unit 29 displays a frequency that is information corresponding to the number of available game balls.

  The lower bulging portion 32 has a discharge operation portion 35 that is operated to discharge game balls stored in the lower tray 34 to a ball receiving box (not shown) disposed below the lower bulging portion 32. Is provided. The discharge operation unit 35 is provided so as to be able to open and close a ball extraction hole 36 formed in the bottom of the lower plate 34. In the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is arranged at the closed position, the ball punching hole 36 is in the closed state, the discharge of the game ball from the lower plate 34 is prevented, and in the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is arranged in the open position. The ball removal hole 36 is opened, and the game ball is allowed to be discharged from the lower tray 34. An electric actuator is not provided for the discharge operation unit 35, and it is necessary to manually operate the discharge operation unit 35 in order to move the discharge operation unit 35 between the closed position and the open position. Moreover, although the discharge operation part 35 is urged | biased toward the closed position, the discharge operation part 35 is made into an open position by utilizing the engagement relationship between the discharge operation part 35 and the lower side bulging part 32. It is the structure which can be made to hold | maintain. When the holding state is released, the discharge operation unit 35 is returned to the closed position.

  A firing operation device 37 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude to the near side. When the firing operation device 37 is operated, a game ball launching mechanism described later is driven and controlled, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are launched. The firing operation device 37 includes an operation base 37a provided to project forward, and an operation handle 37b provided to be rotatably supported by the operation base 37a. The operation handle 37b is operated to rotate. Thus, the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism is adjusted. The launch operation device 37 includes a touch sensor 37c for detecting that the operation handle 37b is touched by the player, a variable resistor 37d for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 37b, A stop switch 37e is provided that is operated to stop the launch of the game ball even when the operation handle 37b is being operated by the player. In the situation where the operation handle 37b is disposed at the initial position, the stop switch 37e is automatically turned on by the operation handle 37b. When the touch sensor 37c detects that the operation handle 37b is touched and the stop switch 37e is not turned on, it is detected through the variable resistor 37d. A game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation being performed.

  Next, the main body frame 13 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 43 is formed at the center of the resin base 41. A game board 51 is detachably attached to the resin base 41. The game board 51 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 51 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 13 through the window hole 43 of the resin base 41.

  The structure of the game board 51 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 51.

  An inner rail portion 51a and an outer rail portion 51b are attached to the game board 51 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 51a and the outer rail portion 51b guide means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 45 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 43 in the resin base 41 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  The game ball launching mechanism 45 includes a launch rail 46 that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 47 that feeds the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 onto the launch rail 46, and a feed on the launch rail 46. And a solenoid 48 that is an electric actuator for firing a game ball toward the guide rail. When the shooting operation device 37 provided on the front door frame 14 is turned, the ball feeding device 47 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is supplied onto the shooting rail 46 and the solenoid 48 is driven and controlled. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  The game board 51 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 52, a special electricity winning device 53, a first operating opening 54, a second operating opening 55, a through gate 56, a symbol display unit 60, a special drawing unit 62, a universal drawing unit 63, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 56, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any of the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when 10 balls are paid out to the general winning opening 52, 10 winning balls are paid out, and 15 when the winning into the special winning device 53 occurs. When a prize ball is paid out and a ball enters the first operation port 54, three prize balls are paid out and a ball enters the second operation port 55. The payout of one prize ball is executed.

  Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, although the number of prize balls in the second operation port 55 is smaller than that in the first operation port 54, the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. The second working port 55 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first working port 54.

  In addition, an out port 58 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 51, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 58. The game board 51 is provided with a large number of nails 59 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 58, the general winning port 52, the special prize winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 are used. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 51. Both the first working port 54 and the second working port 55 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 54 and 55 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 54 is located upward. The second operating port 55 is provided with a general electric utility 55a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 55a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 55, and the winning of the second operating port 55 becomes possible when the electric utility item 55a is opened.

  A through gate 56 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 55 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 56 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 56 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 56 can win the second operating port 55.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 56, the universal power 55 a of the second operating port 55 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 56 as a trigger, and a normal display of the general-purpose unit 63 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The display 63 fluctuates and displays the pattern. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 63a is terminated, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 55a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the general map display unit 63a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 63a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 63, a universal map display 63b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display 63a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 56 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general-purpose hold display portion 63b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 61 of the special symbol unit 62 and the symbol display unit 60.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display section 62a. The display area of the special figure display unit 62 a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 61. In the special figure display unit 62a, a winning lottery is performed using a winning at the first operating port 54 or a winning at the second operating port 55 as a trigger, and thereby a change display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 62a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 62a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 62, a special figure holding display part 62b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 62a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reservation display section 62b.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 61 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 61 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 61, when the special symbol display unit 62a performs a variation display or a predetermined display on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or winning in the second operating port 55, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 61, not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, but also a display effect during the opening / closing execution mode described later that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is done.

  The display contents when the symbol display is performed by the symbol display device 61 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, the symbols of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. The stop is displayed. Further, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, as shown in FIG. 6A, there are five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right descending line L4, and a right ascending line L5. Is set.

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. The variable display starts to scroll in the direction. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the symbol display is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is either the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result, which will be described later, the same symbol combination is placed on any active line. It is formed. Further, in the case of an explicit high probability winning result which will be described later, the same symbol combination is not formed on any effective line, but a predetermined symbol combination is formed on any effective line.

  In addition, based on the winning in any one of the operation ports 54 and 55, the display is started in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, when a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 54 or the winning to the second operating port 55, it is possible to win the special electricity winning device 53. Transition to open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 53 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 51 and an open / close door 53a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 53a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 53a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  Next, the center frame 65 of the symbol display unit 60 will be described.

  The center frame 65 includes a roof unit 66 that surrounds the upper and left sides of the symbol display device 61, and a stage unit 67 that is disposed below the symbol display device 61. A ball entrance 66a is formed in the left frame portion of the roof unit 66, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance 66a are guided onto the stage unit 67 through a warp passage (not shown).

  The stage unit 67 has a rolling surface 67a on which the game ball can roll. The rolling surface 67a has a width dimension in the front-rear direction that is about two game balls, and has a smooth streamline shape that is substantially symmetrical in the lateral direction with the center portion at the center. Specifically, the rolling surface 67a is a mountain portion 67b whose central portion is raised upward, its left and right are valley portions 67c that are recessed downward, and its left and right ends are above the central portion. Located in.

  The trough portion 67c has a shape inclined downward toward the front. The game ball that has reached the trough portion 67c in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the trough portion 67c and discharged from the front edge of the trough portion 67c below the stage unit 67. A front guide path that extends in the front-rear direction and inclines downward toward the front is integrally formed at the top of the mountain portion 67b. The game ball that has reached the peak portion 67b in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the front guide path, and is discharged below the stage unit 67 from the front edge of the rolling surface 67a. And since the peak part 67b exists in the perpendicular | vertical upper direction of the 1st operation port 54, the game ball discharged | emitted below from the front guide path of the peak part 67b becomes easy to enter the 1st operation port 54. .

  A movable object unit 38 is provided above the center frame 65, that is, above the game area PA. The movable object unit 38 operates at the time of a notification effect described later. The contents of the movable object unit 38 will be described in detail later.

  An imaging substrate 71 is provided below the center frame 65. Incidentally, since the lower part of the center frame 65 exists at or near the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the vertical direction, the imaging substrate 71 must exist at the center or near the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the vertical direction. It becomes. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal sectional view of the imaging substrate 71 and its periphery for explaining the imaging substrate 71.

  As shown in FIG. 7, a light emitting device 72 and an imaging device 73 are provided on one plate surface of the imaging substrate 71. A plurality of light emitting devices 72 are provided side by side in the horizontal direction, and each light emitting device 72 can irradiate near infrared rays as projection light toward the measurement object. The imaging device 73 can receive the near-infrared reflected light at each of a large number of pixels provided as a large number of light receiving units, and outputs an imaging signal having an intensity corresponding to the light reception result using the photoelectric effect. The imaging substrate 71 derives a distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target based on the imaging signal using a so-called TOF (Time of Flight) technique. Specifically, the propagation time of the light to the measurement target is calculated based on the information on the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the information on the reflected light received by the imaging device 73, and the calculation result is known. The distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target is derived by using the speed of light. Further, since the derivation of the distance is performed for each of a large number of pixels of the imaging device 73, the distance to the measurement target can be derived for each pixel. Incidentally, in the case of such an imaging method, since it is difficult to be influenced by the optical properties of the surface of the measurement object, the application range of the measurement object from which distance data can be acquired is wide.

  The imaging substrate 71 is disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the stage member 68 that generates the rolling surface 67 a in the stage unit 67. Specifically, the stage member 68 is formed so as to bulge toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 so as to generate an internal space, and the internal space is opened toward the back of the pachinko machine 10. The opening 68a opened to the rear is closed from the back of the pachinko machine 10 by a substrate base 69 in which the imaging substrate 71 is integrated. The board pedestal 69 is screwed to the periphery of the opening 68 a in the stage member 68 from the back of the pachinko machine 10. Such screwing is performed so as to be detachable using a fixing tool. Accordingly, the non-destructive release of the screwed state enables the substrate base 69 integrated with the imaging substrate 71 to be removed from the stage member 68. For example, after the imaging substrate 71 is maintained or replaced, imaging is performed. It becomes possible to fix the substrate base 69 integrated with the substrate 71 to the stage member 68 again.

  The substrate pedestal 69 includes a support plate portion 69 a that supports the imaging substrate 71, and a support surface 69 b facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the support plate portion 69 a is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. An imaging substrate 71 is fixed on the support surface 69b. The imaging substrate 71 is disposed so that the surface opposite to the mounting surface 71a on which the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are mounted overlaps the support surface 69b, and the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are mounted. The mounting surface 71a faces obliquely upward.

  By providing the imaging substrate 71 as described above, the imaging substrate 71 is housed in a space defined by the stage member 68 and the substrate base 69. The light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are opposed to the stage member 68. In this case, the stage member 68 is formed of a material that can transmit light. Specifically, it is formed using a colorless and transparent acrylic resin.

  On the acrylic plate of the stage member 68, tin or silver is plated or vapor-deposited to form a thin reflective film, thereby providing a beam splitter function. Specifically, the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror (magic mirror). The pachinko machine 10 is installed and used in a game hall, and since there is no light source other than the light emitting device 72 that irradiates near infrared rays in the internal space of the stage member 68, the internal space side of the stage member 68 is on the stage. The space becomes darker than the member 68 in front of the pachinko machine 10. Then, even if the stage member 68 is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the stage member 68, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72, and the imaging device 73 cannot be viewed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71.

  Even when the front door frame 14 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 so that the stage member 68 is directly visible, the stage member 68 functions as a half mirror. And the imaging device 73 cannot be visually observed. As a result, even when a ball clogging or the like occurs in the game area PA and it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 to eliminate it, the imaging substrate 71 is used for imaging. Can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

  Furthermore, not only the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror, but also the substrate base 69 is formed to be colored and opaque. Then, even if the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is separated from the main body frame 13 to expose the back of the gaming board 51, the imaging board 71, the light emitting device 72, and the imaging device 73 cannot be visually observed. Therefore, even a game hall employee can be prevented from recognizing that imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71.

  On the other hand, since the stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror, the projection light irradiated from the light emitting device 72 can pass through the stage member 68 and the imaging device 73 can receive the light transmitted through the stage member 68. is there. Further, only the window panel 22 exists in front of the stage member 68. The window panel 22 is unitized by placing two colorless and transparent glasses facing each other in the front-rear direction so as to transmit light. Therefore, even if the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73 are provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the stage member 68, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 propagates in front of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 22. The imaging device 73 can receive the reflected light reflected by the measurement object existing in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22.

  The imaging range toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the imaging device 73 is a range that includes the rear of the player sitting in a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall and playing a game. Yes. Further, the horizontal imaging range by the imaging device 73 is IAX as shown in FIG. 1 and the vertical imaging range is IAY. In this imaging range, a window provided in the front door frame 14 is provided. The entire panel 22 is included. By setting the imaging range in this way, in the imaging device 73, the chest part of the player who is sitting in a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall and playing the game, and the part above the chest part Can be imaged.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the imaging range of the imaging device 73 includes a rolling surface 67 a formed on the stage member 68. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 67 a can be imaged by the imaging device 73. A game ball flowing down between the stage member 68 and the window panel 22 can also be imaged by the imaging device 73.

  On the other hand, in a configuration in which the display surface of the symbol display device 61 is present at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface of the game board 51, the stage member 68 is played from the display surface of the symbol display device 61 below the symbol display device 61. An imaging substrate 71 is provided on the back side of the stage member 68 so as to extend in the front-rear direction across the board surface of the board 51. Further, the imaging substrate 71 is provided so that the surface on which the imaging device 73 is mounted is inclined downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 on the back side of the stage member 68. Therefore, the imaging range of the imaging device 73 does not include obstacle members of the game area PA such as the nail 59 that changes the flow direction of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The main control device 81 includes a main control board that manages and manages the progress of the game in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  A sound emission control device 91 is provided above the main control device 81 on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The sound light emission control device 91 includes a sound light emission control board that performs sound output control, light emission control, and display control device control in accordance with instructions from the main control device 81, and the sound light emission control board is accommodated in a substrate box. .

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the main body frame 13 including the main controller 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 101 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 102 and a control device assembly unit 103 are attached to the back pack 101.

  The payout mechanism unit 102 includes a tank 105 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 105. The game balls paid out from the payout device 106 are discharged to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34 through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. The payout mechanism unit 102 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power source, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device collective unit 103 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by the payout control device 111 having a function of controlling the payout device 106 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 37 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 108 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 111 and the power supply / launch control device 108 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 111 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 101 is provided with an external terminal board 109 in addition to the payout mechanism 102 and the control device collective unit 103. The external terminal plate 109 is installed at the upper corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and on the upper corner. The external terminal board 109 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer of the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 82 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 86 that monitors the power source. An MPU 83 is mounted on the main control board 82. The MPU 83 includes a ROM 84 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 83 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 84 is executed. A RAM 85, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 84 and the RAM 85 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 83, but each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 83 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 83, a power failure monitoring board 86 provided in the main control device 81 is connected, and a payout control device 111 is connected. The power failure monitoring board 86 is connected to a power supply / launch control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 83 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 86.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are connected to the input side of the MPU 83. The various winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to winning-corresponding balls such as the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 83 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, in the MPU 83, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first working port 54 and the second working port 55.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a power failure monitoring board 86, a payout control device 111, and a sound emission control device 91 are connected. For example, the payout control device 111 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a special electric drive unit 53 c that opens and closes the open / close door 53 a of the special electric prize winning device 53, a general electric drive unit 55 c that opens and closes the electric utility item 55 a of the second operating port 55, The figure unit 62 and the universal figure unit 63 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display part 62 a and a special figure holding display part 62 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Similarly, the universal map unit 63 is provided with a universal map display unit 63 a and a universal map hold display unit 63 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. The main control board 82 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 83 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the special electricity driving unit 53c so that the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 55a is elected in the open state, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the power generator 55c so that the power utility item 55a is opened and closed. Further, in the game times and opening / closing execution modes, the display control of the special figure unit 62 is executed in the MPU 83. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the utility model 55a is clearly indicated, the MPU 83 executes display control of the universal unit 63.

  The power failure monitoring board 86 relays between the main control board 82 and the power / fire control device 108, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 108.

  The payout control device 111 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 106 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81. The payout control device 111 includes a payout control board 112, and an MPU 113 is mounted on the payout control board 112. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 113, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 115 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The MPU 113 is provided with an input / output port. On the input side of the MPU 113, a main control board 82, a power source / launch control device 108, a ball lending operation device 26, and a ball lending device Y are connected. In addition to the above, on the input side of the MPU 113, a sensor for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 106, and a sensor for detecting that no game ball is stored in the tank 105, A sensor for detecting that the lower plate 34 is full of game balls is electrically connected. On the other hand, the main control board 82 and the ball lending device Y are connected to the output side of the MPU 113. Further, a payout motor of the payout device 106 is electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 113.

  The MPU 113 controls the driving of the payout motor of the payout device 106 by receiving a prize ball command from the main control board 82, and pays out the number of game balls instructed in the prize ball command toward the downstream side. Further, by driving and controlling the payout motor of the payout device 106 based on the ball loan operation performed on the ball loan operation device 26, the number of game balls set by the ball loan operation are directed downstream. Let them pay out. In this case, by using the detection result of each sensor, when the designated number of game balls is paid out, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the tank 105 is in a no-ball state. Also, when the lower plate 34 becomes full, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  The power source / launch control device 108 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control device 81, the payout control device 111, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied.

  Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit 108a for turning on power and a power supply unit 108b for power interruption while supplying power for the operation. The power supply unit 108a for charging is connected to a commercial power source in a game hall, for example, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and also supplies the generated operating power Have The power supply unit for power interruption 108b is composed of a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit for power supply 108a is used. Charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the main power unit 108b is discharged from the power interruption. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 85 of the control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 85 of the main control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 108b during power interruption. Retained.

  The capacity of the power interruption unit 108b is kept relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 85 before the power interruption is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). The power supply unit for interruption 108b is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power to the power supply unit 108b during power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  The power supply / launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) different from the power supply unit 108b for power interruption. In the power source / launch control device 108, even after the DC stable power source of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power source unit for power failure is discharged for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing described later, The output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. Thereby, main controller 81 etc. can perform and complete processing at the time of a power failure normally.

  The power source / fire control device 108 is provided with a fire control unit 108c in addition to the various power source units 108a and 108b. A touch sensor 37c, a variable resistor 37d, and a stop switch 37e built in the firing operation device 37 are electrically connected to the firing control unit 108c.

  The touch sensor 37c has a built-in capacitor. When the player's hand contacts the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electrical signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation is emitted. Output to. The firing control unit 108c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle by receiving the predetermined electric signal. In addition, the firing control unit 108c grasps whether or not the firing operation device 37 has been fired according to the electrical signal received from the stop switch 37e, and rotates the operation handle according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 37d. Know the amount of operation.

  The firing control unit 108c transmits a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 83 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. Specifically, the firing control unit 108c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player from the touch sensor 37c and outputs a signal indicating that the firing stop operation is not performed from the stop switch 37e. On the condition that it is received, a HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 83. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the MPU 83. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device Y is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfaction signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction.

  In the MPU 83, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the game ball can be permitted to be released, the HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) is sent to the launch control unit 108c. Will continue to be sent. Note that the MPU 83 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when the HI level condition establishment signal is not received from the launch control unit 108c, but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the game ball launch mechanism 45 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 83, the launch control unit 108c periodically drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 45. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 45, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific launch cycle (specifically 0.6 sec). . Further, since the firing strength is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 37d at the time of launching, the game ball is launched with strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle.

  The audio emission control device 91 includes an audio emission control board 92 on which an MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 93 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 83, ROM 84, and RAM 85 of the main control board 82 are referred to as the main side MPU 83, main side ROM 84, and main side RAM 85, and the MPU 93, ROM 94, and RAM 95 of the sound emission control board 92 are referred to as The sound light side MPU 93, sound light side ROM 94, and sound light side RAM 95 are referred to.

  The sound light side MPU 93 is electrically connected to the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the effect driving unit 38 c and the display control device 96 on the output side, and displays light emission based on the command received from the main side MPU 83. The unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the effect driving unit 38 c are driven and controlled, and a command is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 is electrically connected to the symbol display device 61 and executes display control of the symbol display device 61 based on a command received from the sound light side MPU 93. Various effects are performed using the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the effect driving unit 38c, and the symbol display device 61, and abnormality notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the symbol display device 61. The state of the pachinko machine 10 is notified. In addition, an imaging substrate 71 is electrically connected to the input side and the output side of the sound light side MPU 93, and imaging is performed on the imaging substrate 71 according to the signal output from the sound light side MPU 93. The imaging result is received by the sound light side MPU 93.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 83>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 83 uses various counter information during the game to perform winning occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 62a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 61, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 63a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 61 are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the general-purpose role 55a of the second operating port 55 is set to the open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 85a of the RAM 85.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation area 85b when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs.

  The special figure holding area 85b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55 are stored and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 62a, and starting one game time At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general-purpose holding area 85c of the main RAM 85 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 56. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility 55a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility 55 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball PA is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the power utility 55a of the second operation port 55 is per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the open state of the open call using the open call lottery using the normal call random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 55a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set to be longer. Yes. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric power utility is selected and the open state of the electric utility object 55a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display continuation time for the display unit 63a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 55 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 54 than in the second operating port 55, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 54. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 55 increases.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 63a based on winning to the through gate 56) after the next public train opening lottery is performed and the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed, and the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  When the public power open lottery using the general power random number counter C4 is won, the public power open state is entered. The public power open state is terminated when a predetermined number of times the power utility 55a is opened or closed, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the second operation port 55. To do. Specifically, the above upper limit number is 10 in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening / closing of the utility model 55a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the high-frequency support mode is more often than in the low-frequency support mode. There are three times. In addition, the duration of one opening of the utility model 55a is 1 sec in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 sec in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won in the determination of the success / failure is stored in the main ROM 84 as a success / failure table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity prize winning device 53 is controlled to open / close, and can be a transition trigger for at least one of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means. In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode winning / failing table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random number values to be a big win is set larger than when the low-probability mode success / failure table is referenced. Specifically, there are 20 pieces. In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode.

  If the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the stored value of the big hit type counter C2.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the big hit is won is a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined opening duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric prize device 53. That is. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the round number regulation mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 53 is relatively high during the period from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. And are set. Specifically, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electricity prize device 53 are set with different opening durations from when the special electricity prize device 53 is opened until it is closed. Yes. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.05 sec, which is a shorter duration than the above long time, are set. ing. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 37 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 45 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 10. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, an opening duration time is set that is shorter than the product of the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launching period of the game balls. ing. Therefore, when the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electricity prize winning device 53 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game. When the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once in the aspect, it is expected that no special electric prize winning device 53 is won.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electricity winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a long-time manner. That is, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a long-time manner. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode. That is, the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 53 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. As long as the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity winning device 53 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode is started and ended, the value is not limited to the above value. It is.

  The types of jackpot result type for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main ROM 84 as a sorting table. In the distribution table, as the types of jackpot results, a low probability jackpot result, an explicit high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode before shifting to the open / close execution mode becomes any low probability mode. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the jackpot result is the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically 100 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more after the transition. The low-frequency support mode that has been shifted to after the completion of the step will be the next jackpot result, and will at least continue until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The explicit high-accuracy big hit result is that the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed, It is a jackpot result that becomes the high-frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shifts, and the opening / closing execution mode It is a jackpot result that becomes the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In the distribution table, out of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit high probability big hit result. , “15-29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 61. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 61 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 61 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the corresponding result at the stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the symbols in the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in that state. A display state for performing variable display is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire symbol display device 61 after the combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 61, or in some symbol sequences, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the probability that the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 84 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when

  On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the main MPU 83 but by the sound light MPU 93. In this case, in the sound side MPU 93, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are easier to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the missed result, and a notice display having a low appearance rate is generated. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easy to do. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 61.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 83 determines the display continuation time in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display continuation time in the symbol display device 61. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 62a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 61.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 83>
Next, various processes executed to advance the game in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main MPU 83 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in the pachinko machine 10 at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, main processing in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, a power-on wait process on the main side is executed. In the power-on wait process on the main side, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the main RAM 85 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 83 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 108 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 85. It is determined whether or not. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 85 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 85. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to

  In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 85 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is given to the sound emission control device 91 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To send to.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 83 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 85, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main control board 82 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 83. A peripheral circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 83. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 83 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 83 executes processing for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts timer interrupt processing with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 83, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 83, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 83 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed. In the power failure process, after various data settings are made so that the state before power shut-off can be restored at the next power-on, the system waits until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 83 is completely shut off.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Specifically, by making an affirmative determination in step S206, the process for advancing the game in steps S207 to S218 is not executed. If the game progress is to be stopped, a command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 so that notification corresponding to the event that triggered the game progress is executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are started again when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 83, and the operating power to the main MPU 83 is After the supply is stopped, the supply of the operating power is started while the RAM erase switch of the power supply / emission control device 108 is pressed, so that the main RAM 85 is not executed as the initialization is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S207 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 53c and 55c is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 53 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 53c is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

  In addition, when the information for switching the general electric utility 55a of the second working port 55 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 55c should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are read, and the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 are read. A process for specifying whether or not there is a ball is executed.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 85 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In subsequent step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of any one of magnetism, radio waves, and vibrations is confirmed using the detection results of the corresponding detection sensors. When it is confirmed that any of the fraud handling events has occurred, the game stop setting is performed in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, and an affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In the subsequent step S212, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the launch operation device 37, as described above, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S213, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 87a to 87e and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. Do.

  In the subsequent step S214, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S215, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary power transmission control process, when winning to the through gate 56 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is executed and the numerical information is stored. The numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, with the opening determination as a trigger, a process for performing an effect for a general map is executed in the general map display unit 63a. In addition, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the common utility 55a of the second working port 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S216, based on the processing results of immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 62a in the special figure hold display unit 62b, The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 63a to the general figure hold display unit 63b is set. In step S216, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 62a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the general map display unit 63a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the subsequent step S217, the content of the command received from the payout control device 111 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S218, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 is generated, a process for obtaining the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed in step S301. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball to the first operating port 54 occurs or when the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 55 occurs, the special figure holding area 85b is reserved. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit value (specifically “4”). Stored in the uppermost area of the holding area RE where no holding information is stored.

  In the acquisition process, when the hold information is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the hold command, and changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 61 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. When the number of the hold information increases as described above, the display control process in step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) displays so as to change to the display content corresponding to the increase in the hold number. Control is performed.

  In the subsequent step S302, the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 85 is read out, and in the step S303, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 84 is read out. In step S304, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

  Here, the processing content of step S302-step S304 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process for controlling the effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for game times, a special figure variation start process (step S306) that is a process for starting the effect for game times and an effect for game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set.

  Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 53 Special electric power opening process (step S310), special electric power closing apparatus processing (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 53, ending of the opening / closing execution mode and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power end process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 83 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S311). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special power counter is the special figure special electric power control at the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information stored at present is finished. Corresponding to the process executed in the process, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed. The special figure special electricity counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306. If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S307. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S308. If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S309. If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process in step S310. If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process in step S311. If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S312. When any one of steps S306 to S312 is executed, the special figure special power control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the process of step S306-step S312 is demonstrated separately.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not holding information is stored in the special figure holding area 85b. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, a data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the sound emission control device 91 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S403, an appropriateness determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the main ROM 84, it is acquired from the information stored in the execution area AE, ie, the information for the success / failure determination, that is, the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the obtained numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode determination table provided in the main ROM 84. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 84, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the low likelihood jackpot result, the explicit high likelihood jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game round relating to the start of the current fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 84 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 85. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  The information on the type of the picture to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 85 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S405 is displayed. Set “1” to the corresponding flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S408. Specifically, the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game round corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 85. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing any one of steps S407 and S408, display continuation time acquisition processing is executed in step S409. In the acquisition process, the display at the current game time is determined according to the current gaming state, the result of the determination process, the result of the distribution determination process, the presence / absence of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter CS. Get the duration information.

  After the display continuation time acquisition process is executed in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410, and the display continuation time information acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 11) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game times, the symbol variation display on the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 61 are performed. In a state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 61, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is a time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

  In subsequent step S411, the change command and the type command are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The change command has a data structure of 2 bytes. The 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and display duration time. And corresponding data. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a change command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process is performed by the next 4 bits of data. In addition, lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and time data corresponding to the display duration time is set by the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when the sound side MPU 93 receives the change command, the sound side MPU 93 recognizes the change command from the identification data, and uses the lottery result data to determine the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. And the display duration of the current game time is recognized from the time data. Here, since the main MPU 83 selects a different display continuation time depending on whether or not reach occurs, even if the information on whether or not reach occurs is included in the change command, the sound light MPU 93 displays it. It is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach from the duration information. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and the type of the success / failure lottery mode. And data corresponding to the number of remaining continuations of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process and the following 4 bits of data are set. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is the data corresponding to the type of the lottery mode and the remaining number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode. Data is set. Therefore, when receiving the type command, the sound side MPU 93 recognizes the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. The type of success / failure lottery mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode are recognized from the data for the number of continuations.

  Here, both the change command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 collates the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, so that noise or the like is received with respect to the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. And when both the lottery result data match, the production control corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both the lottery result data do not match Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound light side MPU 93 may execute an effect for game times corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game times. For example, in the effect for game times, the determination processing and the determination of distribution are performed. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 61 may reliably stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to complete detachment. In this case, the game turn effect may be configured to be performed over a display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, or may be configured to continue until the next variation command and type command are received. Also good.

  After performing the process of step S411, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display part 62a is started in step S412. In the subsequent step S413, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the process of step S413 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display unit 62a is determined. A process for changing regularly is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not reach display occurs.

  Also, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, this special figure is executed after executing the above regular change process. The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93 in order to display the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 61 for final stop display. The display mode of the picture on the display unit 62a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. Further, information on the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game times is read from the main ROM 84 and set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electricity counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure determining process in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special chart finalizing process, if the final stop time of the current game round has not elapsed, the special chart finalizing process is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed If the result of the determination of success / failure that triggered the current game is an out-of-game result, the special figure special counter is cleared to “0”, and then the processing for determining the special figure is terminated. If the result of the determination of success / failure is any jackpot result, processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the process for switching to the opening / closing execution mode, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The opening command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is the timing for starting the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the effect in the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “3”. Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process of step S309 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special power start process, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 85 and the main RAM 85 Is set to 10 in the winning counter provided. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode by the main MPU 83, and the winning counter is the upper limit number of game balls in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode. The main MPU 83 specifies whether or not a winning has occurred. Then, an opening continuation time corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter, and the special electric prize winning device 53 is brought into an opened state. Further, when the special prize winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. By receiving the opening command, the sound light side MPU 93 executes control for switching the effect in the opening / closing execution mode accordingly. After the special electricity winning device 53 is opened, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and the special electricity start process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” when the special electricity start process is executed, it becomes “4” after 1 is added.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special power open process in step S310 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, it is determined whether or not an end condition of one round game is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electric prize device 53 is closed and a close command is issued. Transmit to the optical MPU 93. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the closing time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and is specifically 1 sec longer than the game ball firing cycle. When the special electricity prize winning device 53 is in the closed state, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the round counter is “0” or not. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity release process is executed is “4”, so “1” is added after 1 is added.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process in step S311 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electricity closing process, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the special electric power closing process is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has elapsed, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened and the opening / closing execution mode of this time is executed. The opening duration corresponding to the hit result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Further, when the special prize winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity closing process is executed is “5”, so that “1” is obtained after 1 subtraction.

  On the other hand, when the round counter is “0”, an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The ending command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is a timing for starting an effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result triggered by the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information on the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” when the special electricity closing process is executed, it becomes “6” after 1 is added.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special electric power end process of step S312 in the special graphic special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending time has passed. If the ending time has not passed, the special electric power end process is ended as it is. If the ending time has elapsed, set the contents of the success / failure lottery mode and support mode after the opening / closing execution mode to the contents corresponding to the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode, Further, after the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”, the special electricity termination process is terminated.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 93>
Next, timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) in the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the timer interruption process, first, in step S501, a main-side command storage process is executed. The main-side command storage process is a process for storing a command in the sound light side RAM 95 when a command is received from the main-side MPU 83. The sound light side RAM 95 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 83. The commands received from the main MPU 83 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and stored. The data are sequentially read according to the order.

  In the subsequent step S502, a main-side command handling process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 83 is executed. In the main-side command handling process, a data table for enabling execution and notification according to the command received from the main-side MPU 83 is read. Thereafter, in step S503, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 23 is executed according to the data table read in step S502 or the data table read in another process, and in step S504, A sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 24 is executed in accordance with the data table read in step S502 or the data table read in another process. In step S505, the sound output control process is performed. A movable object control process for driving and controlling the effect drive unit 38c of the movable object unit 38 is executed in accordance with the data table that has been read out or the data table read out in another process.

  After executing the process of step S505, after executing the processes of steps S506 to S513 for performing the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and the use of the imaging results, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Main command processing>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the main-side command response process in step S502 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 83. If these commands are received, game result storage processing is executed in step S602. Specifically, based on the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 83 at the start of the current game round, that is, the current game Information indicating whether the game result of the game is the most advantageous big hit result, the explicit high probability big hit result, the low likelihood big hit result, or the outlier result is specified, and the specified information is written in the sound light side RAM 95.

  In the subsequent step S603, a notice lottery process is executed. In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 61 in the current game round. As the notice display, as described above, in the situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started by the symbol display device 61, or a part of the symbols is displayed. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a background screen as a previous mode Includes a different predetermined mode, and a pattern on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. The notice display can occur at any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the probability that the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur. In addition, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  In the subsequent step S604, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is the most advantageous big hit result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5 is displayed as the stop result of this time. It is determined as information. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd symbols are easily selected as symbols forming the same symbol combination. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability winning result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5, It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit high probability winning result, it is different from the combination of the same symbols on the one effective line L1 to L5 and different from the combination of the reach symbols. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is established is determined as information on the current stop result. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a missed result, the presence or absence of reach display is specified from the contents of the change command. And when reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is established on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result to be determined is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, this is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the result is determined as information on the current stop result.

  In the subsequent step S605, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, the information on the display duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the game result specified in step S602, And the production | generation pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the lottery result of the notice lottery process in the said step S603 is selected.

  In subsequent step S606, a data table corresponding to the type of effect pattern selected in step S605 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S604 is read from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. In the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed according to the data table, and in the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) The sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed according to the above, and in the movable object control process (step S505) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the drive control of the effect drive unit 38c is performed according to the data table.

  In subsequent step S607, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S604 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S605 are transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the stop result command and the pattern command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the display effect corresponding to the effect pattern is performed, and the game turn effect ends. Controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process is stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601, or after the processing in step S607 is executed, it is determined in step S608 whether a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display control device 96 in step S609. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display control device 96 to wait for the stop symbol corresponding to the current game time on the active lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S608, or after the process of step S609 is executed, it is determined in step S610 whether an open / close execution mode command is received. As an opening / closing execution mode command, an opening command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and an opening command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the special prize winning device 53 is opened. In addition, there are a closing command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the special prize winning device 53 is closed, and an ending command transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  If an open / close execution mode command is received, a data table corresponding to the command is read from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95 in step S611. Thereby, the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) performs the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 according to the data table, and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed according to the data table, and drive control of the effect drive unit 38c is performed according to the data table in the movable object control process (step S505) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  In the subsequent step S612, a command corresponding to the command of the opening / closing execution mode system received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 controls display of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect corresponding to the command of the opening / closing execution mode system is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S610, or if the process of step S612 has been executed, it is determined in step S613 whether or not a notification command has been received from the main MPU 83. The notification command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 when an event that should be notified, such as any abnormality or state change of the pachinko machine 10, is occurring in the pachinko machine 10. When the notification command is received, in order to perform notification corresponding to the notification command, the light emission data reading process is executed in step S614, and the sound output data reading process is executed in step S615. Run. Thereby, in the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed so that the light emission according to the light emission data is performed, and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). In the output control process (step S504), sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed so that sound according to the sound output data is output. Thereafter, in step S616, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S613, or if the process of step S616 is executed, it is determined in step S617 whether a release command has been received. The cancel command is transmitted from the main MPU 83 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. If a cancel command has been received, a cancel setting process is executed in step S618 in order to cancel the notification that has already been made. Thereafter, in step S619, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S617, or if the process of step S619 is executed, the other corresponding process is executed in step S620, and then the corresponding process is terminated. In other processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command is received. If the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 96. Thereby, the demonstration display is started in the symbol display device 61.

<Various Processes for Performing Imaging Control of Imaging Substrate 71 and Various Controls Using Imaging Results>
Next, various processes for performing the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and various controls using the imaging results will be described. Prior to describing the processing contents of various processes, an electrical configuration for executing these various processes will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the imaging substrate 71 includes the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73. The light emitting device 72 includes an LED driver 72a whose emission timing of projection light is controlled by a control circuit 74 provided on the imaging substrate 71 and an LED that can emit near infrared rays, and is driven by the LED driver 72a to project light. An LED module 72b that irradiates the LED module 72b, and a radiation angle adjustment lens 72c that is arranged on the front side of the LED module 72b in the light irradiation direction and that can adjust the radiation angle of the projection light with respect to the measurement target. I have. When a signal indicating that the projection light should be irradiated is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71, the LED driver 72a operates based on the control of the control circuit 74, and accordingly, the LED module 72b approaches the LED driver 72a. Infrared rays are irradiated. In this case, the near-infrared light is irradiated as pulsed light at a constant cycle so that the emission intensity of the near-infrared light irradiated toward the measurement target is modulated at a constant cycle. Two light emitting devices 72 are provided, and the electrical configuration of each light emitting device 72 is the same in the above configuration.

  The imaging device 73 receives reflected light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and reflected by the measurement target, and detects an imaging signal corresponding to the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target using a plurality of pixels, respectively. And a viewing angle adjusting lens 73b that is arranged on the irradiation source side of the reflected light with respect to the imaging sensor 73a and that can adjust the viewing angle on which the reflected light from the measurement target is incident. A CMOS image sensor is used as the imaging sensor 73a, but other imaging sensors such as a MOS sensor may be used.

  The imaging sensor 73a includes a pixel array unit 73c having a large number of pixels (for example, 1000 pixels) in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as a light receiving unit, and each of these pixels in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. The pixel driver unit 73d that scans the signal and reads out the signal from each pixel is provided, and the signal read out by the pixel driver unit 73d is A / D converted after noise cancellation processing. The converted output signal is received by a signal processing circuit 75 provided on the imaging substrate 71.

  The signal processing circuit 75 derives the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement object using a so-called TOF (Time of Flight) technique. Specifically, the propagation time of the light to the measurement target is calculated based on the information on the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the information on the reflected light received by the imaging device 73, and the calculation result is known. The distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target is derived by using the speed of light. In addition, since the derivation of the distance is performed for each of a large number of pixels of the imaging sensor, the distance to the measurement target can be derived for each pixel.

  The reference flag 75a provided in the signal processing circuit 75 stores reference data serving as a reference when determining whether or not to use the received signal for calculating distance data. If the intensity of the received signal is equal to or higher than the intensity corresponding to the reference data stored in the reference flag 75a, the signal processing circuit 75 uses the received signal for calculating distance data.

  The imaging substrate 71 having the above configuration performs irradiation of projection light from the light emitting device 72 and derivation of distance data using an imaging result in the imaging device 73 based on receiving a signal from the sound light side MPU 93. Specifically, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits a signal to the imaging substrate 71 when performing a predetermined effect based on a command received from the main side MPU 83 to irradiate projection light and derive distance data. . Further, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits a signal to the imaging substrate 71 in order to perform various types of monitoring in a situation where the imaging substrate 71 is not used for production, and irradiates the projection light and derives the distance data. Let it be done. The timing at which this monitoring is performed includes the timing when the game ball is not being fired. When determining whether or not it is the timing, it is based on the signal transmitted from the power source / launch control device 108. A command transmitted from the side MPU 83 is referred to. Further, the timing at which the monitoring is performed includes a timing at which a return operation for returning the storage medium from the ball lending device Y is included, and when determining whether or not it is the timing, the payout control device 111 is used. A command transmitted from the main MPU 83 is referred to based on a signal transmitted from the MPU 113 of the master.

  The distance data acquired in the imaging substrate 71 based on the instruction from the sound light side MPU 93 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When transmitting the distance data, address data indicating which pixel in the pixel array unit 73c corresponds to the distance data is also transmitted. These distance data are written in a distance image storage area 95 a provided in the sound light side RAM 95. In this case, a unit storage area is provided in the distance image storage area 95 a in a one-to-one correspondence with a large number of pixels provided in the pixel array unit 73 c of the imaging device 73, and is transmitted from the imaging substrate 71. The distance data is individually written in the unit storage area corresponding to the pixel from which the distance data can be derived. The sound light side MPU 93 uses the distance data written in the distance image storage area 95a, not only the distance of each individual image included in the image for one frame, but also the player's hand, finger, face, body. Or the shape and size of the hands, fingers, face, and body. An image for one frame means that reception of reflected light has been completed at all the pixels of the pixel array unit 73c in the imaging device 73 in response to a single projection light irradiation command issued to the light emitting device 72. It is an image that can be grasped from the distance data derived based on.

  The distance data is derived as a value corresponding to the distance from the distance data reference position individually set for each pixel of the pixel array unit 73c. In this case, the distance data reference position is set to “0”, the distance data value decreases as the distance data is closer to the reference position, and the distance data value increases as the distance from the reference position increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance data reference position is set as a value other than “0”. Therefore, the distance data value may increase as the distance from the reference position increases. Further, the distance data reference position may be set as “0”, and the distance data may be more negative as the distance from the reference position becomes larger.

<Reference switch monitoring process>
Next, the reference switch monitoring process executed in step S506 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  Prior to the description of the reference switch monitoring process, the reference switch 91a will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the reference switch 91 a is manually operated when the gaming machine body 12 is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is opened behind the gaming machine body 12 in the sound emission control device 91. It is provided at a position where it can be operated. The reference switch 91a can move between two positions, an ON position and an OFF position.

  The reference switch 91a is operated to set a reference when determining whether or not the signal received by the imaging device 73 of the imaging substrate 71 is used for calculating distance data in the signal processing circuit 75. It is. The contents of the reference will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As a reference for the signal strength, a first reference strength and a second reference strength are prepared in advance at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. The first reference intensity is set to have a higher signal intensity than the second reference intensity. When the first reference intensity is set as the reference intensity, the received signal is used for calculating distance data when the maximum intensity of the received signal is equal to or greater than the first reference intensity. In addition, when the second reference intensity is set as the reference intensity, the received signal is used for calculating the distance data when the maximum intensity of the received signal is equal to or higher than the second reference intensity. To do. Accordingly, when a signal as shown in FIG. 17A is received, the signal is used for calculating distance data regardless of whether the first reference intensity or the second reference intensity is set. Is done. On the other hand, when a signal as shown in FIG. 17B is received, in a situation where the first reference intensity is set, the signal is not used for calculating the distance data, and the second reference intensity is set. In this situation, the signal is used for calculating distance data.

  When the first reference intensity is set, only a signal having a relatively large signal intensity is used when calculating the distance data, so that the influence of noise is reduced when the distance data is derived. Is possible. On the other hand, when the second reference intensity is set, a signal having a relatively small signal intensity is also used when calculating the distance data. It is possible to derive distance data even when the intensity is low.

  The first reference intensity and the second reference intensity are in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 in relation to the light transmittance of members such as the window panel 22 and the stage member 68 existing on the propagation path of the light emitted from the light emitting device 72. Determined by In this case, the first reference intensity is set as an intensity higher than the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 and the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the window panel 22. On the other hand, the second reference intensity is set as an intensity higher than the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the window panel 22, but the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 having the function of a half mirror. Is set to be low in strength. On the other hand, although details will be described later, the imaging substrate 71 executes a process for preventing the reflected light reflected by the stage member 68 from being used when calculating the distance data.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 irradiates the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 provided in the game area PA with illegal radio waves, and makes a profit. An act that attempts to gain fraud is assumed. On the other hand, depending on the game hall, it is possible to attach a radio wave anti-going sheet to the window panel 22 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the radio wave anti-going prevention sheet PS is not attached, and FIG. 18B is a case in which the radio wave anti-going prevention sheet PS is attached. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the radio wave anti-reflection sheet PS is not attached to the window panel 22, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the reflected light reflected by the measurement object MO are reflected on the window panel. 22 and the stage member 68 are reflected within the range obtained experimentally at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if the reference strength is set to the first reference strength, the distance data can be derived as designed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the radio wave anti-going sheet PS is attached to the back surface of the window panel 22, the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the reflection reflected by the measurement object MO. The light is reflected not only by the window panel 22 and the stage member 68 but also by the radio wave anti-reflection sheet PS. In this case, the signal intensity of the reflected light reflected by the measurement object MO is reduced accordingly. Then, if the reference intensity is set to the first reference intensity, it may be impossible to derive the distance data as designed. On the other hand, the distance data can be derived by setting the reference intensity to the second reference intensity that is lower than the first reference intensity.

  As described above, by setting the first reference intensity and the second reference intensity, it is possible to derive the distance data based on the first reference intensity which is basically not easily affected by noise. In the case where the radio wave prevention sheet PS is used, the distance data can be derived based on the second reference intensity corresponding to the decrease in the signal intensity of the reflected light. When the reference switch 91a is provided and the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, the first reference intensity is set as the reference intensity, and when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. The second reference intensity is set as the reference intensity.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the reference switch 91a is electrically connected to the sound light side MPU 93. When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, a LOW level reference signal is sent to the sound light side MPU 93. When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, a HI level reference signal is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position, a signal corresponding thereto is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71, whereby the first reference intensity is set as a reference, and the reference switch 91a is set to the ON position. In this case, the second reference intensity is set as a reference by transmitting a corresponding signal from the sound light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the reference switch monitoring process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S701, based on the signal received from the reference switch 91a, it is determined whether or not the reference switch 91a is located at the ON position. If the reference switch 91a is located at the OFF position, the first reference signal is transmitted to the signal processing circuit 75 of the imaging substrate 71 in step S702. Thereafter, in step S703, the reference flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to “0”, and then the reference switch monitoring process is terminated. The reference flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 whether or not the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position.

  On the other hand, when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the OFF position (step S701: YES), the second reference signal is transmitted to the signal processing circuit 75 in step S704. Thereafter, in step S705, “1” is set in the reference flag provided in the sound side RAM 95, and then the reference switch monitoring process is terminated.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a flow of signal processing operations executed by the signal processing circuit 75.

  The signal processing circuit 75 receives the second reference signal when the reception state of the reference signal changes, that is, when the second reference signal is changed from the state where the first reference signal is received or when the second reference signal is received. If the current state changes from the current state to the state where the first reference signal is received (step S801: YES), the state of the reference flag 75a provided in the signal processing circuit 75 is changed according to the type of the reference signal received this time. Change (step S802). Specifically, the value of the reference flag 75a is “0” when the first reference signal is received, and the state of the reference flag 75a is “1” when the second reference signal is received. The

  When the imaging device 73 receives reflected light and the corresponding imaging signal is transmitted from the imaging device 73 (step S803: YES), the signal processing circuit 75 calculates distance data according to the state of the reference flag 75a. Then, the distance data of the calculation result is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

  Specifically, when the value of the reference flag 75a is “0” (step S804: NO), on the condition that the maximum value of the signal intensity of the imaging signal received this time is equal to or higher than the first reference intensity ( Step S805: YES), the distance data calculation process (step S806) is executed using the imaging signal, and the distance data of the calculation result is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S807). When transmitting the distance data, address data corresponding to the pixel of the pixel array unit 73c that has received the current imaging signal is transmitted. Thereby, the sound light side MPU 93 writes the received distance data in the unit storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted along with the distance data in the distance image storage area 95a.

  When a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the first reference intensity or more are received from one pixel, the signal processing circuit 75 derives distance data for each of the imaging signals, and sets the distance data as one. Is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from the pixel. When receiving a plurality of distance data for one pixel, the sound light side MPU 93 writes all the distance data in the corresponding unit storage area. However, the signal processing circuit 75 is not limited to this, and when the signal processing circuit 75 receives a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the first reference intensity or more from one pixel, the signal intensity is the highest among these imaging signals. For example, the distance data may be derived for those having high values, and only the distance data may be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from one pixel.

  On the other hand, when the value of the reference flag 75a is “1” (step S804: YES), on the condition that the maximum value of the signal strength of the imaging signal received this time is greater than or equal to the second reference strength (step S808: YES), the distance data calculation process (step S809) is executed using the image pickup signal. After the distance data calculation processing is executed, the distance data is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 on condition that the distance data of the calculation result corresponds to data greater than or equal to the reference distance (step S810: YES). (Step S811). When transmitting the distance data, address data corresponding to the pixel of the pixel array unit 73c that has received the current imaging signal is transmitted. Thereby, the sound light side MPU 93 writes the received distance data in the unit storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted along with the distance data in the distance image storage area 95a.

  Here, the reference distance is set as a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the back surface 22b of the window panel 22 and closer to the imaging device 73 than the front surface 22a of the window panel 22, as shown in FIG. Has been. The pixel array unit of the imaging device 73 is associated with the fact that the virtual reference plane corresponding to the position that becomes the reference distance is set vertically while the imaging surface of the imaging device 73 faces obliquely upward. The value of distance data corresponding to the reference distance is different for each pixel 73c. The same applies to the recognition correspondence distance, the monitoring distance, and the reference target distance described later.

  When the reference intensity is set to the second reference intensity, it is assumed that the intensity of the reflected light reflected by the radio wave prevention sheet PS is higher than the second reference intensity. Further, since the second reference intensity is lower than the first reference intensity, it is assumed that the intensity of reflected light at the stage member 68 functioning as a half mirror is higher than the second reference intensity. On the other hand, only the distance data corresponding to the reference distance or more is set as a transmission target to the sound light side MPU 93 so that the distance data derived from each reflected light is not used in the sound light side MPU 93. It becomes possible. Incidentally, in a situation where “1” is set in the reference flag 75a, a situation may occur in which an imaging signal corresponding to distance data that is equal to or greater than the reference distance from one pixel is not received. For the pixel, the distance data is not transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

  When a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the second reference intensity or more are received from one pixel, the signal processing circuit 75 derives distance data for each of the imaging signals, and out of the distance data All of the distance data corresponding to the reference distance or more is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 as distance data derived from one pixel. When receiving a plurality of distance data for one pixel, the sound light side MPU 93 writes all the distance data in the corresponding unit storage area. However, the signal processing circuit 75 is not limited to this, and when the signal processing circuit 75 receives a plurality of types of imaging signals corresponding to the second reference intensity or more from one pixel, the signal intensity is the highest among these imaging signals. The distance data may be derived for those having a high value, and when the distance data corresponds to the reference distance or more, the distance data may be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 as the distance data derived from one pixel.

  The signal processing circuit 75 receives an imaging signal from all the pixels of the pixel array unit 73c when an allowable imaging period (for example, 5 msec) has elapsed since the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72, and based on these imaging signals. When the distance data is transmitted, it is determined that the imaging has been completed (step S812: YES), and an imaging completion signal is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

<Imaging control processing>
Next, the imaging control process executed in step S513 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the reception standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The reception standby flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the sound light side MPU 93 is in a state of waiting for acquisition of distance data after the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72.

  If “1” is not set in the reception standby flag, it is determined in step S902 whether or not “1” is set in any imaging command flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The imaging command flag is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the later-described canceling monitoring process, height position monitoring process, face authentication process, first situation monitoring process, second situation monitoring process, and operation effect control process. This is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 whether or not the derivation of distance data by the imaging substrate 71 is instructed in any of these processes.

  If “1” is not set for all imaging command flags, the main imaging control process is terminated as it is, and if any imaging command flag is set to “1”, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the control circuit 74 of the imaging substrate 71. Thereby, the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72. In the subsequent step S904, “1” is set to a reception standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95.

  Thereafter, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the imaging command flag that triggered the affirmative determination in step S902 is an imaging command flag for an effect system or an imaging command flag corresponding to return authentication. The effect-related imaging command flag is an imaging command flag in which “1” is set in the operation effect control process. The imaging command flag corresponding to return-time authentication is a flag that is set to “1” in authentication processing at the time of return operation described later. If it is an imaging command flag for an effect system or an imaging command flag corresponding to return authentication, the imaging control process is terminated as it is. If it is not an effect-related imaging command flag or an imaging command flag corresponding to return-time authentication, in step S906, after clearing the imaging command flag that triggered an affirmative determination in step S902, "0" The imaging control process ends. Thereby, when the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71 is used as an effect or when used as return authentication, the imaging on the imaging substrate 71, that is, the derivation of the distance data is repeatedly executed, When the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71 is used for the purpose other than the production or the authentication at the time of return, the imaging on the imaging substrate 71 is performed only once for one imaging instruction unless the imaging retry is executed. Executed.

  On the other hand, if “1” is set in the reception standby flag, it is determined in step S907 whether or not imaging has been completed on the imaging substrate 71 in response to the current imaging command. The sound light side MPU 93 determines that imaging has been completed when an imaging completion signal is received from the signal processing circuit 75. Incidentally, the longest time required from when the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the imaging substrate 71 in step S903 until it is determined that the imaging is completed in step S907 is about 10 msec.

  If the imaging is not completed, the imaging control process is terminated as it is, and if the imaging is completed, the process proceeds to step S908. In step S908, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the cancellation monitoring flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The cancel monitoring flag indicates that either an imaging instruction is used to use an image for one frame in a cancellation monitoring process described later, or an imaging waiting state corresponding to the imaging instruction. This is a flag for specifying in the side MPU 93. When “1” is set in the cancel monitoring flag, the process of step S915 described later is executed, and then the imaging control process ends.

  If “1” is not set in the cancel monitoring flag, search counter setting processing is executed in step S909. Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 22, the distance image storage area 95 a of the sound light side RAM 95 has a large number of unit storage areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the pixels of the pixel array unit 73 c on the imaging substrate 71. U1 is provided, and distance data derived from reflected light received by the corresponding pixel is written in each unit storage area U1. Incidentally, the unit storage area U1 corresponding to the pixel for which the distance data has not been transmitted from the signal processing circuit 75 is set as a blank area, and the blank area is not referred to when the sound light side MPU 93 grasps the image. The search counter is provided in the sound-side RAM 95, and is used to specify the target area in the unit storage area U1 of the distance image storage area 95a for which it is necessary to determine whether or not distance data adjustment is required. Referenced by the sound light side MPU 93. In the search counter setting process, a value corresponding to the number of unit storage areas U1 is set in the search counter.

  In the subsequent step S910, it is determined whether or not the distance data stored in the unit storage area U1 corresponding to the current search counter value is data corresponding to the recognition corresponding distance or more. The recognition correspondence distance is set as a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the surface 22a of the window panel 22 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S910, the unit storage area U1 corresponding to the current search counter value is set as a blank area in step S911. That is, the value of the unit storage area U1 is cleared to “0” so that the area does not hold the distance data. The unit storage area U1 set as a blank area is treated as an area where no distance data exists when the sound light side MPU 93 recognizes an image for one frame.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, or if the processing of step S911 is executed, the search counter value of the sound light side RAM 95 is decremented by 1 in step S912. Thereafter, in step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the search counter after the 1 subtraction is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the processing of step S910 has been executed for all the unit storage areas U1. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S913, it means that there is a unit storage area U1 for which the process of step S910 is to be executed, and therefore the distance data stored in the next unit storage area U1. The process of step S910 is executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S913, it means that the process in step S910 has been completed for all the unit storage areas U1, and therefore the process proceeds to step S914.

  In step S914, it is determined whether or not the number of unit storage areas U1 for which blank areas have been set in step S911 is greater than or equal to the reference number. The reference number is arbitrary as long as the image for one frame can be properly recognized, but is preferably set as a plurality of numbers, specifically, “50”. Yes.

  If a negative determination is made in step S914, the reception waiting flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” and the imaging completion flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is set to “1” in step S915. Later, the imaging control process ends. The imaging completion flag specifies in the sound light side MPU 93 that acquisition of an image for one frame is completed in response to the occurrence of the imaging command, and that the image can be used in the process in which the imaging command is generated. It is a flag for.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S914, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the value of the retry number counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number. The retry number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the imaging is performed again by the sound light side MPU 93 when the number of blank areas is equal to or larger than the reference number. Further, the upper limit number is set as a plurality of times, and specifically, is set to “3”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, the imaging control process ends after executing the process of step S915 already described. If a negative determination is made in step S916, the reception waiting flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S917, and the type of the trigger for starting the current imaging control process in the sound light side RAM 95 is obtained. “1” is set to the imaging command flag. Thereafter, in step S918, the value of the retry counter in the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by 1, and then the imaging control process is terminated.

  As described above, by setting a blank area for the distance data corresponding to the distance closer to the imaging device 73 than the surface 22a of the window panel 22, as shown in FIG. When the game ball B exists by chance, the distance data derived based on the reflected light from the game ball B can be prevented from being used in the monitoring process and the effect process. Therefore, only the distance data derived based on the reflected light from the measurement object MO existing at a distance farther than the surface 22a of the window panel 22 with respect to the imaging device 73 can be used in the subsequent processing. .

  When the number of unit storage areas U1 for which blank areas have been set is equal to or greater than the reference number, irradiation with projection light from the light emitting device 72 is executed again, and imaging for one frame is executed again. Is done. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 23, even when a game ball B flowing down the game area PA is imaged, one frame worth of the game ball B does not exist through the imaging being performed again. An opportunity to acquire an image can be generated. Therefore, the opportunity to obtain an image of one frame obtained by imaging only the measurement object MO existing in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is increased.

  In addition, the event of capturing an image for one frame again is performed within the upper limit number of times. As a result, it is possible to limit the longest time required to complete acquisition of an image for one frame with respect to one imaging command. Note that the maximum time required from when the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the imaging substrate 71 in step S903 until it is determined that imaging is completed in step S907 is about 10 msec, and the upper limit number of times that imaging is performed again Is set to 3 times, the maximum time required to complete the acquisition of an image for one frame for one imaging command is about 35 msec when the processing time of steps S908 to S918 is taken into account. .

<Cancel monitoring process>
Next, the cancel monitoring process executed in step S507 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the cancellation monitoring process, whether or not a situation in which an image for one frame cannot be normally captured on the imaging substrate 71 occurs, whether or not the fraud jig D is inserted in the game area PA, And the process for monitoring using the imaging result of the board | substrate 71 for imaging whether the ball clogging has generate | occur | produced in the game area PA is performed. The monitored event will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 24A, when a monitoring process other than the cancellation monitoring process is executed using the imaging result of the imaging board 71 or when the imaging result of the imaging board 71 is used as an effect. The measurement object MO is present in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22. In this case, since the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is exposed to the player side, the surface 22a may be touched by the player. Then, a dirt portion A such as a fingerprint may be generated on the surface 22a. When such a dirt portion A occurs, the projection light irradiated from the light emitting device 72 is reflected by the dirt portion A, and there is a possibility that the measurement object MO cannot be normally imaged. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), it is assumed that the fraudulent jig D is inserted into the game area PA and an act for obtaining an illegal profit is performed. In addition to these events, in the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that ball clogging may occur in the game area PA, and in this case, a large number of game balls stop in the game area PA. On the other hand, in the monitoring process for cancellation, the occurrence of an event to be monitored for cancellation such as the occurrence of a dirt portion A, the insertion of a fraudulent jig D into the game area PA, or a clogged ball in the game area PA, etc. If specified, processing corresponding to the specified processing is executed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the monitoring process for cancellation.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by checking the state of various flags in the sound side RAM 95. The priority event refers to a situation in which an imaging command is generated on the imaging board 71 to use an image for one frame in production and an imaging board 71 to use an image for one frame in return authentication described later. This is a situation in which an imaging command is generated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the cancel monitoring flag is cleared to “0” in step S1002, and then the cancel monitoring process ends. The cancel monitoring flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the image pickup substrate 71 is capturing an image of one frame in order to perform cancel monitoring. As described above, when the priority event occurs, the cancel monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, so that the use of the image for one frame is more on the priority event side than the cancel monitoring. It is possible to prioritize usage.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not “1” is set in the cancellation monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. If “1” is not set in the cancel monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1004 whether or not “1” is set in another monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag is one of the height position monitoring process (step S508), the face authentication process (step S509), the first situation monitoring process (step S510), and the second situation monitoring process (step S511). This is a flag that is set to “1” when an image capturing command for one frame is issued to the imaging substrate 71. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, the cancel monitoring process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether the standby time for monitoring for cancellation has elapsed. The waiting time for the monitoring for cancellation is set to 200 msec, and when the execution of the monitoring for cancellation is completed for the image for one frame acquired in response to the imaging command in the monitoring process for cancellation The waiting time measurement starts. Note that the measurement of the waiting time is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the cancel monitoring standby time has not elapsed, the cancel monitoring process is terminated, and if the cancel monitoring standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1006. In step S1006, “1” is set to the imaging command flag corresponding to the monitoring for cancellation in the sound light side RAM 95, and “1” is set to the monitoring flag for cancellation in the sound light side RAM 95. Thereafter, the cancel monitoring process is terminated. As already described by setting “1” to the imaging command flag, the irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. .

  When “1” is set in the cancel monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, and the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the imaging of one frame for monitoring for cancellation has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1007, the cancel monitoring process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, the monitoring flag for cancellation and the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S1009, it is determined whether or not the unit storage area U1 in which distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored in the distance image storage area 95a is present in a predetermined range.

  As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the monitoring distance is set as the distance from the position in front of the pachinko machine 10 to the imaging device 73 by about 1 cm from the surface 22a of the window panel 22. Distance data derived based on the reflected light reflected by the dirty portion A on the window panel 22, distance data derived based on the reflected light reflected by the fraud jig D inserted in the game area PA, and game The distance data derived based on the game ball causing the ball clogging in the area PA corresponds to data less than the monitoring distance.

  When the dirty portion A occurs, when the fraudulent jig D is present, or when a ball is clogged, a predetermined range adjacent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction in the pixel array unit 73c of the imaging device 73 In this pixel, the reflected light reflected by the dirt portion A, the fraudulent jig D or the game ball is received. Then, as shown by the area filled with black in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 26 (a), distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored in the plurality of unit storage areas U1 existing in a predetermined range in the distance image storage area 95a. The Rukoto. In this case, it is assumed that there is a high possibility that the dirty portion A, the fraudulent jig D, or the ball clogged ball exists.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1009, the actual data stored in the distance image storage area 95a is overwritten in the history data storage area 95b provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1016, and then the main cancellation is performed. Monitoring process is terminated. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 26B, the history data storage area 95b has the same number of unit storage areas U2 as the distance image storage area 95a, and the data stored in the distance image storage area 95a. Can be stored as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1009, the unit storage of the distance image storage area 95a corresponding to the unit storage area U2 of the history data storage area 95b in which the distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored in step S1010. It is determined whether or not the same distance data as the distance data exists in the area U1. That is, it is determined whether or not a data range that is distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance in the history data exists in the image data for one frame acquired this time. As a result, even if the history data and the image data for one frame do not completely match, an affirmative determination is made in step S1010, and the data range that is distance data greater than the monitoring distance is recorded in the history. Even when the one-frame image data acquired this time is wider than the data, an affirmative determination is made in step S1010.

  In place of the configuration for determining whether the same or substantially the same distance data exists, the history corresponding to the unit storage area U1 of the distance image storage area 95a in which the distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored. The unit storage area U2 of the data storage area 95b may be configured to determine whether distance data corresponding to the monitoring distance or less is stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1010, the history data update process is executed in step S1016, and then the cancel monitoring process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1010, 1 is added to the value of the coincidence counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1011. The coincidence counter has the same or substantially the same distance data as the distance data in the unit storage area U2 of the history data storage area 95b corresponding to the unit storage area U1 of the distance image storage area 95a in which the distance data less than the monitoring distance is stored. This is a counter for specifying the number of times of confirmation that the data exists in the sound light side MPU 93. The coincidence counter is cleared to “0” when a negative determination is made in step S1010 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1012.

  Thereafter, in step S1012, it is determined whether or not the value of the coincidence counter is greater than or equal to the abnormality reference value. The abnormality reference value is set as a value of 2 or more, specifically, “20”. Here, since the waiting time for monitoring for cancellation is set to 200 msec as already described, in step S1012, the situation where distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is acquired by the same pixel continues for 4 sec or more. It is determined whether or not it is. Such an abnormal reference period is a standard that is assumed as an effect operation when an effect operation in which a player puts out a hand in a predetermined manner toward the window panel 22 when performing an effect using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is performed. A period longer than a typical period, and a period longer than the longest period assumed as a period in which a game ball stays at a predetermined location when the game ball flows down the game area PA without occurrence of clogging. Is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1012, this cancel monitoring process is terminated after the history data update process is executed in step S1016. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, "1" is set to a restriction flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1013.

  The restriction flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 whether to use the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71 as an effect. When the restriction flag is set to “1”, the sound light side MPU 93 does not execute an effect using the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71. As a result, in a situation where the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 cannot be normally used as an effect due to the occurrence of the dirty portion A, it is possible to prevent the effect using the imaging result from being executed.

  In a succeeding step S1014, an abnormality notification data reading process is executed. In the reading process, the light emission data and the sound output data for executing the abnormality notification corresponding to the result of the monitoring process for cancellation by the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. As a result, abnormality notification corresponding to the result of the monitoring process for cancellation is performed by the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24. In step S1015, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control device 96. Upon receiving the abnormality notification command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the abnormality notification corresponding to the result of the cancellation monitoring process is executed. By executing various abnormality notifications as described above, it is possible to clearly recognize not only the game hall manager but also the player that the event to be monitored in the cancellation monitoring process has occurred. Become. After executing the processing of step S1015, the history monitoring update processing is terminated after the history data update processing is executed in step S1016.

  It should be noted that the state where the restriction flag is set to “1” and the state where the abnormality notification is being executed is canceled by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and then turning on the power. The restriction flag is “0” and the abnormality notification is not resumed.

  With reference to the time chart of FIG. 27, a state in which abnormality notification is executed based on the monitoring process for cancellation will be described. In addition, although the case where the stain | pollution | contamination part A arises on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is mentioned as an example and demonstrated, it is the same when the fraudulent jig | tool D exists or the ball clogging has generate | occur | produced.

  FIG. 27A shows a period during which the player performs an effect operation, FIG. 27B shows a period during which the dirt portion A is generated, and FIG. FIG. 27 (d) shows a performance execution period, FIG. 27 (e) shows a period in which it is specified that a cancel monitoring target is generated, and FIG. 27 (f) indicates an execution period of abnormality notification. The player's performance operation means that the player puts out a hand in a predetermined manner toward the window panel 22 side.

  First, the case where the dirty portion A is not generated will be described.

  When the player's performance operation is performed, the player's performance operation is performed as shown in FIG. 27A at the timing t1 during the period in which the performance corresponding to the performance operation is performed. At the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), the effect corresponding to the effect operation is started at the timing t2.

  Next, a problem that occurs when the cancellation monitoring process is not executed will be described.

  When the player's performance operation is performed, at a timing t3 during a period in which the performance corresponding to the performance operation is performed, a dirt portion A is present on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 as shown in FIG. Arise. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the above-mentioned dirt is obtained at the timing t4 which is the timing before the timing t5 which is the timing at which the player's performance operation is started. It is specified that the production operation has occurred due to the reflected light at the portion A, and the production starts as shown in FIG. In this case, although the player is not performing the production operation, the production corresponding to the production operation is started, and the player feels uncomfortable.

  Next, a case where the monitoring process for cancellation is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, a dirt portion A is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 at the timing t6. After that, when the standby time for monitoring for cancellation elapses at the timing of t7, it is specified that the monitoring target for cancellation is generated as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t8, when the period for which the monitoring target for cancellation is generated is continuously longer than the abnormality reference period T1, abnormality notification is started as shown in FIG. 27 (f). The Thereafter, at time t9, the dirt portion A is removed from the surface 22a of the window panel 22, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again, thereby completing the abnormality notification.

  As described above, when a cancel monitoring target is generated, an abnormality notification is executed, and it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to deal with the occurrence of the cancel monitoring target event. . For example, if the dirt portion A is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22, there is a possibility that the presence / absence of the player's performance operation may not be accurately specified. It is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to remove the dirty portion A. Further, for example, when the fraudulent jig D is inserted into the game area PA, the abnormality notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the fraud from continuing further. In addition, for example, when a ball clog is occurring in the game area PA, an abnormality notification is executed, so that the manager of the game hall can be prompted to eliminate the ball clog.

  The monitoring distance is set as the distance from the position in front of the pachinko machine 10 about 1 cm from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 to the imaging device 73, and the monitoring target for cancellation when the distance data is equal to or less than the monitoring distance. With the configuration in which the occurrence of the occurrence of the error is identified, it is possible to monitor a plurality of types of monitoring targets for cancellation collectively by a certain process.

  In addition, when the unit storage area U1 in which distance data equal to or less than the monitoring distance is stored is present in a predetermined range, it is configured to identify that the monitoring target for cancellation is generated, for example, It is possible to prevent the abnormality notification from being executed until a minute dirt portion is generated on the surface 22a of the window panel 22.

<Height position monitoring process>
Next, the height position monitoring process executed in step S508 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the height position monitoring process, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), a player who is sitting in a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall and playing a game. The face height position may differ depending on the sitting height of the player. Moreover, since the height position of a chair may differ with game halls, the height position of a face also fluctuates also by this. On the other hand, when an effect is performed using the imaging result of the imaging board 71, the player puts his hand in a predetermined manner toward the window panel 22 at a position in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22. The direction operation is performed. In this case, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 29, when an effect operation for selecting an image displayed on the symbol display device 61 is performed, even if the same image is selected, the player F1 In the case of the player, the directing operation is performed toward the point P1 on the window panel 22, whereas in the case of the player F2 whose face height is lower than the player F1, the player is directed toward the point P2 on the window panel 22. Perform production operations. If it does so, even if it is the situation which is performing the same production operation, the height position which the imaging device 73 recognizes the hand which is performing production operation will differ. On the other hand, by grasping the height position of the player's face in advance by the height position monitoring process, it is possible to determine the height position of the player's hand when the production operation is performed. The image data for the frame can be corrected according to the height position of the face.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the height position monitoring process.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by checking the state of various flags in the sound side RAM 95. The contents of the priority event are the same as those in step S1001 in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the height position monitoring flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1103, and then the height position monitoring process ends. The height position monitoring flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that one frame worth of image is being captured on the imaging substrate 71 in order to perform height position monitoring. In the situation where the priority event has occurred as described above, the height position monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, so that the use of the image for one frame is more than the height position monitoring. Can also prioritize usage on the priority event side.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is being operated. Specifically, as already described, the power source / launch control device 108 receives a signal indicating that the operation handle 37b is touched by the player from the touch sensor 37c, and the firing stop operation is not performed. On the condition that a signal indicating this is received from the stop switch 37e, a HI level condition establishment signal is continuously transmitted to the main MPU 83. When reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, the main side MPU 83 transmits a launch operation start command to the sound light side MPU 93. When reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is ended, the sound side MPU 93 Send a firing operation end command to. In step S1102, it is determined that the firing operation is being performed in a situation where the firing operation start command has been received and the firing operation end command has not been received.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, that is, if the launching operation is not being performed, the height position monitoring flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1103, and then the height position monitoring process is performed. finish. Accordingly, it is possible to perform height position monitoring only in a situation where the launch operation is performed, and the height is determined in a situation where the player is not seated on the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to prevent position monitoring from being executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, whether or not “1” is set in the height position monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95 is determined in step S1104. If “1” is not set in the height position monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1105 whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95.

  When “1” is set in the restriction flag, the height position monitoring process is terminated as it is. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1105 and terminating the height position monitoring process as it is, it is possible to prevent height position monitoring from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. It becomes.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not “1” is set in another monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag is imaged in any of the cancellation monitoring process (step S507), the face authentication process (step S509), the first situation monitoring process (step S510), and the second situation monitoring process (step S511). This is a flag that is set to “1” when an imaging command for one frame is issued to the circuit board 71. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the height position monitoring process is terminated as is, and if a negative determination is made in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, it is determined whether a standby time for height position monitoring has elapsed. The standby time for height position monitoring is set as a standby time different from the standby time for monitoring for cancellation, and is specifically set to 500 msec. The measurement of the waiting time is started when the execution of the height position monitoring is completed with respect to the image for one frame acquired in response to the imaging command in the height position monitoring process. Note that the measurement of the waiting time is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the height position monitoring standby time has not elapsed, the height position monitoring processing is terminated as it is, and if the height position monitoring standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S 1108, “1” is set to the imaging command flag corresponding to the height position monitoring in the sound light side RAM 95 and “1” is set to the height position monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95. Thereafter, the height position monitoring process ends. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  When “1” is set in the height position monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, and the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S 1109, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the imaging of one frame for monitoring the height position has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1109, the height position monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, the height position monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S1111, a target extraction process for the height position is executed. In the target extraction process, the image data for one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face portion is included in the grasped image data. It is determined whether corresponding image data exists. In the determination, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or an elliptical shape is extracted, and a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth, or ear exists in the extracted range. In this case, the extracted range is recognized as a face. Then, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the center position in the height direction of the range recognized as the face is extracted as the current height position.

  Thereafter, in step S1112, it is determined whether target extraction has been completed. If the extraction of the height position has been completed in the target extraction process of step S1111, an affirmative determination is made in step S1112. In this case, the height position group specifying process is executed in step S1113. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a three-stage group as the height position group. As shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), a height higher than the first height reference is set. The first height group corresponding to the height position, the second height group corresponding to the height position less than the first height reference and greater than or equal to the second height reference, and the height less than the second height reference There exists a third height group corresponding to the position. In step S1113, the height position extracted in step S1111 is compared with the first height reference and the second height reference to identify which of the first to third height groups is applicable.

  Thereafter, in step S1114, a value corresponding to the height group specified in step S1113 is set in the height position group counter 95c provided in the sound light side RAM 95, and then the height position monitoring process is terminated. Specifically, “1” is set for the first height group, “2” is set for the second height group, and “3” is set for the third height group. set. By referring to the height position group counter 95c, the sound light side MPU 93 can recognize the current height position, and corresponds to the height position when using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 as an effect. Adjustments can be made.

  On the other hand, when the range corresponding to the contour portion of the face cannot be specified by the target extraction process in step S1111, a negative determination is made in step S1112 and the process proceeds to step S1115. In step S1115, “2” is set in the height position group counter 95c of the sound light side RAM 95 as a setting process at the time of non-extraction. That is, the second height group corresponding to the most standard height position is set as the current height group.

<Face recognition processing>
Next, the face authentication process executed in step S509 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the face authentication process, when the return button 28 of the ball lending operation device 26 is operated and the storage medium is returned from the ball lending device Y, the face of the player who performed the operation is imaged, and Abnormality notification is performed when the comparison result between the image and the image of the player's face captured in advance does not match. As a result, when an act of illegally acquiring the storage medium is performed, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize it and cope with it.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the face authentication process.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the post-return operation flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. Here, when the return button 28 of the ball lending operation device 26 is operated in a situation where information corresponding to the number of game balls usable in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium is stored, the payout control device 111 A return instruction signal indicating that the storage medium storing the information should be discharged is transmitted to the ball lending apparatus Y. In addition, when the payout control device 111 transmits the return instruction signal to the ball lending device Y, the payout control device 111 transmits a return instruction generation command to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives a return instruction generation command, the main MPU 83 transmits a corresponding return operation generation command to the sound light MPU 93. When receiving the return operation generation command, the sound light side MPU 93 sets “1” to the post-return operation flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if a return operation has not been performed, whether or not a priority event has occurred is confirmed in step S1202 by checking the state of various flags in the sound side RAM 95. Determine whether. The contents of the priority event are the same as those in step S1001 in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the face authentication monitoring flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1203, and then the face authentication processing is terminated. The face authentication monitoring flag is used to capture an image of one frame on the imaging substrate 71 in order to acquire an image of the player's face when information for enabling the rental of game balls is newly added. It is a flag for specifying that the sound light side MPU 93 is in a situation where the sound is being performed. In the situation where a priority event has occurred as described above, the face authentication monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, so that the face image is acquired in advance for use of the image for one frame. It is possible to prioritize usage on the priority event side.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not “1” is set in the face authentication monitoring flag of the sound light side RAM 95. If “1” is not set in the face authentication monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound side RAM 95.

  When “1” is set in the restriction flag, the face authentication process is terminated as it is. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making a positive determination in step S1205 and ending face authentication as it is, it is possible to prevent an image of the player's face from being acquired in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. Become.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not “1” is set in another monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag is one of the canceling monitoring process (step S507), the height position monitoring process (step S508), the first situation monitoring process (step S510), and the second situation monitoring process (step S511). This is a flag that is set to “1” when an image capturing command for one frame is issued to the imaging substrate 71. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the height position monitoring process is terminated as is, and if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the face authentication request flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. Here, as a result of the insertion of banknotes into the ball lending device Y and the insertion of the storage medium, the payout control device 111 newly has information corresponding to the number of game balls usable in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium. When set or increased, a lending information addition command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the lending information addition command, the main MPU 83 transmits a lending information addition command corresponding to the sound light MPU 93. When receiving the lending information addition command, the sound light side MPU 93 sets “1” to the face authentication request flag. If a negative determination is made in step S1207, the face authentication process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, the process proceeds to step S1208.

  In step S1208, it is determined whether the face authentication monitoring standby time has elapsed. The waiting time for face authentication monitoring is set as a waiting time different from the waiting time for monitoring for cancellation and the waiting time for height position monitoring, and is specifically set to 300 msec. The measurement of the waiting time is started when execution of face authentication monitoring is completed for an image of one frame acquired in response to an imaging command being issued in the face authentication process. Note that the measurement of the waiting time is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has not elapsed, the face authentication processing is terminated as it is, and if the waiting time for face authentication monitoring has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S 1209, “1” is set to the imaging command flag corresponding to the face authentication monitoring in the sound side RAM 95 and “1” is set to the face authentication monitoring flag in the sound side RAM 95. Thereafter, the face authentication process is terminated. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  When “1” is set in the face authentication monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, and the flow advances to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the imaging of one frame for pre-acquisition of the face image has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the face authentication processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1211.

  In step S1211, the face authentication monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. In the subsequent step S1212, face data extraction processing is executed. In the face data extraction process, one frame of image data is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face is included in the grasped image data. It is determined whether or not image data corresponding to the portion exists. In the determination, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or an elliptical shape is extracted, and a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth, or ear exists in the extracted range. In this case, the extracted range is recognized as a face.

  Thereafter, in step S1213, it is determined whether or not face data extraction has been completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the face authentication process is terminated. If the face data extraction is completed, the extracted face data is stored in the pre-data storage area 95d provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1214. Thereafter, after the face authentication request flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1215, the face authentication process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1201 that the return operation is being performed, the authentication process for the return operation is executed in step S1216, and then the face authentication process is terminated. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an authentication process during the return operation.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the return-time authentication monitoring flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. When the return operation is performed, the return-time monitoring flag indicates that one frame of image is being picked up by the image pickup board 71 in order to acquire an image of the player's face. This is a flag for specifying by the optical side MPU 93. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95.

  If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the post-return operation flag is cleared to “0” in step S1303, and then this authentication process is terminated. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by clearing the post-return operation flag “0” without performing face authentication, it is possible to prevent the player's face from being authenticated in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. .

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, “1” is set in the imaging command flag corresponding to the authentication at the time of return in the sound side RAM 95 and the sound side RAM 95 is returned in step S1304. After “1” is set in the authentication monitoring flag, this authentication process is terminated. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  Here, in the authentication process, “1” is set to the other monitoring flags before the corresponding imaging command flag and the corresponding monitoring flag are set to “1” as in the face authentication process (FIG. 31). It is not determined whether it is set or whether the standby time has elapsed. Thereby, when a return operation is performed, it is possible to start acquisition of an image for face authentication at an early stage.

  When “1” is set in the return-time authentication monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1301 and the process proceeds to step S1305. In step S1305, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not imaging of an image for one frame for performing face authentication has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1305, the present authentication process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to “0”. In the subsequent step S1307, face data extraction processing is executed. The content of the extraction process is the same as the extraction process in step S1212 in the face authentication process (FIG. 31).

  Thereafter, in step S1308, it is determined whether or not face data extraction has been completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the present authentication process is terminated. If face data extraction has been completed, the extracted face data is stored in the collation data storage area 95e provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1309.

  In subsequent step S1310, all of the corresponding imaging command flag, post-return operation flag and return-time authentication monitoring flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. Here, when “1” is set to the imaging command flag in the authentication process at the time of the return operation, the imaging command flag is not cleared to “0” simply by completing imaging on the imaging substrate 71. When face data is stored in the collation data storage area 95e, “0” is cleared. As a result, until the face data for verification is acquired, imaging is repeated on the imaging substrate 71, and the face data for verification can be reliably acquired. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when face data cannot be extracted before the face authentication monitoring period elapses after the corresponding imaging command flag is set to “1” in step S1304, Similarly to step S1310, various flags may be cleared to “0” and alarm processing may be executed in step S1313 described later.

  Thereafter, in step S1311, the face data stored in the preliminary data storage area 95d of the sound light side RAM 95 is compared with the face data stored in the comparison data storage area 95e of the sound light side RAM 95. In this case, a jaw line is extracted from each face data, and the relative position of the eyes, nose, mouth or ear with respect to the jaw line and the outer edge shape of the eyes, nose, mouth or ear are 90% or more in both face data. If it is correct, it is determined that these two face data match. If face data can be authenticated, a specific method for authenticating the face data is arbitrary.

  In a succeeding step S1312, it is determined whether or not the result of the collation process in the step S1311 is a coincidence result. If face data is not stored in the pre-data storage area 95d, it is handled that the face data does not match. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, this authentication processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1312, this authentication processing is terminated after the alarm light emission data is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1313.

  By reading the alarm light emission data, the alarm light emission data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S503) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and the face authentication is not normally performed. The display light emitting unit 23 emits light. As a result, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to confirm whether or not the storage medium has been returned to the legitimate player. For example, in a game hall where surveillance cameras are installed in units of island facilities where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, it is determined whether or not an illegal act of acquiring a storage medium has been performed by referring to the shooting results of the surveillance cameras. It becomes possible to specify.

  If the face data do not match, an alarm using the display light emitting unit 23 is performed, and the process for stopping the progress of the game is not executed. Further, the alarm is not performed in the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. As a result, even if the face data is not correctly collated, it is possible to prevent a legitimate player from being disadvantaged or discomforted.

  Next, how face authentication is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  FIG. 33 (a) shows the addition timing of rentable information, FIG. 33 (b) shows the execution period of the face data storage process in the pre-data storage area 95d, and FIG. 33 (c) shows the pre-data storage area 95d. Fig. 33 (d) shows the execution timing of the return operation, and Fig. 33 (e) shows that the return of the storage medium is completed after the process for returning the storage medium is started. FIG. 33 (f) shows the execution period of the face data storage process in the verification data storage area 95e and the authentication process using the face data, and FIG. 33 (g) shows the alarm executed. The period that is being used.

  When a bill or a storage medium is inserted into the ball lending device Y at the timing t1, information corresponding to the number of usable game balls is newly added as shown in FIG. Then, in order to obtain face data in advance, face data pre-storage processing is executed as shown in FIG. 33 (b), and at the timing of t2, the pre-data storage area is shown in FIG. 33 (c). The face data is stored in 95d. Each time information corresponding to the number of usable game balls is newly added, the face data is newly stored in the pre-data storage area 95d.

  Thereafter, the return operation is performed at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. Then, the return of the storage medium is started as shown in FIG. 33 (e), and the face authentication process is started as shown in FIG. 33 (f). Thereafter, the face data is completely stored in the collation data storage area 95e at the timing t4, which is a timing before the timing t5, which is the timing when the return operation is completed, and stored in the pre-data storage area 95d. The collation between the face data stored in the face data and the face data stored in the collation data storage area 95e is completed. In this case, since both face data match, no alarm is generated as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the face authentication processing for the return operation performed at the timing of t6, both face data did not match. In this case, an alarm is generated as shown in FIG. 33 (g) at the timing of t7, which is a timing before the timing of t8 when the return of the storage medium is completed, and the game hall manager is alerted. It becomes possible.

<First status monitoring process>
Next, the first situation monitoring process executed in step S510 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the first situation monitoring process, when it is determined based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 that there is a possibility that a person is seated in a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 without playing a game. A first confirmation notification is performed. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the event has occurred and to deal with it.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first situation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by checking the state of various flags in the sound side RAM 95. The priority event is a situation in which an imaging command is generated on the imaging substrate 71 in order to use an image for one frame in return authentication.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the first situation monitoring process is executed after clearing the first situation monitoring flag and the seated presence counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 to “0” in step S1403. finish. The first situation monitoring flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the imaging board 71 is capturing an image of one frame in order to perform the first situation monitoring. . When the priority event as described above occurs, the first situation monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, so that the use of an image for one frame has priority over the first situation monitoring. It is possible to prioritize usage on the event side. The seated counter indicates the number of times that a person is seated in a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where no game is being executed based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71. This is a counter for grasping by the side MPU 93.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not a game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a firing operation is being performed as in step S1102 in the height position monitoring process (FIG. 30). If the firing operation is being performed, it is determined that the game is being executed, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1402.

  Further, when the launch operation is not performed, it is determined whether or not the game-playing effect is being executed and the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. This determination is made by referring to the contents of the effect data table read to the sound light side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the data table corresponding to the game turn effect or the data table corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode has been read to the sound light side RAM 95. If it is during execution of the effect for game times or in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1402 that the game is being executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the first situation monitoring process is terminated after the first situation monitoring flag in the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to "0" in step S1403. This makes it possible to prevent the first situation monitoring from being executed while the game is being executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not “1” is set in the first situation monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. If “1” is not set in the first situation monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1405 whether “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound side RAM 95.

  If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the first situation monitoring process is terminated as it is. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1405 and ending the first situation monitoring process as it is, it is possible to prevent the first situation monitoring from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. It becomes.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not “1” is set in another monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag is imaged in any of the cancellation monitoring process (step S507), the height position monitoring process (step S508), the face authentication process (step S509), and the second situation monitoring process (step S511). This is a flag that is set to “1” when an imaging command for one frame is issued to the circuit board 71. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the first situation monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S1406, the process proceeds to step S1407.

  In step S1407, the first situation monitoring standby time has elapsed in a state where the game is not being executed, that is, the game ball is not being fired and the game turning effect and the opening / closing execution mode are not being executed. Determine whether or not. The waiting time for the first situation monitoring is set as a waiting time different from the waiting time for the monitoring for cancellation, the waiting time for the height position monitoring, and the waiting time for the face authentication monitoring, and is specifically set to 5 sec. ing. The standby when the execution of the first situation monitoring is completed for the image of one frame acquired based on the imaging instruction in the first situation monitoring process or when the game is not executed Time measurement starts. Note that the measurement of the waiting time is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the first situation monitoring standby time has not elapsed, the first situation monitoring processing is terminated as it is, and if the first situation monitoring standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S 1408, “1” is set to the imaging command flag corresponding to the first situation monitoring in the sound side RAM 95, and “1” is set to the first situation monitoring flag in the sound side RAM 95. Thereafter, the first situation monitoring process is terminated. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  When “1” is set in the first situation monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, and the flow proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not imaging of an image for one frame for performing the first situation monitoring is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the first situation monitoring process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, the first status monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S1411, it is determined whether or not a seat on a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in a state where no game is being executed. Specifically, the image data for one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the user sits on the chair in front of the grasped image data. It is determined whether image data corresponding to the person who is present exists. In this determination, a process similar to the face data extraction process (step S1212) in the face authentication process (FIG. 31) is executed to determine whether or not the user is seated based on whether or not face data can be extracted. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine whether or not there is a seat depending on whether or not shoulder data can be extracted. If a negative determination is made in step S1411, the first situation monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1411, the process proceeds to step S1412.

  In step S1412, the value of the seated presence counter in the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by one. In a succeeding step S1413, it is determined whether or not the value of the seated presence counter is equal to or greater than the notification reference value. A specific value of the notification reference value is arbitrary, but is set to “10” in the pachinko machine 10. And as already explained, since the waiting time for the first situation monitoring is set to 5 seconds, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the sitting period has continued for 50 seconds or more without playing a game. Will be.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1413, the first situation monitoring process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1413, the first confirmation monitoring light emission data is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1414, and then the first situation monitoring process is terminated. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S1413, the seated presence counter is cleared to “0”.

  By reading the first confirmation notification light emission data, the first confirmation notification light emission data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S503) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and the display light emitting unit 23 plays a game. The light emission is performed in a manner indicating that there is a possibility that there is a person who is seated despite the absence.

  Next, how the first situation monitoring is performed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 35A shows a period in which a person is seated on a chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 35B shows a period in which a game is performed on the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. (C) shows the start timing of the first confirmation notification, and FIG. 35 (d) shows the execution period of the first confirmation notification.

  The game ends as shown in FIG. 35B at the timing of t1, and the player leaves the seat as shown in FIG. 35A at the timing of t2. Thereafter, a new person is seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. However, the person remains seated without playing a game on the pachinko machine 10. Then, at the timing of t4, the first confirmation notification starts as shown in FIG. 35 (d) when the execution start period of the first confirmation notification elapses without playing the game as shown in FIG. 35 (c). Is done. The first confirmation notification is canceled by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10, and the first confirmation notification is canceled simply by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, without requiring the main RAM 85 to be cleared. The game can be resumed in the state where it has been played.

  As described above, when the state of sitting in front of the pachinko machine 10 is continued without playing the game, the first confirmation notification is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the person should be removed. If there is a person seated without playing a game, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be reduced accordingly, which is an undesirable event for the gaming hall, and such an event has occurred. In some cases, it is preferable to encourage the person to leave the room.

  In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1413, notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. Thereby, when a regular player is only taking a break between games, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Second situation monitoring process>
Next, the second situation monitoring process executed in step S511 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the second situation monitoring process, the second confirmation notification is performed when an operation that may be performed in an unauthorized manner with respect to the pachinko machine 10 is grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize that the event has occurred and to deal with it.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second situation monitoring process.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a priority event has occurred by checking the state of various flags in the sound side RAM 95. The contents of the priority event are the same as those in step S1001 in the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the second situation monitoring flag and the operation abnormality counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S1502, and then the second situation monitoring process is performed. finish. The second situation monitoring flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that one frame of image is being taken on the imaging board 71 in order to perform the second situation monitoring. . When the priority event as described above occurs, the second situation monitoring flag is forcibly cleared to “0”, so that the use of an image for one frame has priority over the second situation monitoring. It is possible to prioritize usage on the event side. Further, the abnormal operation counter is a counter for the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp the number of times that an operation that may be performed illegally with respect to the pachinko machine 10 is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. is there.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not “1” is set in the second situation monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. If “1” is not set in the second situation monitoring flag, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound side RAM 95.

  If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the second situation monitoring process is terminated as it is. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1504 and terminating the second situation monitoring process as it is, it is possible to prevent the second situation monitoring from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. It becomes.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not “1” is set in another monitoring flag of the sound side RAM 95. The other monitoring flag is captured in any of the cancellation monitoring process (step S507), the height position monitoring process (step S508), the face authentication process (step S509), and the first situation monitoring process (step S510). This is a flag that is set to “1” when an imaging command for one frame is issued to the circuit board 71. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the second situation monitoring process is terminated as is, and if a negative determination is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether the second situation monitoring standby time has elapsed. The waiting time for the second situation monitoring is set as a waiting time different from the waiting time for the monitoring for cancellation, the waiting time for the height position monitoring, the waiting time for the face authentication monitoring, and the waiting time for the first situation monitoring. Specifically, it is set to 3 sec. The measurement of the waiting time is started when the execution of the second situation monitoring is completed for the image for one frame acquired in response to the imaging command in the second situation monitoring process. Note that the measurement of the waiting time is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  When the second situation monitoring standby time has not elapsed, the second situation monitoring processing is terminated as it is, and when the second situation monitoring standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1507. In step S 1507, “1” is set to the imaging command flag corresponding to the second situation monitoring in the sound light side RAM 95, and “1” is set to the second situation monitoring flag in the sound light side RAM 95. Thereafter, the second situation monitoring process is terminated. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  When “1” is set in the second situation monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, and the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not imaging of an image for one frame for performing the second situation monitoring is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1508, the second situation monitoring process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1508, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, the second status monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”.

  In the following step S1510, operation data extraction processing is executed. In the operation data extraction process, one frame of image data is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the pachinko machine 10 is detected from the grasped image data. Data on the arm of a person sitting on a chair provided is extracted. At the time of the extraction, the position of the shoulder is grasped based on the recognition of the outer edge shape of the neck and the shoulder in relation to the distance data, and the part of the arm extending from the shoulder part to both sides is grasped from the distance data and the outer edge shape. . Then, the position of the grasped arm is grasped in relation to the window panel 22.

  Thereafter, in step S1511, it is determined whether or not the operation data grasped in step S1510 corresponds to the abnormality handling data in the sound side ROM 94. Specifically, the hand of a person seated in front of the pachinko machine 10 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the shoulder portion and outside the left edge, right edge, and upper edge of the window panel 22. Is stored in advance in the light-side ROM 94 as abnormality handling data. When a regular player plays a game, the above operation is difficult to continue. If a negative determination is made in step S1511, the second situation monitoring process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512.

  In step S1512, 1 is added to the value of the operation abnormality counter in the sound side RAM 95. In subsequent step S1513, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation abnormality counter is equal to or greater than the operation abnormality reference value. The specific value of the operation abnormality reference value is arbitrary, but is set to “40” in the pachinko machine 10. As already described, since the waiting time for the second situation monitoring is set to 3 seconds, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not the operation corresponding to the operation abnormality handling data has continued for 120 seconds or more. It will be.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the second situation monitoring process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the second confirmation monitoring light emission data is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1514, and then the second situation monitoring process is terminated. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the operation abnormality counter is cleared to “0”.

  By reading the second confirmation notification light emission data, the display light emitting unit 23 refers to the second confirmation notification light emission data in the light emission control process (step S503) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Light emission is performed in a manner indicating that the operation corresponding to the abnormality handling data is continuously performed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not an illegal act is performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the display light emitting unit 23 is used for notification, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 or the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the regular player is only performing an action corresponding to the abnormality handling data for a reason different from the fraud. Become.

<Operation effect control processing>
Next, the operation effect control process executed in step S512 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the operation effect control process, it is specified whether or not the player has performed an effect operation using the imaging result of the imaging board 71, and when it is specified that the effect operation has been performed, an effect corresponding to that is performed. Execute the control to make it. As the operation effects, the pachinko machine 10 includes a notification effect, a division effect, a stop operation effect, a continuous effect, and a confrontation effect. Hereinafter, the contents of these effects and the control contents for enabling the execution of these effects will be described.

<Notification production>
First, the content of the notification effect and the control content for enabling execution of the notification effect will be described. FIG. 37A to FIG. 37C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the movable object unit 38 that operates during the notification effect.

  As already described, the movable object unit 38 is provided on the upper portion of the center frame 65 installed in the game area PA (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 37A, the movable object unit 38 includes a pair of upper and lower effect movable objects 38a and 38b, and an effect driving unit 38c such as a rotary motor that operates the effect movable objects 38a and 38b. It has.

  In the situation where the stage drive unit 38c is not in the drive state, both stage movable bodies 38a, 38b are arranged in the vertical direction by the biasing force of a biasing means (not shown) such as a spring, and these stage movable bodies 38a, 38b The effect movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged at initial positions where the enclosed space is not visible or difficult to visually recognize from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, when the production drive unit 38c is in the drive state, as shown in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c), both the production movable objects 38a, 38b against the urging force of the urging means. One of the movable objects 38a, 38b moves to an open position where one of them is displaced upward and the other is moved downward, and the enclosed space is opened forward.

  A decorative member 38d is arranged in a space surrounded by these effect movable objects 38a and 38b. When the production movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged at the initial positions, the decorative member 38d is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the movable objects for production 38a and 38b move toward the open position, the decorative member 38d is easily visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c). It becomes possible to do.

  At the open position of each effect movable object 38a, 38b, the limit open position shown in FIG. 37 (c) and the distance between each effect movable object 38a, 38b than the limit open position as shown in FIG. 37 (b). There is an open position with a short distance. When the stage drive unit 38c is in the first drive state, each stage movable object 38a, 38b is disposed at the halfway open position, and when the stage drive unit 38c is in the second drive state, each stage movable object 38a. , 38b are arranged at the limit opening position.

  There are two types of notification effects performed using the movable object unit 38 as described above, ie, a first notification effect and a second notification effect. The first announcement effect occurs with a predetermined probability in the game times that are the jackpot result. That is, the first notification effect is generated only in the game times that are the big hit results. When the first notification effect is generated, each effect movable object 38a, 38b of the movable object unit 38 is provided on the condition that the generation of the player's first notification effect operation is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. Is placed in the limit open position.

  On the other hand, the second notification effect is generated at a predetermined probability in a game time that results in a jackpot or a game time in which a missed reach display occurs. That is, the second notification effect is generated not only in the game times that are the jackpot result, but also in the game times that are the reach reach display. When the second notification effect is generated in the game round that is the jackpot result, the movable object is provided on the condition that the generation of the player's second notification effect operation is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. Each effect movable object 38a, 38b of the unit 38 is arranged at the limit open position. On the other hand, when the second notification effect is generated in the game times in which the reach reach is displayed, even if the second notification effect operation is performed, each effect movable object 38a, 38b is at the limit open position. Not placed.

  The first notification effect and the second notification effect can be generated at any timing as long as the effect for game times is being performed. Specifically, during the period from when the symbol variation display is started in all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 until the symbol variation display is stopped in the upper symbol column Z1, the symbol variation display is stopped in the upper symbol column Z1. During the period from when the symbol change display is stopped in the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol change display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 after the symbol change display is stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. The reach effect is performed during the period until the reach effect occurs when the reach effect using a predetermined character different from the symbol variation display in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 occurs. Notification effect occurs in any period of the period and the period from when the variable display of the symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped until the final display of the symbol is performed Is obtained structure, the generation period is determined in determining performance pattern in sound light side MPU93.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the notification effect is generated may be set in a specific period of the above period, and is generated in the effect for the opening / closing execution mode instead of the effect for the game times. It is good also as composition to do. When it occurs in the performance for the opening / closing execution mode, it is unclear whether the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode will be the high probability mode or the low probability mode at the end of the effect for the game round that results in the jackpot In such a state, when the notification effect is generated during the opening / closing execution mode and the high probability mode is set, the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are finally arranged at the limit opening position with a predetermined probability. The structure to make is possible.

  Next, notification effect setting processing for starting the notification effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The notification effect setting process is executed every time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound side RAM 95. If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the notification effect setting process is terminated. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making a positive determination in step S1601 and ending the notification effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. Even if the notification effect is not executed, the game continuation display duration determined by the main MPU 83 is not changed.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1602 whether the start condition of the notification effect is satisfied. The start condition of the notice effect is when the data table of the effect for game times is read in the sound side RAM 95, and the pointer data indicating the contents of the control target in the data table is the first notice effect or the first 2 Applicable when it corresponds to data indicating the start of an announcement effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the notification effect setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the current notification effect is the first notification effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, "1" is set to the first notification effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1604. The first notification effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the situation is after the imaging command for executing the first notification effect is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1603, “1” is set to the second notification effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1605. The second notification effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the situation is after the imaging command for executing the second notification effect is performed.

  When the process of step S1604 is performed or when the process of step S1605 is performed, after setting “1” to the imaging command flag corresponding to the notification effect in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1606, this notification effect The setting process ends. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

<First announcement production>
Next, the first notification effect control process for performing execution control of the first notification effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first notification effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the first notification effect flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95 (step S1701 and step S1702: YES), an image for one frame to be used in the first notification effect. Means that the imaging of has been completed. In this case, the process proceeds to an image use process for the first notification effect after step S1703.

  In the first notification effect image use processing, first, the imaging completion flag in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1703. In the subsequent step S1704, hand data extraction processing is executed. In the hand data extraction process, the image data for one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human hand portion is included in the grasped image data. It is determined whether there is image data corresponding to. At the time of the determination, it is determined whether or not there is a range in which a plurality of finger parts are continuous in the shape part of the palm or the back of the hand, and if the part exists, the extracted range is determined. Recognize it as a hand.

  Thereafter, in step S1705, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the hand data extraction has been completed, it is determined in step S1706 whether or not the hand data distance corresponds to a reference target distance or more. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the distance data corresponding to the closest distance in the distance data group recognized as hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more.

  Here, in the first notification effect, when the player performs the first notification effect operation based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the game round that results in the jackpot result, the movable object unit 38 is used. The effect that the movable objects for production 38a and 38b are arranged at the limit open position is performed. In the first notification effect operation, an operation of bringing the hand so as to cover the movable unit 38 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 is performed.

  Incidentally, when the first notification effect is generated, the symbol display device 61 performs the first notification effect operation, and when the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged at the limit opening position, the jackpot result is generated in the game times. It is the structure by which the effect to do is made.

  When the first notification effect operation is performed as described above, in order for the player to recognize that the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged at the limit open position by performing the first notification effect operation. Therefore, it is necessary to limit the range of the position of the hand recognized as effective as the first notification effect operation in the sound light side MPU 93 to a range corresponding to the front of the movable object unit 38. In this case, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 40 (a), even if the height positions of the player's hands H1 and H2 are the same, depending on the distance of the hands H1 and H2 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22 40 (b-1) and 40 (b-2), the hand H1 in the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95. , H2 image portions HG1 and HG2 have different height positions. If it tries to recognize presence of the hand which exists in the predetermined height position regardless of the distance from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 as the operation for the first notification effect, the image of the hand is displayed on the image G for one frame. When the portion exists, it is difficult to identify whether or not it is the first notification effect operation.

  Therefore, when the distance of the hand data extracted in step S1704 is more than the reference target distance from the imaging device 73, an affirmative determination is made in step S1706 so that the processes in steps S1707 to S1711 are not executed. . As a result, a hand that is some distance away from the window panel 22 can be excluded from the determination target whether or not it is the first notification effect operation, and it is identified whether or not it is the first notification effect operation. It is easy. In particular, when the first notification effect operation is performed, an operation of reaching for the movable object unit 38 is performed. Therefore, when the first notification effect operation is performed, a hand is present at a position more than the reference target distance. It's hard to think about being. On the other hand, as described above, the player performs the first notification effect operation by excluding the hand slightly away from the window panel 22 from the determination target whether or not the operation is the first notification effect operation. The possibility of determining that the first notification effect operation has been performed despite the absence is reduced. Note that the processing corresponding to step S1706 is executed in the same way when determining whether to execute a second notification effect operation, a split effect operation, and a stop operation, which will be described later. It is possible to generate the same as above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1706, operation effective range setting processing corresponding to the height position group is executed in step S1707. Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41 (a), when the player reaches for the movable object unit 38, in the case of the player F1, the player reaches for the point P1 of the window panel 22. On the other hand, in the case of the player F2 whose face height is lower than the player F1, the hand is extended toward the point P2 of the window panel 22. If it does so, the height position which the imaging device 73 recognizes a hand will differ.

  On the other hand, in the height position monitoring process (FIG. 30), as already described, by specifying the height position of the player's face, any one of a plurality of height position groups that exist. The height position of the player's face is sorted into the height position group. Therefore, in step S1707, by reading the value of the height position group counter 95c of the sound side RAM 95, the current position position group of the player is grasped, and the first notification effect operation is performed according to the grasped result. Adjust the range of hand positions recognized as valid.

  For example, when it is determined from the value of the height position group counter 95c that the first height group is the uppermost group, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41 (b-1). Then, the operation effective range EA is set at a position near the upper edge in the image G for one frame which is a virtual two-dimensional plane based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95. On the other hand, when it is grasped from the value of the height position group counter 95c that the height position is a second height group which is a lower group than the first height group, FIG. 2), the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95 is lower than the case of FIG. 41 (b-1). The operation effective range EA is set at the position on the side. The sound light side MPU 93 specifies that the first notification effect operation is performed when it is specified that the hand exists in the set operation effective range EA.

  Returning to the description of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), after executing the process of step S1707, the position correction process corresponding to the distance data is executed in step S1708. As already described, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 40 (a), even if the height positions of the player's hands H1 and H2 are the same, the distance between the hands H1 and H2 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is increased. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 40 (b-1) and 40 (b-2), an image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95 (that is, The height positions of the image portions HG1 and HG2 of the hands H1 and H2 in the (virtual two-dimensional plane) are different. Similarly, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 42A, even if the lateral positions of the player's hands H1 and H2 are the same, the distances of the hands H1 and H2 with respect to the surface 22a of the window panel 22 are the same. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 42 (b-1) and 42 (b-2), in the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95. The horizontal positions of the image portions HG1 and HG2 of the hands H1 and H2 are different.

  That is, the imaging device 73 of the imaging substrate 71 is below the region set as the operation effective range in the operation effect (specifically, the front region of the movable object unit 38 and the front region of the display surface of the symbol display device 61). (See FIG. 4), even if the height position of the player's hand is the same, the distance from the surface 22a of the window panel 22 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is expressed in a virtual two-dimensional plane. The image G for one frame is expressed as an image existing on the side close to the imaging device 73, that is, on the lower side. Further, the imaging device 73 is disposed at a position that is the center of the display surface of the symbol display device 61 in the horizontal direction, and the horizontal dimension is shorter than the horizontal dimension on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. Then, since a part or all of the region set as the operation effective range may exist on each of the right side and the left side of the imaging device 73, the player's hand exists at the lateral position. In the image G for one frame represented by a two-dimensional plane as it is farther from the front surface 22a of the window panel 22 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, it exists on the side closer to the imaging device 73, that is, on the lateral center of the display surface. It is expressed as an image.

  Therefore, in step S1708, correction processing according to the distance data for the height position and the horizontal position is executed for all the distance data of the hand image portions HG1 and HG2 included in the image for one frame. Specifically, for the correction process, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 42A, the image portion to be corrected is based on the distance data, and the position of the surface 22 a of the window panel 22 is temporarily determined. Assuming that it exists in the image G for one frame that is a virtual two-dimensional plane, it is corrected for each of the height position and the horizontal position. I do. In the correction in the height direction, the angle of the correction target with respect to the reference viewpoint corresponding to the position of the imaging device 73 is calculated based on the distance data of the correction target and the position data in the height direction, and the virtual angle is calculated based on the angle and the distance data. The position in the height direction on the two-dimensional plane is corrected. Further, when correcting in the horizontal direction, the angle of the correction target with respect to the reference viewpoint corresponding to the position of the imaging device 73 is calculated based on the correction target distance data and the horizontal position data, and based on the angle and the distance data, the virtual object is calculated. The lateral position in the two-dimensional plane is corrected. In actual calculation, mathematical formulas acquired through experiments at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 are used.

  For example, when the hand is present at the position H1 in FIG. 40A, the height position is corrected assuming that the hand is present at the position H2, and the position H1 in FIG. When the hand is present at the position, the lateral position is corrected assuming that the hand is present at the position H2. More specifically, in the case of FIG. 40A, when the hand H1 is imaged in FIG. 40A, the hand image portion HG1 corresponding to the hand H1 is corrected based on the distance data of the imaging result. If it is before, it exists below the operation effective range EA as shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), whereas if it is the corrected image portion HG2, it is shown in FIG. 40 (b-2). Thus, it exists in the operation effective range EA. More specifically, in the case of FIG. 42A, when the hand H1 is imaged in FIG. 42A, the image portion HG1 of the hand corresponding to the hand H1 based on the distance data of the imaging result. Is present to the right of the operation effective range EA as shown in FIG. 42 (b-1) before correction, whereas FIG. 42 (b-) is the corrected image portion HG2. As shown in 2), it exists in the operation effective range EA.

  Here, the distance data corresponding to the position on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 is not subject to correction in both the height direction and the horizontal direction. Further, even if the distance data does not exist on the surface 22a of the window panel 22, the imaging device 73 is included in the horizontal range in the effective operation range, and thus the distance data in which the horizontal direction coincides with the imaging device 73. Is not subject to lateral correction. On the other hand, since the imaging device 73 is disposed below the effective operation range set in the pachinko machine 10 and the imaging surface faces obliquely upward, it exists at the position of the surface 22a of the window panel 22. Except for the corresponding distance data, the correction is made in the height direction.

  Returning to the description of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), after executing the process of step S1708, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not a first notification effect operation has occurred. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the operation effective range EA set for the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95. It is determined whether the hand image portion HG2 is included. In this case, it is determined that the first notification effect operation has been performed by including a part of the hand image portion HG2 in the operation effective range EA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which it is determined that the first notification effect operation is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more, such as 50% of the hand image portion HG2, may be adopted. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the first notification effect operation has been performed by including the entire image portion HG2.

  If it is determined that the first notification effect operation has occurred, both the imaging command flag and the first notification effect flag corresponding to the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S1710. Thereafter, in step S1711, various data at the time of occurrence of the notification is read out, and then the first notification effect control process is terminated.

  The various data at the time of the occurrence of notification includes movable object data at the time of occurrence of the notification. When the movable object data is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, the movable object data is referred to in the movable object control process (step S505) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and the movable object unit 38 is read. The movable objects for production 38a, 38b move to the limit open position. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that the stop result corresponding to the game times is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and the special figure unit 62 that the jackpot result is generated in the game times. In addition, the various data at the time of the occurrence of the notification include the light emission data and the sound output data at the time of the occurrence of the notification, and the light emission data and the sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) In addition, by referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light when the notification is generated and the speaker unit 24 outputs the sound when the notification is generated. Furthermore, in step S 1711, a display command at the time of notification occurrence is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform a display effect when a notification occurs.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1702, a negative determination is made in step S1705, an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, or a negative determination is made in step S1709, in step S1712, It is determined whether or not the operation effective period of the first notification effect operation has elapsed. The operation valid period is measured when “1” is set in the first notification effect flag of the sound side RAM 95 in step S1604 in the notification effect setting process (FIG. 38). The operation valid period is arbitrary, but is set to 60 sec, for example.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the first notification effect control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, both the corresponding imaging command flag and first notification effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to "0" in step S1713, and then the first notification effect control process is performed. finish.

  As described above, by performing the first notification effect control process, when the hand is extended toward the movable object unit 38, the effect movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 are directed toward the limit opening position. It is possible to create an opportunity to move. Thereby, it becomes possible to give unexpectedness to the contents of the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the first notification effect control process, an operation effective range setting process corresponding to the height position group (step S1707) is executed, so that an image for one frame based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is used. In the configuration for determining the presence / absence of the first notification effect operation, it is possible to absorb the difference in the hand height position during the operation due to the difference in the face height position. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the presence / absence of the first notification effect operation.

  Further, in the first notification effect control process, the position correction process (step S1708) corresponding to the distance data is executed, so that the image for one frame based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is used for the first notification effect. In the configuration for determining whether or not there is an operation, it is possible to absorb the difference in the distance of the hand with respect to the window panel 22, and the difference in the height position of the hand during the operation recognized by the image due to the difference in the distance of the hand. Can be absorbed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the presence / absence of the first notification effect operation.

<Second announcement production>
Next, a second notification effect control process for performing execution control of the second notification effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second notification effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the second notification effect flag and the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 (step S1801 and step S1802: YES), an image for one frame for use in the second notification effect Means that the imaging of has been completed. In this case, the process proceeds to the image use processing for the second notification effect after step S1803.

  In the second notification effect image use processing, first, the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1803. In the subsequent step S1804, a hand data extraction process is executed in the same manner as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S1805, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of hand data has been completed, whether or not the distance of the hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more is determined in step S1806 as in step S1706 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Determine.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1806, an operation effective range setting process corresponding to the height position group is executed in step S1807, as in step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). At the same time, in step S1808, as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), position correction processing corresponding to the distance data is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1809, it is determined whether or not a second notification effect operation has occurred. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 44, the second notification effect operation is indicated by a two-dot chain line from a state where the index finger FG1 and the thumb FG2 of the hand H are closed as indicated by a solid line in front of the movable object unit 38. It is an operation to make it open. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the second notification effect operation has been generated using a plurality of imaging results on the imaging substrate 71, and the processes in steps S1801 to S1808 are performed until an affirmative determination is made in step S1809. Need to be executed multiple times. The sound light side RAM 95 can store the finger shape extracted from the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 for a plurality of times of imaging processing, and based on these finger shapes for the plurality of times, the first shape shown in FIG. 2. It is determined whether or not a notification effect operation has occurred.

  In this case, the effective operation range is set for the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, as in the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). It is determined that the second notification effect operation has been performed by performing the above operation in a state where a part of the hand image portion is included in the operation effective range. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined that the second notification effect operation has been performed by performing the above operation in a state where a predetermined ratio or more is included, such as 50% of the image portion of the hand. A configuration may be adopted, and a configuration in which it is determined that the second notification effect operation is performed by performing the above operation in a state where the entire image portion of the hand is included may be employed.

  By the way, when the second notification effect occurs, the symbol display device 61 performs the second notification effect operation, and when the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged at the limit opening position, the jackpot result is obtained in the game round. It is configured to explain that it occurs.

  If it is determined that the second notification effect operation has occurred, 1 is added to the value of the condition satisfaction number counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1810. The condition satisfaction number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times that the second notification effect operation has occurred in the sound light side MPU 93. In subsequent step S1811, various data at the time of the second notification effect operation are read.

  The various data at the time of occurrence of the second notification includes movable object data at the time of the second notification effect operation. When the movable object data is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, the movable object data is referred to in the movable object control process (step S505) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), and the movable object unit 38 is read. The effect movable objects 38a and 38b return to the initial position after moving to the open position on the way. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second notification production operation has been effectively recognized, and that the production movable objects 38a and 38b are finally arranged at the limit opening position. A feeling of expectation can be suitably increased.

  Thereafter, in step S1812, it is determined whether or not the value of the condition establishment number counter in the sound side RAM 95 is equal to or greater than “5”, whereby the second notification effect operation is performed over the condition establishment number of times. It is determined whether or not If an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, both the corresponding imaging command flag and second notification effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S1813.

  After that, in step S1814, it is determined whether or not the current game number is a jackpot result game number. If the game time is a jackpot result, in step S1815, after reading various data at the time of occurrence of the notice, the second notice effect control process is terminated. The various data at the time of notification occurrence is the same data as the various data at the time of occurrence of the notification read in step S1711 in the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Therefore, the production movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 move to the limit opening position. Further, the display light emitting unit 23 emits light when a notification is generated, and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound when the notification is generated. Furthermore, a display effect at the time of notification occurrence is performed on the symbol display device 61.

  If it is not the jackpot result game times, in step S1816, after reading various data when no notification occurs, the second notification effect control process is terminated. The various data when no notification is generated does not include movable object data for moving the effect movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 to the limit opening position. Therefore, the production movable objects 38a and 38b are maintained at the initial positions. On the other hand, the various data when no notification is generated includes light emission data and sound output data when notification is not generated, and these light emission data and sound output data are used in the light emission control process (steps in FIG. 14). In step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light when no notification is generated and the speaker unit 24 outputs sound when no notification is generated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1802, a negative determination is made in step S1805, an affirmative determination is made in step S1806, a negative determination is made in step S1809, or a negative determination is made in step S1812. If so, it is determined in step S1817 whether or not the operation valid period of the second notification effect operation has elapsed. The operation valid period is measured when “1” is set in the second notification effect flag of the sound side RAM 95 in step S1605 in the notification effect setting process (FIG. 38). The operation valid period is arbitrary, but is set to 120 sec, for example.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1817, the second notification effect control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1817, both the corresponding imaging command flag and second notification effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S1818, and then the second notification effect control process is performed. finish.

  As described above, by performing the second notification effect control process, it is not determined that the second notification effect operation has been performed simply by reaching out toward the movable object unit 38, and the predetermined notification is made with a finger. By performing the operation, it is determined that the second notification effect operation has been performed. As a result, it becomes possible to require a complicated operation as compared with the first notification effect operation as an operation for moving the effect movable objects 38a and 38b of the movable object unit 38 toward the limit opening position. It is possible to make the aspect of the production operation novel.

  Further, in the second notification effect operation, it is necessary to perform an operation as if the effect movable objects 38a and 38b are opened toward the limit opening position. As a result, when the production movable objects 38a and 38b move to the limit opening position in accordance with the second notification production operation, the player can move to the limit opening position by the player's own operation. It is possible to give the player an impression.

  In addition, in order to move the stage movable objects 38a and 38b to the limit opening position in accordance with the second announcement production operation in the game round that results in the jackpot result, it is necessary to perform the second announcement production operation a plurality of times. . In this case, each time the second notification effect operation is performed, the effect movable objects 38a and 38b move toward the halfway open position and then return to the initial position. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second notification effect operation is effective through the operations of the effect movable objects 38a and 38b.

<Division effect>
Next, the content of the division effect and the control content for enabling execution of the division effect will be described. FIG. 45 (a-1) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the division effect.

  The split effect is set as a kind of reach effect in the effect for the game times, and a split display for enabling the player to select the execution content of the reach effect after a predetermined branch timing is performed on the symbol display device 61. After the branch timing, the reach effect selected by the player is executed. In split display, as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1), an effect A selection image GA for selecting execution of the selection effect A and an effect B selection image for selecting execution of the selection effect B GB is displayed.

  The effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are each displayed so as to partition a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 61, and the selection images GA and GB have the same or substantially the same area. Is displayed. Further, the effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are displayed in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 with a predetermined interval.

  When it is determined based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71 that the player has reached his / her hand toward the effect A selection image GA in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22, the selection effect A is subsequently displayed. Will be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71 that the player has reached his / her hand toward the effect B selection image GB in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22, the selection effect is performed thereafter. B will be executed. Both the selection effect A and the selection effect B are continued until the end timing of the effect for game times to be executed. In addition, in the selection effect A and the selection effect B, display such as the type of character displayed during the effect, the type of the background image, the presence / absence of the moving image, the type of the moving image, the presence / absence of the actual image, and the type of the actual image The contents will be different.

  Note that the degree of expectation that the selection effect A and the selection effect B will be the jackpot result is the same, but different configurations may be adopted. When the degree of expectation is different, at least one of the selection effect A and the selection effect B can be executed with an effect different from the division effect, and the occurrence ratio of the jackpot result when executed as the different effect Need to be different.

  The flow of the division effect will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 45 (b-1) to 45 (b-3). 45 (b-1) shows the execution period of the pre-selection effect, FIG. 45 (b-2) shows the execution period of the selection effect A, and FIG. 45 (b-3) shows the execution period of the selection effect B. .

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b-1), the pre-selection effect is performed at the timing t <b> 1, which is a situation in which the effect for game times is being executed and the reach effect is started. In the pre-selection effect, the divided display shown in FIG. 45 (a-1) is performed. Then, the pre-selection effect is continued until the timing of t2, and the content of the effect after the timing of the t2 is determined based on the imaging results so far on the imaging substrate 71.

  Specifically, when it is specified that an operation for selecting the effect A selection image GA has been performed by the player, or when any selection operation has not been performed, FIG. 45 (b-2) shows. As shown, the selection effect A is started at the timing of t2. On the other hand, when it is specified that an operation for selecting the image B for effect B selection has been performed by the player, the selection effect B is started at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 45 (b-3). .

  Here, regardless of the selection effect A and the selection effect B, the selection effect ends at the timing of t3 as shown in FIGS. 45 (b-2) and 45 (b-3). As a result, it is possible to make the time until these effects end even when either the selection effect A or the selection effect B is executed. The display continuation time of the effect for game times is determined by the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13) of the main MPU 83. The sound light side MPU 93 and the display control device 96 control the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the symbol display device 61 so that an effect for game times is executed over the display duration time. Thereby, the execution period of the change display of the picture in the special figure unit 62 directly controlled by the main side MPU 83 and the execution period of the effect for the game times in the display light emitting part 23, the speaker part 24, and the symbol display device 61. Can be synchronized with each other. In this case, the division effect is executed after the effect for game times is started, and either the selection effect A or the selection effect B is selected depending on the player's operation mode during the pre-selection effect of the division effect. If the execution durations of the selection effect A and the selection effect B are different, the adjustment of the end timing of the effect for game times becomes complicated. On the other hand, as described above, even if either of the selection effects A and the selection effects B is executed, the time until these effects are finished is constant, so that such inconvenience does not occur. It becomes possible to do so.

  As described above, in the division effect, division display is basically performed as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1). However, when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position, the imaging substrate 71 is displayed. In this case, the accuracy of capturing an image for one frame decreases. Then, when divided display is performed under such a situation, there is a concern that either the selection effect A or the selection effect B is selected regardless of the selection operation of the player. Therefore, when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the divided display is not performed, but the selective display is performed by the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2).

  In the selection display, as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2), a single selection image GC for selecting execution of the selection effect B is displayed. The single selection image GC is displayed so as to partition a part of the display surface of the symbol display device 61, and the single selection image GC is an effect A selection image GA and an effect B selection image GB in divided display. It is displayed so as to have a larger area. Furthermore, the single selection image GC is displayed so as to be equal to or larger than the total area of the area of the effect A selection image GA and the area of the effect B selection image GB in the divided display.

  When it is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71 that the player has reached the single selection image GC in front of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 22, the selection effect B is thereafter Will be executed. On the other hand, if the player does not perform the selection operation, the selection effect A is subsequently executed. The contents of selection effect A and selection effect B are as described above.

  Next, a division effect setting process for starting a division effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The division effect setting process is executed every time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound side RAM 95. If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the split effect setting process is terminated as it is. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S1901 and ending the divided effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the divided effect from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S1902 whether or not a split production start condition is satisfied. The split effect start condition is when a game data effect data table is read in the sound side RAM 95, and pointer data indicating the contents of the control target in the data table indicates the start of the split effect. This is true when it corresponds to data. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the split effect setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S 1903, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the reference flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. If “1” is not set in the reference flag, various data for division display are read out in step S1904. Various data for split display includes light emission data and sound output data for split display. These light emission data and sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light with the divided display pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs the sound with the divided display pattern. In step S 1904, a display command for split display is transmitted to the display control device 96. Upon receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform divided display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1).

  On the other hand, if “1” is set in the reference flag, various data for selection display are read out in step S1905. Various data for selection display includes light emission data and sound output data for selection display, and these light emission data and sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in the pattern for selective display, and the sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the pattern for selective display. In step S 1905, a display command for selection display is transmitted to the display control device 96. Upon receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform selection display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2).

  When the process of step S1904 or step S1905 is executed, after setting “1” to both the imaging command flag and the split effect flag corresponding to the split effect in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1906, the main split effect setting is performed. The process ends. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  Next, a split effect control process for performing execution control of a split effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The divided effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the division effect flag and the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95 (step S2001 and step S2002: YES), the imaging of one frame for use in the division effect is completed. Means that In this case, the process proceeds to an image use process for division effect after step S2003.

  In the divided effect image use processing, first, the imaging completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S2003. In the subsequent step S2004, hand data extraction processing is executed in the same manner as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the extraction of hand data is completed. If the hand data extraction has been completed, whether or not the hand data distance corresponds to the reference target distance or more is determined in step S2006, as in step S1706 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Determine.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2006, an operation effective range setting process corresponding to the height position group is executed in step S2007, as in step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). At the same time, in step S2008, as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), a position correction process corresponding to the distance data is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2009, it is determined whether an effective operation for split production has occurred. Here, the contents of processing for determining whether or not an effective operation for divided effects has occurred will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b). As already described, in the divided effect, the divided display is performed when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the OFF position, and the selection display is performed when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position. Correspondingly, the operation effective range set for the image G for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95 is displayed when divided display and selection display are performed. It is different from the case where it is performed.

  Specifically, when split display is performed, after the process of step S2007 is executed, the image G for one frame corresponds to the effect A selection image GA as shown in FIG. An operation effective range EA1 for selecting the effect A to be performed and an operation effective range EA2 for selecting the effect B corresponding to the image GB for effect B selection are set. These operation effective ranges EA1 and EA2 are set so as to occupy a part of the region in the image G for one frame, and the occupied areas are the same. Further, the effective operation ranges EA1 and EA2 are set at the same position in the vertical direction in the image G for one frame, and are set to be arranged in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval. When the image portion of the hand after the correction process of step S2008 is included in the operation effective range EA1, it is determined that the selection effect A has been selected, and the image portion of the hand is included in the operation effective range EA2. If it is determined that the selection effect B is selected. When the presence of a hand is specified simultaneously in both the operation effective range EA1 and the operation effective range EA2, the selection operation for the selection effect B is given priority, and the effect operation is performed toward the image B for effect B selection. Treat it as a dish.

  On the other hand, when the selection display is performed, after the process of step S2007 is executed, the image G for one frame has a single image corresponding to the single selection image GC as shown in FIG. An effective operation range EA3 for selection is set. The operation effective range EA3 for single selection is set so as to occupy a partial area in the image G for one frame, and the occupied area is for the operation effective range EA1 for effect A selection and the effect B selection. The area is set to be wider than any of the effective operation range EA2. Furthermore, the effective operation range EA3 for single selection is set to be equal to or larger than the total area of the effective operation range EA1 for effect A selection and the effective operation range EA2 for effect B selection. The It is determined that the selection operation has been performed when the image portion of the hand after the correction processing in step S2008 is included in the operation effective range EA3.

  In step S2009, it is determined that the target operation has been performed when a part of the hand image portion is included in the set operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which it is determined that the target operation is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more such as 50% of the hand image portion may be used. It may be configured that it is determined that the target operation has been performed by including the entirety.

  If it is determined that the effective operation for the split effect has been performed, it is determined in step S2010 whether an effective operation has occurred for the first notification effect operation. In the pachinko machine 10, the period during which the division effect is executed may overlap with the period during which the first notification effect is executed. And when both production periods generate | occur | produce overlappingly, as shown to Fig.48 (a) and FIG.48 (b), in the image G for one frame in which the operation effective range EA1-EA3 is set, it is further 1st. An effective operation range EA4 for notification effect is set. In this case, the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3 on the divided effect side are set as ranges for determining that the operation of reaching for the selection images GA, GB, GC displayed on the symbol display device 61 is effective. On the other hand, the operation effective range EA4 for the first notification effect is set as a range for determining that the operation of reaching the movable object unit 38 existing above the symbol display device 61 is effective. The Therefore, the operation effective range EA4 for the first announcement effect is set at a position above the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3 on the divided effect side.

  When the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA4 are set in the vertical direction as described above, if the height position of the hand to be operated cannot be accurately specified, the operation intended by the player and the operation on the pachinko machine 10 side corresponding thereto Will not match. On the other hand, as already described, in the height position monitoring process (FIG. 30), a height group corresponding to the height position of the player's face is specified in advance, and an operation is performed according to the specified height group. The effective range adjustment processing (step S1707, step S2007) is executed, and the position correction processing (step S1708, step S2008) corresponding to the distance data is executed for the hand image portion. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the height position of the hand performing the operation, and it is possible to match the operation intended by the player and the operation on the pachinko machine 10 side.

  When the divided effect and the first notification effect occur in duplicate, the symbol display device 61 explains that the operation corresponding to the divided display or the selection display should be performed, and the operation for the first notification effect. The effect that the big hit result is generated in the game times is described by arranging the movable objects for production 38a and 38b at the limit open position.

  If it is determined that an effective operation has not occurred on the first notification effect side (step S2010: NO), in step S2011, both the corresponding imaging command flag and division effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are set to “0”. "clear. In subsequent step S2012, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the reference flag of the sound side RAM 95, it is determined which of split display and selection display is being executed in the current split effect. To do.

  If “1” is not set in the reference flag, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the operation performed this time is an operation for selecting the selected effect B, that is, the operation effective range EA2 for selecting the effect B is set. It is determined whether or not an event including the image portion is generated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2013, after the various data for selection effect B are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2014, the present split effect control process is terminated.

  The various data for the selection effect B includes the light emission data and the sound output data for the selection effect B, and the light emission data and the sound output data are emitted from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) (step S503). And by referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light corresponding to the selected effect B, and the speaker unit 24 outputs sound corresponding to the selected effect B. Furthermore, in step S2014, a display command for selection effect B is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the display effect of the selection effect B is performed in the symbol display device 61.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2013, the operation performed this time is an operation for selecting the selection effect A, that is, an event in which the hand image portion is included in the operation effective range EA1 for selecting the effect A. Means that it occurred. Therefore, after reading various data for the selection effect A from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2015, the split effect control process is terminated.

  The various data for the selection effect A includes the light emission data and the sound output data for the selection effect A, and the light emission data and the sound output data are emitted from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) (step S503). In addition, by referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light corresponding to the selected effect A and the speaker unit 24 outputs sound corresponding to the selected effect A. Furthermore, in step S2014, a display command for selection effect A is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the display effect of the selection effect A is performed on the symbol display device 61.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 45 (b-1), the execution period of the pre-selection effect in which the divided display or the selection display is performed is constant, so that the selection effect is performed even if the process of step S2014 or step S2015 is executed. B or the selection effect A is not started immediately, but at the timing when the pre-selection effect execution period has elapsed, the selection effect B or the selection effect A in the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the symbol display device 61, respectively. Is started. Further, during the period before the pre-selection effect is executed and after the process of step S2014 or step S2015 is executed, an image indicating that the selection effect B or the selection effect A is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2012 that “1” is set in the reference flag, after reading various data for the selected effect B in step S2014, the divided effect control process is terminated. When “1” is set in the reference flag, the selection display is performed as described above. Therefore, the case where the effective operation for the division effect is performed means the operation effective range for the single selection. This means that an event has occurred in which the image portion of the hand is included in EA3. In this case, the selection effect B is executed as already described.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2002, a negative determination is made in step S2005, a negative determination is made in step S2006, a negative determination is made in step S2009, or a negative determination is made in step S2010 In step S2016, it is determined whether or not the pre-selection effect execution period has elapsed. In the execution period, measurement is started when “1” is set in the divided effect flag of the sound side RAM 95 in step S1906 in the divided effect setting process (FIG. 46). The execution period is arbitrary, but is set to 60 sec, for example.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2016, the divisional effect control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2016, both the corresponding imaging command flag and divided effect flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S2017. Thereafter, in step S2015, various data for the selection effect A is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, and then the division effect control process is terminated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 48A, the interval between the effective operation range EA1 for selecting the effect A and the effective operation range EA2 for selecting the effect B in the divided display is the same for the image portion corresponding to the hand of the adult. It is set so as not to enter. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the interval between the operation effective range EA4 for the first announcement effect and the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3 on the divided effect side corresponds to an adult's hand. It is set so that the image part enters at the same time.

  On the other hand, in the split effect control process, as described above, even if it is determined that a split operation effective operation has occurred (step S2009: YES), an effective operation has occurred on the first notification effect side. When it is determined that there is a difference (step S2010: YES), the effective operation for the division effect is invalidated. Thereby, in the situation where the division effect and the first notification effect are executed in an overlapping manner, when the operation for the division effect and the operation for the first notification effect are performed at the same time, the operation for the first notification effect is performed. Priority can be given.

  The contents of this operation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 49A shows the execution period of the first notification effect, FIG. 49B shows the execution period of the divided effect, FIG. 49C shows the execution period of the first notification effect operation, and FIG. (D) is the execution period of the division effect operation, FIG. 49 (e) is the execution period of the notification generation effect, and FIG. 49 (f) is that either the selection effect A or the selection effect B is selected. It is a display period of the selection completion image indicating

  First, the case where only the divided effect operation is performed will be described. At the timing t1, the first notification effect and the divided effect are started simultaneously as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b). Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), only the division effect operation is performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), a selection completion image indicating that either the selection effect A or the selection effect B has been selected is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the timing t2, and the player Recognizes that the operation for split production was effective.

  Next, the case where the split effect operation and the first notification effect operation are performed at the same time will be described. At the timing t3, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the first notification effect and the split effect are performed. Are started at the same time. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (d), the first notification effect operation and the split effect operation are started simultaneously. In this case, since the first notification effect operation has priority, the notification generation effect is started as shown in FIG. 49 (e), and the display of the selection completion image is not started as shown in FIG. 49 (f).

  Thereafter, even after the first notification effect operation is completed at the timing t5, the division effect operation is continued as shown in FIG. 49D, so that the split effect operation is determined to be valid at the timing t6. Then, the display of the selection completion image is started as shown in FIG.

  As described above, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the player's selection operation by executing the divided effect. In this case, when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the OFF position, a divided display in which a plurality of selection ranges are generated is performed, whereas when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position, the selection range. Is selected and displayed. Accordingly, the selection operation is basically performed in a situation where the accuracy of capturing an image of one frame on the imaging substrate 71 is lowered while diversifying the selection operation by performing divided display in which a plurality of selection ranges are generated. By simplifying the mode, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an effect is selected regardless of the operation mode.

  Further, in the divided display, the effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction instead of the vertical direction on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, and corresponding to one frame. In the image G, an operation effective range EA1 for selecting an effect A and an operation effective range EA2 for selecting an effect B are set side by side in the horizontal direction. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the influence of the height position of the hand in the selection operation in the divided display, and the player performs an operation for selecting one of the selection effect A and the selection effect B. The possibility that the other effect will be executed is reduced.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first notification effect and the divided effect can be executed in an overlapping manner, the first notification effect operation is prioritized when the first notification effect operation and the divided effect operation are performed simultaneously. . As a result, the hand attempting to perform the first notification effect operation has entered not only the operation effective range EA4 for the first notification effect but also the operation effective ranges EA1 to EA3 on the divided effect side. In addition, it is possible to determine that the first notification effect operation has been performed while determining that the split effect operation has not been performed. In particular, since the movable object unit 38 exists immediately above the symbol display device 61, the hand performing the first notification effect operation may enter the operation effective range EA1 to EA3 on the divided effect side. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to appropriately deal with the entry.

<Stop operation effect>
Next, the content of the stop operation effect and the control content for enabling execution of the stop operation effect will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the stop operation effect.

  The stop operation effect is set as a kind of promotion effect in the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The promotion effect is a case where the stop result displayed on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 61 in the game round that results in the jackpot result is either a low probability jackpot result or a most advantageous jackpot result. Even if there is a combination of jackpot results with even symbols as a stop result displayed on one active line, the success / failure lottery mode after the open / close execution mode becomes a high probability mode during the open / close execution mode that occurs thereafter. It is an effect indicating whether or not. In the opening / closing execution mode after the most advantageous jackpot result, a promotion occurrence effect is performed as a promotion effect, and in the opening / closing execution mode after a low probability big hit result, a promotion non-generation effect is performed as a promotion effect.

  In the stop operation effect, although in the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), a plurality of column displays in which the symbol variation display is performed in each of the plurality of variation display areas CA1 to CA3 are displayed on the symbol display device 61. Done. Three variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are set in the same manner as the number of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the effect for game times. Specifically, the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are set side by side in the horizontal direction, and a left variable display area CA1, a middle variable display area CA2, and a right variable display area CA3 exist.

  The left variation display area CA1 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1 in the effect for game times, and the symbols variably displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 are variably displayed in the same order. In this case, the same image data is used as image data for displaying a symbol. The middle variation display area CA2 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2 in the effect for game play, and the symbols variably displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 are variably displayed in the same order. In this case, the same image data is used as image data for displaying a symbol. Further, the right variation display area CA3 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3 in the effect for game play, and the symbols variably displayed in the lower symbol row Z3 are variably displayed in the same order. In this case, the same image data is used as image data for displaying a symbol.

  Here, in the effect for game times, as shown in FIG. 6, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction, and the symbols are variably displayed in the horizontal direction in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, in the stop operation effect, as shown in FIG. 50, the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and the symbols are variably displayed in the vertical direction in each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3. That is, in the stop operation effect, the symbols are variably displayed in a direction different from that for the game times effect, more specifically, in a direction orthogonal to the case for the game times effect. This makes it possible for the player to clearly distinguish between the stop operation effect and the symbol variation display in the effect for game play.

  In the stop operation effect, the player performs a stop operation to reach the respective variable display areas CA1 to CA3 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22, so that the variable display area targeted for the stop operation is performed. In CA1 to CA3, the symbol variation display is stopped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the stop operation is performed toward the left variation display area CA1 in a situation where the variation display of the symbols is performed in all the variation display areas CA1 to CA3. As shown in FIG. 50 (b), in the left variation display area CA1, the variation display of the symbols is stopped, and the symbol with the numeral “7” is stopped and displayed. In this state, when the stop operation is performed toward the right variation display area CA3, the symbol variation display is stopped in the right variation display area CA3 as shown in FIG. The displayed symbol is stopped. As a result, the reach display is performed with the symbol having the numeral “7” attached thereto. In this state, when the stop operation is performed toward the middle variation display area CA2, the variation display of the symbols is stopped in the middle variation display area CA2, as shown in FIGS. 50 (d-1) and 50 (d-2). Is done. In this case, in the case of the promotion occurrence effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (d-1), the symbol with the numeral “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle fluctuation display area CA2. In each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, the symbol with the numeral “7” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified through the result that the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. On the other hand, in the case of the promotion non-occurrence effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (d-2), the symbol different from the symbol with the numeral “7” is stopped and displayed in the middle variation display area CA2. The same symbol is not stopped and displayed in each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, and it is notified through the result that the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode.

  As described above, in the stop operation effect, a plurality of columns are basically displayed as shown in FIG. 50. However, when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position, one frame is displayed on the imaging board 71. The accuracy of taking the minute image is reduced. And if multi-column display is performed under such circumstances, there is a concern that the variable display of symbols will be stopped regardless of the player's selection operation. Therefore, when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position, a single column display is performed on the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG.

  Specifically, in the single column display, as shown in FIG. 51A, the symbols are displayed in a variable display area CA4. In the single variation display area CA4, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the vertical direction as in the case of the multi-column display. However, the types of symbols that are variably displayed are different from those in the multi-column display. As shown in FIG. 51 (b-1), a high probability corresponding symbol “high probability!” And a low probability corresponding symbol “low probability!” As shown in FIG. Is displayed so as to appear in In such a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variably displayed manner, the player performs a stop operation to reach the single variably displaying area CA4 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 22, so that In one variation display area CA4, the variation display of symbols is stopped. And if it is a promotion generation | occurrence | production effect, as shown in FIG.51 (b-1), a high probability corresponding | compatible symbol will be stopped and displayed, and the lottery mode after opening / closing execution mode will be high probability mode through the result. Informed. On the other hand, if it is a promotion non-occurrence effect, the low probability corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2), and the pass / fail lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode through the result. Is notified.

  Next, stop operation effect setting processing for starting a stop operation effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop operation effect setting process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95. If “1” is set in the restriction flag, the split effect setting process is terminated as it is. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2101 and the stop operation effect setting process is terminated as it is, so that it is possible to prevent the stop operation effect from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. Become.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S2102 whether the start condition of the stop operation effect is satisfied. The start condition of the stop operation effect is when the data table of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is read in the sound side RAM 95, and the pointer data indicating the contents of the control target in the data table is the stop operation effect. This is true when it corresponds to the data indicating the start. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the stop operation effect setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the reference flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. If “1” is not set in the reference flag, various data for multi-column display are read out in step S2104. The various data for multi-line display includes light-emission data and sound output data for multi-line display, and these light emission data and sound output data are used in the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). In addition, by referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light with a pattern for displaying a plurality of columns and the sound is output from the speaker unit 24 with a pattern for displaying a plurality of columns. . Furthermore, in step S2104, a display command for multi-column display is transmitted to the display control device 96. When receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to display a plurality of columns as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if “1” is set in the reference flag, various data for single column display are read out in step S2105. The various data for single column display include light emission data and sound output data for single column display, and these light emission data and sound output data are used in the light emission control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). In addition, by referring to the sound output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a single column display pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs sound in a single column display pattern. . In step S 2105, a display command for single column display is transmitted to the display control device 96. Upon receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform a single column display as shown in FIG.

  When the processing of step S2104 or step S2105 is executed, after setting “1” to both the imaging command flag and the stop operation effect flag corresponding to the stop operation effect in the sound side RAM 95 in step S2106, The stop operation effect setting process is terminated. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  Next, stop operation effect control processing for performing stop operation effect execution control will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop operation effect control process is executed every time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in both the stop operation effect flag and the image capture completion flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S2201 and step S2202: YES), an image of one frame for use in the stop operation effect is captured. Means that has been completed. In this case, the process proceeds to the image use processing for the stop operation effect after step S2203.

  In the image use processing for the stop operation effect, first, in step S2203, the imaging completion flag in the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to “0”. In the following step S2204, hand data extraction processing is executed in the same manner as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2205, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of hand data has been completed, whether or not the distance of the hand data corresponds to the reference target distance or more is determined in step S2206, as in step S1706 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). Determine.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2206, an operation effective range setting process corresponding to the height position group is executed in step S2207 as in step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). At the same time, in step S2208, as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39), a position correction process corresponding to the distance data is executed.

  After that, in step S2209, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the reference flag of the sound side RAM 95, which of the multiple-row display and the single-row display is being executed as the stop operation effect. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S2209, it means that a plurality of columns are displayed as a stop operation effect. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2210.

  In step S2210, it is determined whether or not an effective operation for stop operation effect has occurred in a situation where a plurality of columns are displayed. Here, with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 54 (a), processing contents for determining whether or not a valid operation for a stop operation effect has occurred in a situation where a plurality of columns are displayed will be described.

  In the case where the symbol variation display is performed in all the variation display areas CA1 to CA3, after the processing of step S2207 is performed, the image G for one frame is displayed as shown in FIG. A left operation effective range EA5 corresponding to the left variation display area CA1, a middle operation effective range EA6 corresponding to the middle variation display area CA2, and a right operation effective range EA7 corresponding to the right variation display area CA3. Is set. These operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 are set so as to occupy a partial region in the image G for one frame, and the occupied areas are the same. Further, the operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 are set at the same position in the vertical direction in the image G for one frame, and are set to be arranged in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, when the variable display of symbols is already stopped in some of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3, the operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 corresponding to the stopped variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are not set.

  If the hand image portion after the correction processing in step S2208 is included in the left operation effective range EA5, it is determined that the stop operation has been performed on the left variation display area CA1, and the hand image is determined. If the portion is included in the middle operation effective range EA6, it is determined that the stop operation has been performed on the middle fluctuation display area CA2, and the hand image portion is included in the right operation effective range EA7. If it is, it is determined that a stop operation has been performed on the right variation display area CA3.

  In step S2210, it is determined that the target operation has been performed by including a part of the hand image portion in the set operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which it is determined that the target operation is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more such as 50% of the hand image portion may be used. It may be configured that it is determined that the target operation has been performed by including the entirety.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 54A, in the image G for one frame, the left operation effective range EA5 and the middle operation effective range EA6 are set to be adjacent in the horizontal direction. The interval between the left operation effective range EA5 and the middle operation effective range EA6 is set such that an image portion corresponding to an adult's hand enters at the same time. Further, in the image G for one frame, the middle operation effective range EA6 and the right operation effective range EA7 are set to be adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. However, the middle operation effective range EA6 and the right operation effective range EA7 are set. The interval from the effective operation range EA7 is set such that an image portion corresponding to an adult's hand enters at the same time. In this case, if it is configured such that the symbol variation display in the plurality of variation display areas CA1 to CA3 is simultaneously stopped by one stop operation, the number of stop operations may be reduced against the player's intention. is there. It is also assumed that the player performs a stop operation so as to intentionally stop the symbol variation display in the plurality of variation display areas CA1 to CA3 at the same time. In this case, when the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is configured to be stopped simultaneously by one stop operation, the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are set and the symbols are displayed according to the stop operation. This would be contrary to the effect of the multi-column display effect that tries to stop the variable display in sequence.

  On the other hand, even if the image portion of the hand enters the plurality of effective operation ranges EA5 to EA7 at the same time by executing the processing of step S2211 and step S2212 in the stop operation effect control processing (FIG. 53). Only the variable display of symbols in the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is stopped. More specifically, in step S2211, the operation that triggers the determination that there is an effective operation in step S2210 is a variation that is being displayed in a variable manner in a situation where the symbols are displayed in the variation display areas CA1 to CA3. It is determined whether or not the hand image portion is included in the plurality of operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 corresponding to the display areas CA1 to CA3.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2211, the stop priority data stored in the stop priority data storage area 94a of the sound side ROM 94 is read in step S2212. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining stop priority data.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when all the operation effective ranges EA5 to EA7 include the hand image portion in the situation where the symbols are displayed in the variation display areas CA1 to CA3, the left The variable display area CA1 is set as a target to be stopped with priority. In addition, at least the left variation display area CA1 and the middle variation display area CA2 are displayed with the variation of the symbols, the left operation effective range EA5 and the middle operation effective range EA6 include the image portion of the hand. In this case, the left variation display area CA1 is set as a target to be stopped with priority. In addition, in the situation where the symbol variation display is performed at least in the left variation display area CA1 and the right variation display area CA3, the left operation effective range EA5 and the right operation effective range EA7 include a hand image portion. In this case, the left variation display area CA1 is set as a target to be stopped with priority. In addition, at least the middle variation display area CA2 and the right variation display area CA3 are displayed with the variation of the symbol, the middle operation effective range EA6 and the right operation effective range EA7 include the hand image portion. If there is, the right variation display area CA3 is set as a target to be stopped with priority.

  After referring to the stop priority data in step S2212, various corresponding data are read in step S2213. Also, when a negative determination is made in step S2212, various corresponding data are read in step S2213.

  The various data read in step S2213 is common stop-time data for the light emission data and the sound output data even if any of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 is to be stopped. The common stop-time data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). Light is emitted and sound corresponding to the pattern when the symbol is stopped is output from the speaker unit 24. In step S2213, a display command indicating the occurrence of a stop is transmitted to the display control device 96, but the content of the display command at the time of the stop differs depending on the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 to be stopped. Upon receiving the display command, the display control device 96 displays the symbols of the stop results in the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 that are the current stop targets. In this case, when the current stop operation effect is executed as a promotion occurrence effect, the number “7” is displayed regardless of the stop order of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 that are the current stop targets. The symbol with is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the current stop operation effect is executed as a promotion non-occurrence effect, “7” when the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 targeted for the current stop are in the first or second stop order. The symbol with the number is stopped, and if it is the third stop order, the symbol different from the symbol with the number “7” is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in step S2214, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display has been stopped in all the variation display areas CA1 to CA3. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2214, various corresponding data are read in step S2215.

  In the case where the current stop operation effect is a promotion occurrence effect, when the processing of step S2215 is executed, the emission data and sound output data for the occurrence of the promotion are included. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission pattern according to the data read in step S2213. After the sound is output, the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in the pattern at the time of the promotion occurrence, and the speaker unit 24 outputs the sound corresponding to the pattern at the time of the promotion occurrence. In addition, a display command at the time of promotion occurrence is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display light emitting unit 23 starts to emit light according to the pattern when the promotion occurs, and at the timing when the speaker unit 24 starts to output sound according to the pattern when the promotion occurs. The display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed so that a display effect indicating that the promotion has occurred is started.

  On the other hand, when the process of step S2215 is executed when the current stop operation effect is a promotion non-occurrence effect, light emission data and sound output data for when no promotion is generated are included. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission pattern according to the data read in step S2213. After the sound is output, the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a pattern when no promotion occurs, and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the pattern when no promotion occurs. In addition, a display command when no promotion is generated is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display light emitting unit 23 starts to emit light according to the pattern when no promotion occurs, and starts to output sound from the speaker unit 24 according to the pattern when no promotion occurs. At the timing, the display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed so that a display effect indicating that no promotion has occurred is started.

  After executing the process of step S2215, the process proceeds to step S2216. In step S2216, both the corresponding imaging command flag and stop operation effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the stop operation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2209 that the reference flag is set to “1”, it is determined in step S2217 whether an effective operation for stop operation effect has occurred in a situation where a single row display is performed. Determine. Here, with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 54 (b), processing contents for determining whether or not a valid operation for a stop operation effect has occurred in a situation where a single column display is performed will be described.

  When the symbol variation display is performed in the single variation display area CA4, after the process of step S2207 is executed, the image G for one frame is simply displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (b). A single operation effective range EA8 corresponding to one variable display area CA4 is set. The single operation effective range EA8 is set so as to occupy a partial area in the image G for one frame, and the occupied areas are the left operation effective range EA5, the middle operation effective range EA6, and the right Is set to have a larger area than any of the effective operation ranges EA7. Furthermore, the single operation effective range EA8 is equal to or greater than the total of the area of the left operation effective range EA5, the area of the middle operation effective range EA6, and the area of the right operation effective range EA7. Is set as follows. When the hand image portion after the correction processing in step S2208 is performed is included in the operation effective range EA8, it is determined that the stop operation has been performed on the single variable display area CA4.

  In step S2217, it is determined that the stop operation has been performed by including a part of the hand image portion in the single operation effective range EA8. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the stop operation has been performed by including a predetermined ratio or more such as 50% of the hand image portion. It is good also as a structure determined with the stop operation having been performed by being included. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2217, after reading various corresponding data in step S2218, the process of step S2216 is executed, and the stop operation effect control process is terminated.

  In the case where the current stop operation effect is a promotion occurrence effect, when the processing of step S2218 is executed, the emission data and sound output data for the occurrence of the promotion are read. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in the pattern at the time of the promotion occurrence. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the pattern when the promotion occurs is output from the speaker unit 24. In addition, a display command at the time of promotion occurrence is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control is started so that the display effect indicating that the promotion has occurred after the high probability corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 sec) is displayed. The display of the device 61 is controlled.

  On the other hand, when the processing of step S2218 is executed when the current stop operation effect is a promotion non-occurrence effect, light emission data and sound output data for when no promotion is generated are read. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a pattern when no promotion occurs. In addition, a sound corresponding to the pattern when no promotion is generated is output from the speaker unit 24. In addition, a display command when no promotion is generated is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display effect indicating that the promotion has not occurred after the low-probability corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 sec) is started. Display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, a negative determination is made in step S2205, an affirmative determination is made in step S2206, a negative determination is made in step S2210, a negative determination is made in step S2214, Alternatively, if a negative determination is made in step S2217, it is determined in step S2219 whether the operation validity period has elapsed. The operation valid period starts when the stop operation effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 is set to “1” in step S2106 in the stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 52). The operation valid period is arbitrary, but is set to 60 sec, for example.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2219, the stop operation effect control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2219, the corresponding data is read in step S2220, and then the process of step S2216 is executed to end the stop operation effect control process.

  The various data read in step S2220 includes light emission data and sound output data for when operation is not completed. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a pattern when the operation is not completed. And a sound corresponding to the pattern when the operation is not completed is output from the speaker unit 24. In addition, a display command when the operation is not completed is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 terminates the multi-column display and the single-column display that have been performed until then, and if the current stop operation effect is a promotion generation effect, the promotion has occurred. When the display operation of the symbol display device 61 is controlled so as to start the display effect and the stop operation effect of this time is the promotion generation effect, the display effect indicating that the promotion has not occurred is started. The display control of the symbol display device 61 is performed.

  As described above, by executing the stop operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the variable display of symbols is stopped according to the stop operation of the player. In particular, since the player puts his hand toward the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 to be stopped in the stop operation, a different stop operation is performed for each of the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 to be stopped. It is possible to clearly associate the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 to be stopped with the mode of the stop operation. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an impression that the pachinko machine 10 is actively participating in the game.

  In this case, when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the OFF position, the multi-column display in which a plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are generated is performed, whereas the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position. In this case, a single column display in which a single variable display area CA4 is generated is performed. Accordingly, the accuracy of capturing an image for one frame on the imaging substrate 71 is lowered while the stop operation is diversified by performing multi-column display in which a plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are generated. In the situation, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the change display of the symbols is stopped regardless of the operation mode by simplifying the mode of the stop operation.

  Further, when displaying in a plurality of columns, the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction instead of the vertical direction on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, and each operation is effective in the image G corresponding to one frame. Ranges EA5 to EA7 are set side by side in the horizontal direction. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the influence of the hand height position in the stop operation in the multi-row display, and the player has performed an operation for stopping the change display of the symbols in the predetermined change display areas CA1 to CA3. Nevertheless, the possibility that the variable display of the symbols in the different variable display area is stopped is reduced.

  Further, in a configuration in which stop operations for a plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 can be performed at the same time, when the stop operations are simultaneously performed as described above, in one variable display area CA1 to CA3 according to a predetermined priority. Only the symbol variation display is stopped. Thus, for example, even if the hand that is about to perform the stop operation on the left variation display area CA1 enters not only the left operation effective range EA5 but also the middle operation effective range EA6, the left variation It is possible to stop only the variable display of symbols in the display area CA1.

<Continuous production>
Next, the content of the continuous effect and the control content for enabling execution of the continuous effect will be described.

  In the case of the continuous production, when the hold information that is not the start of the game times is stored in the special figure hold area 85b of the main RAM 85, if the hold information is likely to trigger the jackpot result, the player This is a series of effects executed not only in the game times triggered by the hold information but also in the game times executed before the game times triggered by the hold information. In the game times that are the execution targets of the continuous effect, an effect using the same effect image is performed.

  The contents of the continuous performance will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b), the symbol display device 61 performs the variation of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 as an effect for game play. When the display is stopped and the reach display is started, there is a fish school effect in which a plurality of fish characters CH1 flow from the right end to the left end of the display surface. When the fish school effect is generated, a jackpot result is generated in the game round with a probability of 50%, and the player expects the fish school effect to occur.

  In the continuous effect, an image used in the fish school effect is used. Specifically, in the game times that are executed before the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the execution of the continuous performance, a plurality of fish characters CH1 are displayed on the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. A prior notice effect is produced in which the image appears from the right end of the display surface to the middle position in the horizontal direction but returns to the right end side and is not displayed. The prior notice effect is performed in a situation in which the symbol variation display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the corresponding game times. The prior notice effect is executed at the game times corresponding to the hold information stored in the special figure hold area 85b at the timing when the hold information that is the trigger for executing the continuous effect is acquired. The prior notice effect occurs regardless of whether or not reach display occurs in the corresponding game times.

  On the other hand, the final presentation is executed in the game times corresponding to the hold information that is the trigger for the continuous presentation. As a final effect, if a jackpot result occurs in the game round, a complete effect is performed in which a plurality of fish characters CH1 flow from the right end to the left end of the display surface of the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 56 (b). . If a jackpot result does not occur in the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggers the execution of the continuous performance, the completion performance shown in FIG. 56 (b) is performed as the final performance if the execution lottery process is performed. On the other hand, if the execution lottery process is not executed, a plurality of fish characters CH1 appear from the right end of the display surface to the middle position in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. The incomplete production to be displayed is performed as the final production. In order to match the start timing of the performance with respect to the start timing of the game times with the previous notice effect, the final effect is all symbols in the corresponding game times regardless of whether or not the complete effect shown in FIG. 56 (b) is executed. This is performed in the situation where the symbols are displayed in the columns Z1 to Z3.

  The flow of continuous production will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 57 (a) shows an execution period of game times, FIG. 57 (b) shows the number of hold information stored in the special figure hold area 85b, and FIG. 57 (c) shows that the execution state of continuous effects continues. 57 (d) shows the execution period of the previous notice effect, and FIG. 57 (e) shows the execution period of the final effect.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, an effect for game times is started at the timing of t1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the number of hold information is subtracted from two to one. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the hold information is newly acquired at each of the timing t2, the timing t3, and the timing t4 during the period in which the effect for game play is continued. As a result, the number of pending information becomes the upper limit number of four. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the hold information acquired at the timing t4 is set to a state in which a continuous effect is to be executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the timing of t6, and the timing of t7, a new effect for game times is started as shown in FIG. 57 (a), and in each game time as shown in FIG. 57 (d). A prior notice effect is executed. Then, at the timing of t8, the game times corresponding to the hold information that triggered the execution of the continuous effect is started, so that the final effect is executed as shown in FIG. To do.

  Hereinafter, the processing content for performing a continuous effect is demonstrated. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a hold command setting process executed by the main MPU 83. In the hold command setting process, in the hold information acquisition process in step S301 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12), a winning to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 occurs and the held information is newly updated. It is executed when it is acquired. Note that a hold command setting process is executed each time a new acquisition of hold information is performed.

  In the hold command setting process, first, in step S2301, the numerical information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 is read from the hold information acquired this time and newly stored in the special figure hold area 85b. In subsequent step S2302, a success / failure table corresponding to the current success / failure lottery mode is read from the main ROM 84. In step S2303, it is determined whether the numerical information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S2301 is numerical information corresponding to the jackpot result in the success / failure table read in step S2302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, a hold command corresponding to jackpot is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 in step S2304, and the setting process of the hold command is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 is read from the hold information acquired this time and newly stored in the special figure hold area 85b. Thereafter, in step S2306, the outlier reach occurrence determination table is read from the main ROM 84, and it is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 read out in step S2305 corresponds to the occurrence of outlier reach. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, a hold command corresponding to reach is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 in step S2307, and then the setting process of the hold command is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2306, a hold command corresponding to a detachment is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 in step S2308, and then the hold command setting process is terminated.

  Next, continuous production setting processing for starting a continuous production will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous effect setting process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95. When “1” is set in the restriction flag, the continuous effect setting process is terminated. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making a positive determination in step S2401 and ending the continuous effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the continuous effect from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S2402 whether any pending command is received from the main MPU 83. If no hold command has been received, the continuous production setting process is terminated as it is, and if any hold command has been received, a continuous production execution lottery process is executed in step S2403.

  In the continuous effect execution lottery process, the numerical information of the counter for continuous effect periodically updated in the sound side RAM 95 is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information corresponds to the execution winning of the continuous effect. . If the pending command received this time is a jackpot compatible pending command, it will be elected with a probability of 1/2, if it is a reach capable pending command, it will be elected with a probability of 1/5, if it is a missed pending command It will be won with a probability of 1/20. In the subsequent step S2404, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2403 is an execution winning. If it is not an execution win, the continuous effect setting process is terminated as it is, and if it is an execution win, the process proceeds to step S2405.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the currently received hold command is a jackpot-compatible hold command. If an affirmative determination is made in step S 2405, “1” is set to the completion effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S 2406. The completion effect flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 93 that the completion effect shown in FIG. 56B is to be executed as the final effect. In the case of a jackpot-compatible hold command, the final effect flag is set to “1”, so that when the continuous effect execution state is triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, as the final effect The completion effect is executed without fail.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether the currently received hold command is a reach-compatible hold command. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2407, a completion effect execution lottery process is executed in step S2408. In the completion effect execution lottery process, the numerical information of the counter for completion effect periodically updated in the sound side RAM 95 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information corresponds to the execution winning of the completion effect. . In the execution lottery process, the winning effect of the completion effect is achieved with a probability of 1/10. In a succeeding step S2409, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2408 is an execution winning. In the case of execution winning, “1” is set to the completion effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 in step S2406. Thereby, when it becomes the execution state of the continuous production triggered by the hold information corresponding to the execution of the detachment reach, the completion effect is executed with a predetermined probability (specifically, 1/10).

  When the process of step S2406 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S2407, or when a negative determination is made at step S2409, a continuous effect is displayed in the execution number counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 at step S2410. A value corresponding to the number of games to be executed (first notice effect and final effect) is set. The total number of the hold information when the hold information that triggered the transmission of the hold command is acquired for the hold command corresponding to the jackpot, the hold command corresponding to the reach, and the hold command corresponding to the loss transmitted from the main MPU 83. Is set. In step S2410, information indicating the total number is read from the currently received hold command, and a value corresponding to the read numerical information is set in the execution number counter. The value set in the execution number counter is decremented by 1 every time the game number in which the continuous effect is executed ends.

  Thereafter, in step S 2411, “1” is set in both the continuous effect flag and the imaging command flag corresponding to the continuous effect in the sound side RAM 95, and then the continuous effect setting process ends. By setting “1” to the continuous effect flag, the advance notice effect is executed at each game time until the value of the execution frequency counter in the sound side RAM 95 becomes “1”. Specifically, the light emission data and sound output data for the advance notice effect are read, and the light emission data and sound output data are used as the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S503) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). With reference to step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light with the pattern for the advance notice effect, and the sound is output from the speaker unit 24 with the pattern for the advance notice effect. Furthermore, the advance notice effect is performed in the symbol display device 61 by transmitting a display command for the advance notice effect to the display control device 96. On the other hand, the final presentation of this time is executed in the game times where the value of the execution number counter of the sound light side RAM 95 is “1”. Specifically, the light emission data and sound output data for the final presentation of this time are read out, and the light emission data and sound output data are used as the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). With reference to (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light with the current final effect pattern and the sound is output from the speaker unit 24 with the current final effect pattern. Furthermore, the display command for the final presentation of this time is transmitted to the display control device 96, so that the final presentation of the current time is performed by the symbol display device 61. Further, by setting “1” to the imaging command flag, as described above, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is performed on the imaging substrate 71. Be started.

  Next, continuous effect control processing for executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the continuous effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous effect control process is executed every time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  If “1” is set in the continuous effect flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S2501: YES), control is performed in the game data effect data table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2502. It is determined whether or not the pointer data indicating the content of the target corresponds to data indicating that it is during the continuous production execution correspondence period. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period during which the previous notice effect or the final effect is executed in the game times in which the previous notice effect or the final effect is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the continuous effect control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503.

  In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the value of the execution number counter of the sound side RAM 95 is “1”, thereby determining whether or not the current continuous effect is the final effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the prior notice effect processing shown in steps S2504 to S2513 is executed.

  In the advance notice effect process, first, in step S2504, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. If “1” is not set in the imaging completion flag, the continuous effect control process is terminated as it is. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of an image for one frame for use in the prior notice effect has been completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to “0” in step S2505.

  In the following step S2506, hand data extraction processing is executed in the same manner as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S2507, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of hand data has been completed, an operation effective range setting process corresponding to the height position group is executed in step S2508, as in step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). In step S2509, position correction processing corresponding to the distance data is executed in the same manner as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2510, it is determined whether an effective operation for a prior notice effect has been performed. Here, a state in which the prior notice effect is performed using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  At the timing when the previous notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the fish character CH1 that performs the previous notice effect appears on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 from the appearance source side (the right end of the display surface). Side). The initial line IL is set on the display surface in the middle of the movement direction of the fish character CH1, that is, in the middle of the horizontal direction. Specifically, the initial line IL is 1/2 from the end on the appearance side in the horizontal direction of the display surface. The position 5 is set.

  In the advance notice effect, the fish character CH1 appearing up to the position of the initial line IL is displayed on the display surface according to the position of the hand placed in front of the symbol display device 61 in front of the pachinko machine 10 of the window panel 22. It is pulled out to the center in the horizontal direction. For example, when the player's hand is taken toward a position corresponding to a position corresponding to 1/3 from the end on the appearance side in the horizontal direction of the display surface, as shown in FIG. The fish character CH1 that has appeared up to the position of the line IL is drawn out to the position of the operation line HL.

  However, if the fish character CH1 is pulled out to the end of the movement destination side or the vicinity thereof on the display surface in accordance with the operation of the player's hand, the player may mistakenly recognize that the completion effect has been executed. Occurs. Therefore, the position at which the fish character CH1 is pulled out in response to the player's continuous performance operation is limited to be a position closer to the movement source than the end on the movement destination side in the horizontal direction of the display surface. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), a limit line BL is set at the horizontal center position of the display surface. Thereby, even if the player's hand is extended to the right end position of the display surface, the fish character CH1 appears only up to the position of the limit line BL.

  Returning to the description of the continuous effect control process (FIG. 60), in the situation where the continuous effect is being executed, the symbols are displayed in the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95. A range corresponding to the entire display surface of the device 61 is set as an effective operation range. In step S2510, it is determined that the previous notice effect operation has been performed when a part of the hand image portion is included in the effective operation range. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that it is determined that the operation for the advance notice effect is performed by including a predetermined ratio or more such as 50% of the image portion of the hand. It is good also as a structure which determines with the operation for a prior notice effect having been performed by including the whole. By the way, when the advance notice effect occurs, the symbol display device 61 explains that the expectation that a big hit result will occur when the sink character is performed and the fish character CH1 flows to the end of the destination side is high. It is configured to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2510, the continuous effect control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2510, the process proceeds to step S2511.

  In step S2511, it is determined whether or not the position of the player's hand is within the restricted range. Specifically, in the image for one frame based on the distance data, whether or not the hand image portion is in the range corresponding to the destination side from the initial line IL and from the limit line BL to the appearance source side. Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, the process corresponding to the hand position is executed in step S2512, and then the continuous effect control process ends. Specifically, a display command for causing the fish character CH1 to appear up to the operation line HL corresponding to the current hand position is transmitted to the display control device 96. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61B, the symbol display device 61 causes the fish character CH1 to appear up to the operation line HL.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2511, the process corresponding to the restriction position is executed in step S2513, and then the continuous effect control process is terminated. Specifically, a display command for causing the fish character CH1 to appear up to the initial line IL is displayed when the current hand position is the position of the initial line IL or the end of the appearance line with respect to the initial line IL. It transmits to the control apparatus 96. As a result, as shown in FIG. 61A, the symbol display device 61 displays an image in which the fish character CH1 appears up to the initial line IL. When the current hand position is at the limit line BL or at the end of the movement destination side with respect to the limit line BL, a display command for causing the fish character CH1 to appear up to the limit line BL is displayed on the display control device 96. Send to. Thereby, as shown in FIG.61 (c), the image which fish character CH1 appears to the limit line BL of the symbol display apparatus 61 is displayed.

  Here, the execution corresponding period of the continuous performance is set to, for example, 10 sec in each game time, and in the execution corresponding period, the position of the player's hand is followed between the initial line IL and the limit line BL. The fish character CH1 moves. In this case, when the player moves his / her hand from the end on the display side of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 toward the end on the destination side, The fish character CH1 moves so as to follow the player's hand between the IL and the limit line BL. However, the position of the limit line BL remains at the head without following the limit line BL. . In addition, when the execution period corresponding to the continuous effect has passed in the game times in which the previous notice effect is being executed, the previous notice effect of the game time is ended at that time, and the fish character CH1 is displayed Is hidden.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, that is, if the current continuous effect is the final effect, the final effect control process is executed in step S2514, and then the continuous effect control process ends. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the final effect control process.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of one frame for use in the final effect has been completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to “0” in step S2602.

  In the subsequent step S2603, hand data extraction processing is executed as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S2604, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of hand data has been completed, an operation effective range setting process corresponding to the height position group is executed in step S2605 as in step S1707 of the first notification effect control process (FIG. 39). In step S2606, position correction processing corresponding to the distance data is executed in the same manner as in step S1708 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39).

  Thereafter, in step S2607, it is determined whether or not a sink operation has been performed by the player. The sinking operation is an operation of moving the hand in the direction in which the fish character CH1 moves during the school of fish production in front of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 22. This moving distance is set to be not less than the dimension in the moving direction of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, that is, not less than the dimension in the horizontal direction. Accordingly, when determining whether or not the sink operation has been performed, it is determined whether or not the hand has moved in the lateral direction by a predetermined distance or more. Therefore, the sink operation is performed using a plurality of imaging results on the imaging substrate 71. It is determined whether or not the operation has been performed. In the sound light side RAM 95, it is possible to store the position information in the lateral direction of the hand extracted from the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 for a plurality of times of imaging processing, and the flow is performed based on the position information for the plurality of times. It is determined whether an operation has been performed.

  When the final effect is started, an image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95 is displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 as in the case of the previous notice effect. The range corresponding to the whole is set as the operation effective range, but it is determined that the flow operation has been performed by performing the above operation in a state where a part of the hand image portion is included in the operation effective range. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the sink operation has been performed by performing the above operation in a state where a predetermined ratio or more is included, such as 50% of the image portion of the hand. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the sink operation has been performed by performing the above operation in a state where the entire image portion of the hand is included. By the way, when the final effect occurs, the symbol display device 61 explains that the expectation that a big hit result will occur is high when the sink character is performed and the fish character CH1 flows to the end of the destination. It is the composition that is called.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not “1” is set to the completion effect flag in the sound side RAM 95. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, various data for completion effects are read in step S2609. The various data for the completion effect includes light emission data and sound output data for the completion effect. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a pattern for a complete effect. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the pattern for the complete effect is output from the speaker unit 24. In step S2609, a display command for completion effect is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the completion effect is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2608, various data for incomplete effects is read in step S2610. The various data for incomplete effects includes light emission data and sound output data for incomplete effects. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a pattern for incomplete effects. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the pattern for incomplete production is output from the speaker unit 24. In step S2610, a display command for an incomplete effect is transmitted to display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that the incomplete effect is executed.

  When the process of step S2609 or step S2610 is executed, all of the corresponding imaging command flag, continuous effect flag, and completed effect flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S2611. Thereafter, the final effect control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, a negative determination is made in step S2604, or a negative determination is made in step S2607, whether or not the execution corresponding period of the final effect has elapsed in step S2612 Determine whether. In the execution corresponding period of the final effect, measurement is started when the game times to be executed for the final effect are started. The execution period corresponding to the final effect is arbitrary, but is set to 10 sec, for example.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2612, the final effect control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, the final effect control process is performed after all of the corresponding imaging command flag, continuous effect flag, and complete effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S2611. Exit. In this case, regardless of whether or not “1” is set in the completion effect flag, an image showing that the fish character CH1 is retracted from the end on the appearance source side to the outside of the display surface is displayed in the symbol display device 61. Is done.

  As described above, by executing the continuous performance, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot result by repeating the same performance over a plurality of game times. In this case, when the advance notice effect is being executed, the fish character CH1 appears up to the position corresponding to the hand that the player has made for the advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect in a manner according to the player's operation and to diversify the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect continues over a plurality of game times. Even if it occurs, it is possible to avoid getting bored with the prior notice effect.

  Even if the fish character CH1 appears up to the position according to the player's operation in the prior notice effect, it limits the limit line BL set in the middle of the movement direction of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. As done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fish character CH1 from flowing to the end on the movement destination side in the situation where the advance notice effect is being executed, and the fish character CH1 is placed at a position corresponding to the operation as described above. While making it possible to appear, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the completion effect has been executed even though the completion effect has not actually been performed.

  When the completion effect is executed as the final effect, the completion effect is executed on condition that the player has performed the sink operation. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the effect of flowing the fish character CH1 to the end on the destination side is generated by the player's own operation, and to enhance the sense of superiority when the completion effect is executed. It becomes possible.

  In a configuration in which the player cannot recognize which game times are the execution targets of the final effect when the continuous effect is being executed, either the previous notice effect or the final effect is being executed. Also, the symbol display device 61 informs that the sink operation should be performed. Thereby, in the situation where the continuous production is being executed, it is possible to perform the flow operation while expecting the completion production to occur at each game time. In this case, in the advance notice effect, the fish character CH1 moves toward the end on the destination side according to the player's sinking operation. By setting BL, it is possible to clearly recognize that the completion effect is different from the completion effect while allowing the player to expect the completion effect until the middle of the flow operation.

  Even if the player's hand is placed outside the end of the appearance side of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 during the period corresponding to the continuous production execution of each game time, the fish character CH1. Is not retracted from the initial line IL. Thereby, it is possible to maintain the notification that it is the execution-corresponding period of the continuous performance regardless of the player's operation mode.

  In the continuous effect control process, it is not determined whether or not the extracted hand data corresponds to a reference target distance or more set in another effect control process. The operation for moving the fish character CH1 is an operation of putting out a hand toward the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 with a predetermined position as a target, such as a first notification effect operation, a second notification effect operation, a split effect operation, and a stop operation. Unlike the operation, it is an operation of moving the hand in the horizontal direction. The operation is assumed not only when performed in front of the surface 22a of the window panel 22, but also when performed at a position away from the surface 22a in front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by not determining whether or not the distance is the reference target distance or more as described above, it is possible to grasp the operation for the continuous performance without omission.

<Confrontation production>
Next, the content of the confrontation effect and the control content for enabling execution of the confrontation effect will be described.

  In the confrontation effect, when the selection target result presented by the player with respect to the appearance target result displayed on the pachinko machine 10 at the determination timing of the confrontation result is a victory result, the effect on the winning side is subsequently executed and the draw is performed. In the case of a result or a defeat result, the non-winning effect is executed thereafter. The confrontation effect is set as a kind of effect for the game times, and can be executed as a notice effect in the situation where the symbol display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 61. In the row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, it can be executed as a reach effect in a situation where the change display of symbols is stopped and the reach display is performed. When the confrontation effect is executed, the execution content of the effect after the determination timing of the confrontation result is set to either the content corresponding to the victory result or the content corresponding to the non-win result.

  Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 63, the Janken game is played as a confrontation effect. When the Janken game is performed, the opponent character CH2 is displayed on the symbol display device 61 and the result area WE is displayed. The opponent character CH2 presents one of “goo”, “choki”, and “par” as an appearance target result on the pachinko machine 10 side at the determination timing of the confrontation result. On the other hand, in the result area WE, a selection target result (any one of “GOO”, “CHOKI”, and “PAR”) presented by the player before the determination timing of the confrontation result is displayed. In the case of FIG. 63 (a), since the opponent character CH2 is “goo”, “goo” is also displayed in the result area WE, so a non-winning result is obtained. On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 63 (b), since the opponent character CH2 is “par”, “choki” is displayed in the result area WE, so that the victory result is obtained.

  Next, a confrontation effect setting process for starting a confrontation effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The confrontation effect setting process is executed every time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95. When “1” is set in the restriction flag, the confrontation effect setting process is terminated. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by making an affirmative determination in step S2701 and terminating the confrontation effect setting process as it is, it is possible to prevent the confrontation effect from being executed in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally.

  If “1” is not set in the restriction flag, it is determined in step S2702 whether a start condition for the first confrontation effect is satisfied. The first confrontation effect is performed as a reach effect in a situation where the variable display of symbols is stopped and the reach display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the symbol display device 61. The reach production includes a premium production in which the occurrence of the jackpot result is confirmed in a situation where a video production using the character for production A is performed instead of reducing the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The premium special reach A effect that finally becomes a jackpot result and the animation effect using the effect A character are performed instead of reducing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the premium effect is generated. There is a special reach A production for outage that will eventually result in a disengagement. These premium special reach A effects and off-target special reach A effects are effects that can occur even in situations other than the first confrontation effect. In addition, the premium special reach A production and the special special reach A production for detachment are stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the symbol display device 61 and the symbol variation in the middle symbol row Z2. This is an effect that is performed after the normal reach effect that is displayed, and the execution continuation period of the special reach A effect for premium and the special reach A effect for outage is the same. When the winning result is the first confrontation effect, the premium special reach A effect is executed, and when the non-winning result is the first confrontation effect, the extraordinary special reach A effect is executed.

  The start condition of the first confrontation effect is when the data table of the effect for game times is read in the sound side RAM 95, and the point data indicating the contents of the control target in the data table is the first confrontation effect. This is true when it corresponds to data indicating the start of. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, "1" is set to the forced effect flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2703. The compulsory effect flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the compulsory effect should be executed as a confrontation effect. Compulsory performance is an effect that occurs when the content of the effect for the game round after the confrontation effect is fixed, regardless of the selection target result that the player selects for the confrontation effect. This is an effect that is determined regardless of the selection target result selected by the player.

  After that, in step S 2704, various data for confrontation effects are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. The various data for the confrontation effect include light emission data and sound output data for the confrontation effect, and these light emission data and sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a confrontation effect pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound in a confrontation effect pattern. Furthermore, in step S 2704, a display command for a confrontation effect is transmitted to the display control device 96. Upon receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform a confrontation effect as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b).

  Thereafter, in step S2705, “1” is set in the imaging command flag corresponding to the confrontation effect in the sound light side RAM 95, and then the confrontation effect setting process is terminated. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  If the start condition for the first confrontation effect is not satisfied (step S2702: NO), it is determined in step S2706 whether the start condition for the second confrontation effect is satisfied. The second confrontation effect is performed as a notice effect in a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 61. The notice effect includes a small bubble effect in which a large number of small bubbles are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, and a large bubble effect in which a large number of large bubbles are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. Yes. These small bubble effects and large bubble effects are effects that can occur even in situations other than the second confrontation effect, and in the situations other than the second confrontation effect, the small bubble effect is more effective when the large bubble effect is executed. The appearance frequency is set so that the expectation level for reaching the reach and the expectation level for the jackpot result are higher than when it is executed. When the victory result is obtained in the second confrontation effect, the large bubble effect is executed, and when the non-win result is obtained in the second confrontation effect, the small bubble effect is executed.

  The start condition of the second confrontation effect is when the data table of the effect for game times is read in the sound side RAM 95, and the pointer data indicating the contents of the control target in the data table is the second confrontation effect. This is true when it corresponds to data indicating the start of.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, an appearance target lottery process is executed in step S2707. In the appearance target lottery process, the appearance target result displayed by the opponent character CH2 is determined by lottery. Specifically, the numerical information of the appearance target counter that is periodically updated in the sound side RAM 95 is read, and the read numerical information corresponds to any one of “GOO”, “CHOKI”, and “PAR”. It is determined whether. In this case, the probability that “Goo” is selected, the probability that “Cho” is selected, and the probability that “Par” is selected are all the same. In the subsequent step S2708, the result of the appearance target lottery process in step S2707 is stored in the appearance target storage area 95f provided in the sound light side RAM 95.

  After that, in step S2709, “1” is set to a post-pasable flag provided in the sound side RAM 95, various data for confrontation effects are read in step S2704, and the sound side RAM 95 is read in step S2705. After setting “1” to the corresponding imaging command flag in, the confrontation effect setting process is terminated. The later-movable flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the later-movable effect should be executed as a confrontation effect. The later-stageable effect is an effect that occurs when the content of the effect for the game times after the confrontation effect can change according to the selection target result selected by the player in the confrontation effect, and further on the pachinko machine 10 side. This is an effect in which a period during which the player can select the selection target result after confirming the appearance target result is secured.

  If the start condition for the second confrontation effect is not satisfied (step S2706: NO), it is determined in step S2710 whether the start condition for the third confrontation effect is satisfied. The third confrontation effect is performed as a reach effect in a situation where the variable display of symbols is stopped and the reach display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the symbol display device 61. The reach effect includes a premium effect in which the occurrence of a jackpot result is determined in a situation where a moving image effect using the effect B character is performed instead of reducing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The premium special reach B effect, which finally becomes a jackpot result, and the video effect using the effect B character is performed instead of reducing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the premium effect is generated. The special reach B effect for jackpot that finally becomes the jackpot result without any effect, and the movie effect using the character for the effect B is performed instead of reducing the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. There is a special reach B effect for detachment that results in detachment. These premium special reach B effects and special jackpot special reach B effects are effects that can occur even in situations other than the third confrontation effect. The special reach B effect for premium and the special reach B effect for jackpot are displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the symbol display device 61, and the symbol variation is changed in the middle symbol row Z2. This is an effect that is performed after the normal reach effect that is displayed, and the execution continuation period of the special reach B effect for premium and the special reach B effect for jackpot is the same. When the winning result is the third confrontation effect, the premium special reach B effect is executed, and when the non-winning result is the third confrontation effect, the jackpot special reach B effect is executed.

  The start condition of the third confrontation effect is when the data table of the effect for game times is read in the sound side RAM 95, and the point data indicating the contents of the control target in the data table is the third confrontation effect. This is true when it corresponds to data indicating the start of.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2710, the confrontation effect setting process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2710, the process proceeds to step S2711. In step S2711, a lottery process for determining whether or not to make a later move is executed.

  In the lottery process for determining whether or not to make a later move, it is determined whether or not to perform an effect that can be made later or an effect that cannot be made later as the current confrontation effect. The non-posted effect is an effect that occurs when the content of the effect for the game times after the confrontation effect can change according to the selection target result selected by the player in the confrontation effect. Further, the pachinko machine 10 side This is an effect in which the period during which the player can select the selection target result after confirming the appearance target result is not secured. In the lottery process for determining whether or not to allow later movement, the numerical information of the counter for determining whether or not later movement is periodically updated in the sound side RAM 95 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information corresponds to an effect that can be later moved. To do. In this case, an effect that can be later played is selected with a probability of 1/3, and an effect that is not available for later is selected with a probability of 2/3.

  In step S2712, it is determined whether or not an effect that can be made later is selected in the lottery process for whether or not to make a later move in step S2711. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2712, the process advances to step S2707 to execute a process for causing a later-stage effect to be executed as a confrontation effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2712, the lottery process for the appearance target is executed in step S2713, and the lottery result is stored in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2714. The processing content of these step S2713 and step S2714 is the same as that of step S2707 and step S2708.

  Thereafter, in step S2715, “1” is set to the post-payout prohibition flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95, various data for confrontation effects are read in step S2704, and the sound light side RAM 95 is read in step S2705. After setting “1” to the corresponding imaging command flag in, the confrontation effect setting process is terminated. The behind-the-scenes impossible flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the behind-the-scenes impossible effect should be executed as a confrontation effect.

  In addition, even if any of a compulsory effect, an effect that can be made later, and an effect that cannot be made later, the contents of the effect in the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, and the symbol display device 61 during the execution period of the confrontation effect are as follows. It becomes common contents. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the content of the effect of the confrontation effect, it is impossible to identify which of the forced effect, the effect that can be made later, and the effect that cannot be made later.

<Forced production>
Next, forcible effect control processing for executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in the forced effect of the confrontation effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The forced effect control process is executed each time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in the forced effect flag of the sound side RAM 95 (step S2801: YES), the control is performed in the game data effect data table read to the sound side RAM 95 in step S2802. It is determined whether or not the pointer data indicating the content of the object corresponds to data indicating that it is in the first confirmation period.

  In the compulsory effect, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 66, when the compulsory effect is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the confrontation effect is started on the symbol display device 61. An explanation period is started in which it is explained that a victory-response effect is generated when the player wins the confrontation effect. When the explanation period ends at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), the pre-game period in which “Janken” is displayed is performed from the timing t2 to the timing t4. The game determination period during which the display is performed is performed from the timing t4 to the timing t5. When this match determination period ends, both the appearance target result on the pachinko machine 10 side and the selection target result on the player side are displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the confrontation effect ends at the timing of t6. Of these, the first confirmation period is set from the timing t3 which is a timing in the middle of the pre-game period to the timing t5 which is the end timing of the game determination period. The length of the first confirmation period is arbitrary, but is set to 2 sec in the pachinko machine 10.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not "1" is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. When the imaging completion flag is not set to “1”, the forced effect control process is terminated as it is. When the imaging completion flag is set to “1”, one frame for use in the forced effect is used. This means that the image has been captured. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to “0” in step S2804.

  In the subsequent step S2805, hand data extraction processing is executed in the same manner as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39). When the confrontation effect is executed, the range corresponding to the entire display surface of the symbol display device 61 is effective for the image for one frame based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95. In step S2805, the image portion of the hand that is entirely included in the effective operation range is extracted. The contents of the hand data extraction process are the same in the case of step S2905 and step S3005 described later. Thereafter, in step S2806, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of hand data has been completed, a selection target matching process is executed in step S2807.

  In the matching process of the selection target, it is verified whether the hand data extracted in step S2805 corresponds to “goo”, “choki”, or “par” that is the selection target of the player. In this case, if the extracted hand data matches 90% or more as the shape of the “Goo” hand, the selection target is specified as “Goo”, and the extracted hand data is “Cho”. If the shape of the hand matches 90% or more, the selection target is identified as “choki”, and if the extracted hand data matches 90% or more as the shape of the “par” hand, select The target is identified as “Par”. Thereafter, in step S2808, it is determined whether extraction of the selection target is completed. If extraction of the selection target has not been completed, the forced effect control process is terminated as it is. If extraction of the selection target has been completed, in step S2809, the selection target storage area 95g provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is overwritten with the selection target data extracted this time, and then the forced effect control process is terminated. To do. It should be noted that the selection target storage area 95g is initialized when the confrontation effect ends, and is in a state where no selection target data is stored.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first confirmation period, a negative determination is made in step S2802, and the flow proceeds to step S2810. In step S2810, the pointer data indicating the contents of the control target in the game data effect data table read to the sound side RAM 95 corresponds to the data indicating that the first confirmation period of the forced effect has passed. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2810, the forced effect control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2810, the process proceeds to step S2811.

  In step S2811, it is determined whether or not selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g of the sound side RAM 95. If selection target data is stored, a selection target data setting process is executed in step S2812. In the selection target data setting process, the selection target data stored in the selection target storage area 95g is read, and a display command corresponding to the read selection target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the selection target result corresponding to the selection target data currently stored in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61 is displayed.

  That is, in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61, the image of the extracted hand data is not displayed as it is, but the image data of the selection target result stored in advance in the character ROM of the display control device 96 is stored. The image corresponding to the read image data is read and displayed as a selection target result image. The image data includes image data for displaying the “Goo” image, image data for displaying the “Cho” image, and image data for displaying the “Par” image. ing. The image of the hand data extracted in this way is not displayed as it is, but an image based on image data set in advance corresponding to each of the selection target results is displayed. Regardless of the accuracy of the image of one frame imaged at, it is possible to clearly show the player's selection target result specified in the pachinko machine 10.

  Thereafter, in step S2813, it is determined whether or not an effect corresponding to the victory result is executed in the current game round. As already explained, the compulsory performance is executed as the first confrontation effect. When the first confrontation effect is a win result, the premium special reach A effect is executed, and when the non-win result is obtained. Special reach A production for detachment is executed. Which one of the premium special reach A production and the out-of-bound special reach A production is executed is determined in the main command response processing (FIG. 15) when the game turn production is started. It is determined based on the display duration of the game times. Therefore, it has already been determined which of the winning result and the non-winning result will occur when the forced performance is started. In step S <b> 2813, it is determined whether or not the premium special reach A effect is executed in the current game time by referring to the game time effect data table read to the sound side RAM 95. Then, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the victory result.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2813, a process for setting appearance target data corresponding to victory is executed in step S2814. Specifically, the current selection target data is read from the selection target storage area 95g, and the appearance target data whose selection target data is the victory result is selected. Then, a display command corresponding to the appearance target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the appearance target result corresponding to the current appearance target data is displayed on the opponent character CH2 of the symbol display device 61. Note that the display of the selection target result in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61 and the display of the appearance target result in the opponent character CH2 are performed simultaneously.

  In step S2814, after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed over a predetermined period, the light emission for performing the effect indicating that the player has won in the confrontation effect is performed. Data and sound output data are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a winning pattern. A sound corresponding to the winning use pattern is output from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the display control device 96 receives a display command corresponding to the appearance target data, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the player has won after the result display is performed. In addition, after these winning use effects are ended, a premium special reach A effect is started. Data indicating that the premium special reach A effect should be executed is set in the data table of the effect for game times at the start of the game time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2813, an appearance target data setting process corresponding to non-win is executed in step S2815. Specifically, the current selection target data is read from the selection target storage area 95g, and the appearance target data whose selection target data is a non-winning result is selected. In this case, whether to select a result for which the selection target data is defeated or a result to be a draw is determined by lottery. Then, a display command corresponding to the appearance target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the appearance target result corresponding to the current appearance target data is displayed on the opponent character CH2 of the symbol display device 61. Note that the display of the selection target result in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61 and the display of the appearance target result in the opponent character CH2 are performed simultaneously.

  Further, in step S2815, after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result are performed for a predetermined period, an effect indicating that the player has not won in the confrontation effect is performed. The light emission data and sound output data are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. By referring to these data in the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound output control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a non-winning pattern. At the same time, sound corresponding to the non-winning pattern is output from the speaker unit 24. Further, when the display control device 96 receives a display command corresponding to the appearance target data, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 such that a display effect indicating that the result display is not won is executed. To do. In addition, after these non-winning effects are ended, the special reach A effect for detachment is started. Data indicating that the special reach A effect for losing should be executed is set in the data table of the effect for game times at the start of the game time.

  When the process of step S2814 is executed, or when the process of step S2815 is executed, after both the imaging command flag and the compulsory effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S2816, The forced production control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if no selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g and a negative determination is made in step S2811, a confrontation avoidance setting process is executed in step S2817. In the setting process, a display command corresponding to the confrontation avoidance is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to display that the confrontation is not finally performed. Thereafter, in step S2816, both of the corresponding imaging command flag and forced effect flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”, and then the forced effect control process is terminated.

  Next, the manner in which the forced effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 67 (a) shows the execution period of forced production, FIG. 67 (b) shows the first confirmation period, FIG. 67 (c) shows the timing when the storage process of the selection target is executed, and FIG. ) Shows the timing at which the appearance target result is selected, and FIG. 67 (e) shows the execution period of the result display.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the forced effect starts at the timing of t1, and the first confirmation period starts as shown in FIG. 67 (b) at the timing of t2. The first confirmation period continues until the timing t7. During this period, as shown in FIG. 67C, the storage process of the selection target is performed at each of the timing t3, the timing t4, the timing t5, and the timing t6. Executed. That is, in the first confirmation period, every time hand data from which the selection target result can be extracted is imaged on the imaging substrate 71, the selection target data corresponding to the hand data at that time is overwritten in the selection target storage area 95g. . As a result, even if the selection target data cannot be extracted from the player's hand during the game determination period, the selection target result can be displayed using the selection target data stored up to that point. Become.

  Thereafter, when the first confirmation period ends as shown in FIG. 67B at the timing of t7, the appearance target data corresponding to the final selection target data is selected as shown in FIG. 67D. The Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), the result is displayed from the timing t8 to the timing t9, and the compulsory effect is ended at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 67 (a).

<Direction available later>
Next, a post-possible control process for executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 in an effect that can be made later in the confrontation effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the later control processing is executed every time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in the sound-light-side RAM 95 in the post-payable flag (step S2901: YES), in the game data effect data table read to the sound-light-side RAM 95 in step S2902. It is determined whether or not the pointer data indicating the content of the control target corresponds to data indicating that it is in the second confirmation period.

  As shown in the time chart of FIG. 69, in the later-stage display effect, when the post-stage display effect is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the confrontation effect starts on the symbol display device 61. And an explanation period is explained in which it is explained that a win-winning effect is generated when the player wins in the confrontation effect. When the explanation period ends at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the pre-game period in which “Janken” is displayed is performed from the timing t2 to the timing t4. The game determination period in which “” is displayed is performed from the timing t4 to the timing t5. When this match determination period ends, the appearance target result on the pachinko machine 10 side is displayed on the symbol display device 61, and after the match determination period ends and before the confrontation effect ends at the timing of t7. The selection target result on the player side is displayed on the symbol display device 61 at the timing of t6. Among these, the second confirmation period is set from the timing of t3, which is the timing in the middle of the pre-game period, to the timing of t6, which is after the match determination period and before the end of the confrontation effect. ing. The length of the second confirmation period is arbitrary, but is set to 3 sec in the pachinko machine 10.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of an image for one frame to be used in a later-stage available effect has been completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to “0” in step S2904.

  In the subsequent step S2905, hand data extraction processing is executed in the same manner as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S2906, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of the hand data has been completed, the selection target matching process is executed in step S2907 as in step S2807 of the forced effect control process (FIG. 65).

  Thereafter, in step S2908, it is determined whether extraction of the selection target is completed. If the extraction of the selection target is completed, the selection target data extracted this time is overwritten in the selection target storage area 95g of the sound side RAM 95 in step S2909.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2903, a negative determination is made in step S2906, or a negative determination is made in step S2908, the game times read to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2910 It is determined whether or not the pointer data indicating the content of the control target corresponds to the data indicating the display timing of the appearance target result in the data table for the production. If a negative determination is made in step S2910, the final post-possible control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, an appearance target data setting process is executed in step S2911 and the post-post control is executed. The possible control process is terminated.

  In the application target data setting process, the appearance target data stored in the appearance target storage area 95f of the sound side RAM 95 is read in step S2708 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64), and a display command corresponding to the appearance target data is read. The data is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the appearance target result corresponding to the current appearance target data is displayed on the opponent character CH2 of the symbol display device 61. At this timing, since the selection of the player's selection target result is not confirmed, the appearance target result in the result area W of the symbol display device 61 is not displayed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, whether or not the pointer data indicating the contents of the control target corresponds to data indicating that the second confirmation period has elapsed in the data table of the game times effect read to the sound side RAM 95. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S2912, the post-delay control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2912, the process proceeds to step S2913.

  In step S2913, it is determined whether or not selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g of the sound side RAM 95. If selection target data is stored, selection target data setting processing is executed in step S2914. In the selection target data setting process, the selection target data stored in the selection target storage area 95g is read, and a display command corresponding to the read selection target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the selection target result corresponding to the selection target data currently stored in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61 is displayed. At this timing, the appearance target result corresponding to the current appearance target data in the opponent character CH2 of the symbol display device 61 is continuously displayed.

  After that, in step S2915, the selection target result selected by the player this time appears corresponding to the data stored in the appearance target storage area 95f of the sound side RAM 95 in step S2708 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64). A determination is made as to whether the winning result or the non-winning result is the target result. In step S2916, it is determined whether or not the comparison determination result is a victory result.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2916, various data on the winning side are read in step S2917. In these various data, light emission data and sound output data are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 so that an effect indicating that the player has won in the confrontation effect is performed. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result over a predetermined period, and the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a winning use pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the winning use pattern. In step S2917, a display command corresponding to the victory of the player is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the player has won after the result display is performed.

  In step S2917, a setting is made to enable execution of the effect after execution of the winning use effect. Specifically, if the presently available effect is the second confrontation effect, the current light level RAM 95 is read for the setting for executing the large bubble effect after the winning use effect. This is performed on the data table of the game play effects that have been issued. In addition, when the presently available effect is the third confrontation effect, a setting for executing the premium special reach B effect after the above winning use effect is set in the sound light side RAM 95. This is performed on the data table of the game times effect being read. Thereby, if it is a 2nd confrontation production, various data setting will be performed so that a large bubble production may be started at the timing set as a bubble production start timing at the time of the start of this game round, and a 3rd confrontation will be carried out. If it is an effect, various data are set so that the premium special reach B effect is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2916, various data on the non-winning side are read in step S2918. In these various data, light emission data and sound output data are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 so that an effect indicating that the player has not won in the confrontation effect is performed. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result over a predetermined period, and the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a non-winning use pattern and a sound corresponding to the non-winning use pattern is output from the speaker unit 24. In step S2918, a display command corresponding to the fact that the player has not won is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the result has been displayed and that the player has not won is executed.

  In step S2918, a setting is made to enable execution of the effect after execution of the non-winning effect. Specifically, in the case where the presently available effect is the second confrontation effect, a setting is made in the sound light side RAM 95 so that the small bubble effect is executed after the non-winning effect. This is performed on the data table of the game times effect being read. Also, if the presently available effect is the third confrontation effect, the sound side RAM 95 is set to execute the jackpot special reach B effect after the non-winning effect. This is performed with respect to the data table of the effects for game times that are currently read out. Thereby, if it is a 2nd confrontation production, various data setting will be performed so that a small bubble production may be started at the timing set as a bubble production start timing at the start of this game round, and the 3rd confrontation If it is an effect, various data settings are performed so that the special reach B effect for jackpot is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game round.

  When the process of step S2917 is executed, or when the process of step S2918 is executed, after both the corresponding image pickup command flag and the later movement enable flag in the sound side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S2919. Then, this later-out enabling control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the selection target data is not stored in the selection target storage area 95g and a negative determination is made in step S2913, a confrontation avoidance setting process is executed in step S2920. In the setting process, a display command corresponding to the confrontation avoidance is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to display that the confrontation is not finally performed. And after the said display is performed until the end timing of the confrontation effect, the setting for enabling the execution of the effect after the execution of the non-winning effect is performed. Specifically, when the presently available effect is the second confrontation effect, the current state is read in the sound light side RAM 95 so that the small bubble effect is executed after the confrontation avoidance effect. It is performed on the data table of the effect for the game times being done. In addition, when the presently available effect is the third confrontation effect, a setting for causing the jackpot special reach B effect to be executed after the confrontation avoidance effect is read in the sound side RAM 95 as the current state. This is performed on the data table of the game play effects that have been issued. Thereby, if it is a 2nd confrontation production, various data setting will be performed so that a small bubble production may be started at the timing set as a bubble production start timing at the start of this game round, and the 3rd confrontation If it is an effect, various data settings are performed so that the special reach B effect for jackpot is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game round. Thereafter, in step S2919, both of the corresponding imaging command flag and post-delay enable flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”, and then the post-post enable control process is terminated.

  Next, a description will be given of a state in which a later-stage effect is executed with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 70 (a) shows the execution period of the later-playable effects, FIG. 70 (b) shows the second confirmation period, FIG. 70 (c) shows the display period of the appearance target result, and FIG. The display period of the selection target result is shown, FIG. 70 (e-1) shows the execution period of the effect after the confrontation effect when the winning result occurs, and FIG. 70 (e-2) shows the case where the non-winning result occurs The execution period of the production after the confrontation production is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a) at the timing of t1, an effect that can be moved out later is started, and at the timing of t2, the second confirmation period is started as shown in FIG. 70 (b). Then, display of the appearance target result is started as shown in FIG. 70 (c) at the timing of t3, which is the middle of the second confirmation period. That is, since the appearance target result is displayed on the symbol display device 61 before the second confirmation period elapses, the player can select and present the selection target result after confirming the appearance target result. . That is, the selection target result can be displayed later with respect to the display of the appearance target result.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the display of the selection target result is started at the timing t4, which is the timing when the second confirmation period ends, as shown in FIG. 70 (b). Then, at the timing of t5, the display of the appearance target result is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (c), and the display of the selection target result is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (d).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the effect that can be made later is ended as shown in FIG. 70 (a), whereby the effect on the winning side is started as shown in FIG. 70 (e-1), or FIG. As shown in (e-2), the effect on the non-winning side is started. Then, the winning side effect or the non-winning side effect ends at the timing of t7. In this case, T1 which is a period during which the victory side effect is executed and T2 which is a period during which the non-winning effect is executed are the same period. This makes it possible to prevent the display continuation period for the game times from fluctuating, regardless of which of the winning side effect and the non-winning side effect is executed. Note that when the confrontation avoidance setting is performed, the non-winning effect is started at the timing t6 and the non-winning effect is ended at the timing t7, as in the case of the non-winning result. The display duration for game times does not vary.

<Direction not available later>
Next, a post-unavailable control process for executing control for using the imaging result of the imaging board 71 in the non-post-playable effect among the confrontation effects will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the post-unloading control process is executed every time the operation effect control process (step S512) is executed once in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  When “1” is set in the post-unloading flag of the sound light side RAM 95 (step S3001: YES), in the game data effect data table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S3002. It is determined whether or not the pointer data indicating the content of the control target corresponds to data indicating that it is during the first confirmation period. The first confirmation period is the same as that in the forced effect control process (FIG. 65).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the sound side RAM 95. If “1” is not set in the imaging completion flag, the post-pause prohibition control process is terminated. When “1” is set in the imaging completion flag, it means that imaging of an image for one frame for use in an effect that cannot be performed later is completed. In this case, the imaging completion flag is cleared to “0” in step S3004.

  In the subsequent step S3005, hand data extraction processing is executed in the same manner as in step S1704 of the first notification effect control processing (FIG. 39). Thereafter, in step S3006, it is determined whether extraction of hand data is completed. If the extraction of the hand data has not been completed, the post-delay control process is terminated. If the extraction of the hand data has been completed, the selection target matching process is executed in step S3007, as in step S2807 of the forced effect control process (FIG. 65).

  Thereafter, in step S3008, it is determined whether extraction of the selection target is completed. If extraction of the selection target has not been completed, the post-unloading control process is terminated as it is. If the selection target extraction has been completed, the selection target storage area 95g of the sound side RAM 95 is overwritten with the selection target data extracted this time, and then the post-succession prohibition control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3010. In step S3010, whether or not the pointer data indicating the content of the control target in the data table of the effect for game times read to the sound side RAM 95 corresponds to data indicating that the first confirmation period has elapsed. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S3010, the post-payment disabling control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3010, the process proceeds to step S3011.

  In step S3011, it is determined whether selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g of the sound side RAM 95. If selection target data is stored, the appearance target data and selection target data setting processing is executed in step S3012. In the setting process, the appearance target data stored in the appearance target storage area 95f of the sound side RAM 95 in step S2714 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64), and the selection target storage area 95g of the sound side RAM 95 in step S3009. And the display command corresponding to the read appearance target data and selection target data is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the appearance target result corresponding to the current appearance target data is displayed on the opponent character CH2 of the symbol display device 61 and the symbol display device 61. The selection target result corresponding to the selection target data currently stored in the result area WE is displayed.

  Thereafter, in step S3013, the selection target result selected by the player this time appears corresponding to the data stored in the appearance target storage area 95f of the sound side RAM 95 in step S2714 of the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64). A determination is made as to whether the winning result or the non-winning result is the target result. In step S3014, it is determined whether the comparison determination result is a victory result.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3014, various data on the winning side are read in step S3015. In these various data, light emission data and sound output data are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 so that an effect indicating that the player has won in the confrontation effect is performed. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result over a predetermined period, and the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a winning use pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the winning use pattern. In step S3015, a display command corresponding to the victory of the player is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the player has won after the result display is performed.

  In step S3015, a setting is made to enable the execution of the effect after the execution of the winning effect. Specifically, the setting for executing the premium special reach B effect after the winning use effect is a game data effect data table currently read in the sound side RAM 95. To do. Thereby, various data settings are performed so that the premium special reach B production is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B production at the start of the current game round.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3014, various data on the non-winning side are read in step S3016. In these various data, light emission data and sound output data are read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 so that an effect indicating that the player has not won in the confrontation effect is performed. These data are referred to after the display of the selection target result and the display of the appearance target result over a predetermined period, and the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in a non-winning use pattern and a sound corresponding to the non-winning use pattern is output from the speaker unit 24. In step S3016, a display command corresponding to the fact that the player has not won is transmitted to the display control device 96. When the display control device 96 receives the display command, the display control device 96 controls the display of the symbol display device 61 so that a display effect indicating that the result has been displayed and that the player has not won is executed.

  In step S3016, a setting is made to enable execution of the effect after execution of the non-winning effect. Specifically, the setting for executing the jackpot special reach B effect after the above non-winning effect is set to the data for the game times effect currently being read in the sound side RAM 95. To the table. Thereby, various data settings are performed so that the special reach B effect for jackpot is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game round.

  When the process of step S3015 is executed, or when the process of step S3016 is executed, after both the corresponding image pickup command flag and the later movement enable flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0” in step S3017. Then, the post-payout prohibition control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if no selection target data is stored in the selection target storage area 95g and a negative determination is made in step S3011, a confrontation avoidance setting process is executed in step S3018. In the setting process, a display command corresponding to the confrontation avoidance is transmitted to the display control device 96. By receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to display that the confrontation is not finally performed. And after the said display is performed until the end timing of the confrontation effect, the setting for enabling the execution of the effect after the execution of the non-winning effect is performed. Specifically, the setting for executing the jackpot special reach B effect after the effect of avoiding the confrontation is set in the data table of the effect for game times currently read in the sound side RAM 95. Against. Thereby, various data settings are performed so that the special reach B effect for jackpot is started at the timing set as the start timing of the special reach B effect at the start of the current game round. Thereafter, in step S3017, both of the corresponding imaging command flag and the later allowance flag in the sound light side RAM 95 are cleared to “0”, and then the present later disabling control process is terminated.

  Next, a state in which an effect that cannot be made later is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 72 (a) shows the execution period of the effect that cannot be made later, FIG. 72 (b) shows the first confirmation period, FIG. 72 (c) shows the display period of the appearance target result, and FIG. 72 shows the display period of the selection target result, FIG. 72 (e-1) shows the execution period of the effect after the confrontation effect when the victory result occurs, and FIG. 72 (e-2) shows the case where the non-win result occurs The execution period of the production after the confrontation production is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (a) at the timing of t1, a post-unavailable effect is started, and at the timing of t2, the first confirmation period is started as shown in FIG. 72 (b). Then, at the timing t3 when the first confirmation period ends, the display of the appearance target result is started as shown in FIG. 72 (c), and the selection target result is shown in FIG. 72 (d). Is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the display of the appearance target result is ended as shown in FIG. 72 (c), and the display of the selection target result is ended as shown in FIG. 72 (d). Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the post-unavailable effect is ended as shown in FIG. 72 (a), whereby the victory side effect is started as shown in FIG. 72 (e-1), or FIG. As shown in (e-2), the effect on the non-winning side is started. Then, the winning side effect or the non-winning side effect ends at the timing of t6. In this case, T1 which is a period during which the victory side effect is executed and T2 which is a period during which the non-winning effect is executed are the same period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effects for game times from fluctuating, regardless of which of the effect on the winning side and the effect on the non-winning side is executed. When the confrontation avoidance setting is performed, the non-winning effect is started at the timing t56 and the non-winning effect is ended at the timing t6 as in the case of the non-winning result. The display duration for game times does not vary.

  As described above, when the confrontation effect is executed, the contents of the effect performed thereafter differ according to the confrontation result performed with the confrontation partner character CH2 displayed on the symbol display device 61. Become. As a result, it is expected that the player will recognize that the content of the subsequent production has changed according to the result that he has selected as the confrontation effect, and it is possible to give an impression that he is actively participating in the game, The interest of the game will be improved.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the processing for various effects and the processing for various monitoring are executed using the distance data derived based on the imaging result in the imaging device 73, the player's actions and players recognized in a non-contact manner Can be used for various effects and monitoring.

  In the signal processing circuit 75, when the intensity of the imaging signal received by the imaging device 73 is less than the reference intensity, the distance data calculation process is not executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the distance data resulting from noise or the like from being used in the sound light side MPU 93.

  When the distance data derived from the imaging substrate 71 corresponds to the distance closer to the imaging substrate 71 than the surface of the window panel 22, the sound light side MPU 93 does not execute the monitoring process for cancellation. The distance data is treated as distance data to be canceled, and a blank area is set for the distance image storage area 95a. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an object closer to the imaging substrate 71 than the surface of the window panel 22 from being recognized as a production operation.

  Further, not all of the image G for one frame including the distance data to be canceled is invalidated, but only the portion corresponding to the distance data to be canceled in the image G for one frame is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an image G for one frame for use in various processes at an early stage.

  On the other hand, when executing the cancellation monitoring process, even if the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 corresponds to the distance closer to the imaging substrate 71 than the surface of the window panel 22, The blank area is not set without treating the distance data as the distance data to be canceled. As a result, in the cancellation monitoring process, it is possible to monitor whether or not a ball jam has occurred in the game area PA and whether or not a fraudulent jig is inserted in the game area PA. Become.

  Further, as described above, the signal processing circuit 75 prevents the distance data due to noise and the like from being derived, and the sound light side MPU 93 has a blank area for the distance data on the imaging substrate 71 side rather than the surface of the window panel 22. This setting makes it possible to perform the cancellation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93 as compared with the configuration in which the signal processing circuit 75 excludes all cancellation targets. The processing load of the sound light side MPU 93 can be reduced as compared with the configuration performed in the light side MPU 93.

  Since the configuration is such that distance data is derived instead of capturing a monochrome image or a color image, whether or not the data is to be canceled is determined in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference such as the window panel 22. Is possible.

  When distance data corresponding to the imaging substrate 71 side from the window panel 22 is continuously present, the distance data derived from the imaging substrate 71 is restricted from being used for production. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the distance data from being used for production or the like even though some abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the distance data.

  In addition, even when distance data corresponding to the imaging substrate 71 side is continuously present from a position slightly ahead of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface 22a of the window panel 22, the imaging substrate 71 It is regulated so that the derived distance data is not used for production. This makes it possible to prevent distance data corresponding to these fingerprints or foreign objects from being used for production or the like when fingerprints or foreign objects are attached to the window panel 22.

  When the distance data corresponding to the imaging substrate 71 side is continuously present rather than the position slightly ahead of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface 22a of the window panel 22, abnormality notification is executed. As a result, it is confirmed whether a fingerprint or a foreign object is attached to the surface 22a of the window panel 22, whether or not a fraudulent jig is inserted in the game area PA, and in the game area PA. It is possible to urge the game hall manager or the like to check whether or not a ball clogging has occurred.

  A period in which the distance data corresponding to the imaging board 71 side from the window panel 22 exists is longer than the longest period assumed as a period required for the game ball to pass through the monitoring range by the imaging board 71. In the case of continuing for a long time, the above-described use restriction of the distance data and abnormality notification are executed. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the game area PA passes through the monitoring range, it is possible to prevent the use restriction of the distance data and the abnormality notification as described above from being executed.

  A reference switch 91a is electrically connected to the sound light side MPU 93, and the manner in which the distance data is derived based on the light reception result in the imaging device 73 and the manner in which the derived distance data is used according to the state of the reference switch 91a. Be changed. Thereby, distance data can be appropriately used according to the environment of the monitoring range of the imaging device 73.

  The signal intensity that serves as a reference for determining whether or not the imaging signal received by the imaging device 73 is a target for derivation of distance data depending on whether the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position or the OFF position. Is changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to adjust the accuracy of the distance data according to the environment of the monitoring range of the imaging device 73. For example, when the radio wave anti-reflection sheet PS is not attached to the window panel 22, the accuracy of the distance data In the case where the anti-magnetic wave anti-static sheet PS is attached, it is possible to derive the distance data of the monitoring target existing in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the window panel 22 even in the situation. Yes.

  Further, when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, distance data based on light reception from an object present on the imaging substrate 71 side with respect to the window panel 22 is transmitted from the signal processing circuit 75 to the sound light side MPU 93. Not sent to. Thereby, for example, when the radio wave anti-going sheet PS is attached to the back surface of the window panel 22, the distance data of the radio wave anti-going sheet PS itself is not used in the sound light side MPU 93. It becomes possible.

  The change of the derivation mode of the distance data as described above is performed by operating the reference switch 91a. As a result, it is possible to determine on the game hall side which way to derive the distance data.

  When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the setting mode of the operation effective range EA is the limiting mode. Specifically, the divided display is not performed while the divided display is performed, and the selection display is performed. The stop operation effect is performed without the multi-column display and the single-column display is performed. Thereby, there is a limit on the derivation of the distance data, and even if the accuracy of the distance data is reduced, it is possible to perform an effect using the distance data of the imaging substrate 71 while matching the decrease in the accuracy. By reducing the number of operation effective ranges EA, it is possible to reduce the possibility of erroneous recognition of the player's performance operation.

  The sound light side MPU 93 grasps the height position of the face of the player seated on the chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 by executing the height position monitoring process, the first notification effect control process, the first In the two notification effect control process, the split effect control process, the stop operation effect control process, and the continuous effect control process, an operation effective range is set at a position corresponding to the height position. Thereby, the player's hand recognized in front of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 22 by the difference in the angle of the hand to be directed to perform the production operation due to the difference in the height position of the face depending on the player. Even in a configuration in which the height positions are different, it is possible to appropriately recognize each performance operation.

  In the height position monitoring process, the height position is grasped using the distance data derived from the imaging substrate 71. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the height position using the configuration for grasping the presence / absence of the production operation as it is. In addition, the height position can be grasped under the condition that the presence / absence of the production operation is performed, and the effect of adjusting the position of the operation effective range using the height position is enhanced.

  A player who can exist at an arbitrary position because it is configured to adjust the position of the operation effective range instead of the hand performing the production operation based on the information on the height position of the face grasped by the height position monitoring process. There is no need to make adjustments according to the hand data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when performing the adjustment.

  In the configuration in which the display for selection indicating the position where the rendering operation is to be performed is performed in the symbol display device 61, based on the information on the height position of the face grasped by the height position monitoring process, the effective range of the operation is not displayed but the selection display. Since the configuration adjusts the position, the processing load can be reduced compared to the configuration that adjusts both positions, and the adjustment can be performed compared to the configuration that adjusts only the display position for selection limited to the range of the display surface. The degree of freedom is increased.

  The sound light side MPU 93 is configured to specify that the presentation operation is performed when it is specified that the player's hand is in the operation effective range based on the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of the rendering operation depending on how to set the operation effective range and how to set the operation mode to be recognized as the rendering operation. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the production.

  In the division effect and the stop operation effect, an image indicating the position where the effect operation is to be performed is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Thereby, the position where the production operation is to be performed becomes clear for the player.

  The sound light side MPU 93 is configured to set a plurality of operation effective ranges at a time. As a result, it is possible to perform a production operation such as 2 or 3 selection depending on the position where the player puts out his hand, and it is possible to improve the operability of the production operation. In addition, since a plurality of operation effective ranges are set in relation to the distance data, it is possible to set a plurality of operation effective ranges by one configuration for deriving the distance data. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration in that it is not necessary to increase the configuration for detecting operation according to the number.

  When a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at a time in the stop operation effect, these operation effective ranges are set in the horizontal direction. As a result, even if the height position of the viewpoint differs depending on the player, the effect of the height position on the positional relationship between the height position of the hand of the player who is performing the rendering operation and the operation effective range It is possible to reduce the possibility of erroneous recognition of the player's performance operation. Such a configuration is effective not only for the symbol display device 61 having a horizontally long display surface but also for a symbol display device having a square display surface and a symbol display device having a vertically long display surface. .

  When a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at a time, a non-effective range is set between these operation effective ranges. This makes it difficult for the player's hand to enter a plurality of effective operation ranges at the same time, so there is a possibility that an event that has occurred in response to the effect operation does not correspond to the effect operation intended by the player. Reduced.

  The number of operation effective ranges differs depending on the type of performance. As a result, a variety of modes of operation effects can be achieved, and the effective operation range can be set in a mode corresponding to each effect, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design of the effects.

  The sound light side MPU 93 determines that the operation for each operation effective range is valid when a plurality of operation effective ranges are set and the player's hand is simultaneously included in the plurality of operation effective ranges. Rather, it is determined that the operation on the higher priority side determined in advance is valid. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of effects from being executed simultaneously while giving priority to a predetermined effect operation.

  When the sound notification side MPU 93 specifies that the first notification effect operation and the split effect operation have occurred at the same time in the case where the first notification effect and the split effect are generated at the same time, It is determined that the operation is valid, and the division effect operation is determined to be invalid. Thereby, it is possible to increase the chances that an effect at the time of occurrence of notification for notifying the determination of the jackpot result is generated while preventing the effects corresponding to the respective effect operations from occurring simultaneously.

  In particular, the movable object unit 38 that is the target of the first notification effect operation is disposed immediately above the symbol display device 61 that is the target of the split effect operation during the split effect, and therefore the first notification effect operation is performed. There is a possibility that a player's hand accidentally enters the effective operation range of the division effect operation. On the other hand, since the first notification effect operation is given priority, it is possible to increase the chance that an effect at the time of occurrence of the notification that informs the confirmation of the jackpot result is generated, and it is intended that the split effect operation is performed. The possibility of being recognized is reduced.

  When the sound light side MPU 93 performs multi-row display in the stop operation effect, the priority is set for the operation effective range corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 on a one-to-one basis. Thereby, even if a player's hand is simultaneously included in a plurality of operation effective ranges, it is possible to stop the variable display of the pattern according to a predetermined priority. And since this priority is set, it becomes possible to stop the change display of a pattern for every one change display area CA1-CA3 sequentially with respect to one production operation.

  Further, in a configuration in which three variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are set, when the variable display of the pattern in one variable display area CA1 to CA3 is stopped, the priority is changed accordingly. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately deal with an event in which a player's hand is simultaneously included in a plurality of operation effective ranges, regardless of the order in which the pattern variation display is stopped.

  The sound light side MPU 93 adjusts the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane of the player's hand extracted based on the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 based on the distance data. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the vertical position or the horizontal position in the virtual two-dimensional plane can be changed according to the distance from the imaging device 73, the position of the player's hand in the virtual two-dimensional plane is determined from the imaging device 73. It can be recognized as a position based on the distance.

  In addition, since the position of the player's hand is adjusted instead of the position of the effective operation range in the virtual two-dimensional plane, the position of the effective operation range is fixed even when multiple player's hands are recognized. However, the positions of these hands can be individually adjusted, and the positional relationship with respect to the effective operation range of each player's hand can be properly grasped.

  When adjusting the position of the player's hand based on the distance data, it is a configuration that adjusts the entire hand data, so it is possible to properly grasp the positional relationship of the operation effective range with respect to the entire hand data Become.

  In the situation where the first announcement effect, the second announcement effect, the division effect, and the stop operation effect are performed, the sound light side MPU 93 has an operation effective range when the position of the player's hand is more than the reference target distance. Is not specified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the operation performed regardless of the production operation as the production operation.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the continuous effect and the confrontation effect are performed, the sound light side MPU 93 recognizes the hand operation corresponding to each effect as the effect operation regardless of whether or not it is the reference target distance or more. In the continuous performance, the player performs an action of paying a hand sideways, and in the confrontation performance, the player performs an operation for janken. Since these operations are likely to be performed for production, recognizing the occurrence of these operations as the occurrence of the production operation regardless of the distance, the player's production operation is invalid against the intention. The possibility that it will be reduced is reduced.

  When the previous notice effect is being executed, the fish character CH1 appears up to the position corresponding to the hand that the player has made for the previous notice effect. As a result, it is possible to perform the advance notice effect in a manner according to the player's operation and to diversify the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect continues over a plurality of game times. Even if it occurs, it is possible to avoid getting bored with the prior notice effect.

  Even if the fish character CH1 appears up to the position according to the player's operation in the prior notice effect, it limits the limit line BL set in the middle of the movement direction of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61. As done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fish character CH1 from flowing to the end on the movement destination side in the situation where the advance notice effect is being executed, and the fish character CH1 is placed at a position corresponding to the operation as described above. While making it possible to appear, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the completion effect has been executed even though the completion effect has not actually been performed.

  When the completion effect is executed as the final effect, the completion effect is executed on condition that the player has performed the sink operation. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player think that the production | presentation which flows fish character CH1 to the edge part of a movement destination side generate | occur | produced by the player's own operation, and can heighten a sense of superiority when a complete production is performed. It becomes possible.

  In a configuration in which the player cannot recognize which game times are the execution targets of the final effect when the continuous effect is being executed, either the previous notice effect or the final effect is being executed. Also, the symbol display device 61 informs that the sink operation should be performed. Thereby, in the situation where the continuous production is being executed, it is possible to perform the flow operation while expecting the completion production to occur at each game time. In this case, in the advance notice effect, the fish character CH1 moves toward the end on the destination side according to the player's sinking operation. By setting BL, it is possible to clearly recognize that the completion effect is different from the completion effect while allowing the player to expect the completion effect until the middle of the flow operation.

  Even if the player's hand is placed outside the end of the appearance side of the fish character CH1 on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 during the period corresponding to the continuous production execution of each game time, the fish character CH1. Is not retracted from the initial line IL. Thereby, it becomes possible to maintain the notification that it is the execution period corresponding to the continuous performance regardless of the player's operation mode.

  By performing the confrontation effect, the contents of the effect performed thereafter differ according to the confrontation result performed with the confrontation partner character CH2 displayed on the symbol display device 61. As a result, it is expected that the player will recognize that the content of the subsequent production has changed according to the result that he has selected as the confrontation effect, and it is possible to give an impression that he is actively participating in the game, The interest of the game will be improved.

  In the configuration in which the player's selection target result is specified from the image portion of the player's hand imaged on the imaging substrate 71, the opportunity to specify the selection target result using the imaging result is generated multiple times in succession. A confirmation period is set, and the latest selection target result specified by the final timing of the confirmation period is used as a result of selection by the player in the confrontation effect. Thereby, it is possible to use the selection target result presented by the player on the side close to the final timing of the confirmation period as a confrontation effect while making it difficult for the omission of acquisition of the selection target result.

  The confrontation effect includes a compulsory effect in which the content of the confrontation result is determined in advance regardless of the result selected by the player, and the content of the confrontation result varies depending on the result selected by the player, and the player's selection target result There is an after-effects that cannot be made later, and an effect that can be made later, in which the content of the confrontation result varies depending on the result selected by the player and the player's selection target result can be made later. Existing. Thereby, diversification of the aspect of the confrontation effect is achieved.

  In addition to compulsory effects and effects that cannot be put out, there is an effect that can be put out later, so by selecting the result of the selection, the player can select the contents of the effect after the confrontation effect has been executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the confrontation effect.

  When the third confrontation effect is executed, an effect that can be put out later can be executed, and a situation in which a jackpot result is generated after the victory result of the player occurs. Thereby, it is expected that the player recognizes that the jackpot result has been obtained by winning by himself in the confrontation effect, and the player's attention to the confrontation effect can be increased. Furthermore, by creating a situation in which a jackpot result is generated by the later process in this way, the impression that the jackpot result could not be obtained because the later process failed even when the forced performance was executed. Can be given to the player, and from this point, the player's attention to the confrontation effect can be increased.

  In addition, when the third confrontation effect is executed, a lottery process (step S2711) of whether or not to allow later posting is executed in the confrontation effect setting process (FIG. 64), and either an effect that can be made later or an effect that cannot be made later is performed. It is decided whether to execute. As a result, it is possible to irregularly generate an effect that can be made later.

  When the third confrontation effect is executed, a jackpot result is finally generated regardless of whether the confrontation result is a winning result or a non-winning result. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that a jackpot result will occur even if the confrontation result is a non-winning result, and at the timing when the confronting result becomes a non-winning result, It is possible to prevent the attention level from disappearing.

  In the configuration in which the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect, in which the contents of the effect after the confrontation effect are different according to the selection target result of the player, any of the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect is executed. Even if it is, the result of whether or not it is a jackpot result in the game round is not changed. This makes it possible to execute a confrontation effect without affecting the probability of occurrence of a jackpot result.

  In the configuration in which the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect, in which the contents of the effect after the confrontation effect are different according to the selection target result of the player, any of the second confrontation effect and the third confrontation effect is executed. Even if it does, the display duration of the game times is not changed. This makes it possible to execute a confrontation effect while not affecting the digestion rate of game times.

  In the confrontation effect, in the configuration in which the player's selection target result is displayed in the result area WE of the symbol display device 61, the result region WE is not an image picked up on the image pickup board 71 but the display control device 96. An image corresponding to the image data stored in advance in the ROM and corresponding to the shape of the player's hand is displayed. As a result, even if the resolution of the image on the imaging substrate 71 is not high, the selection target result can be clearly displayed.

  When a draw result is obtained in the confrontation effect, the confirmation period is not set again, but the non-winning effect is executed similarly to the defeat result. Thereby, it is possible to set a period required for the confrontation effect to be a predetermined period regardless of the confrontation result.

  When the return button 28 is operated to eject the storage medium storing the information corresponding to the number of usable game balls, the sound light side MPU 93 determines whether or not the operation has been performed by an authorized player. Is identified, and if the player is not a regular player, notification is executed. As a result, when a person who is not a regular player attempts to obtain a storage medium illegally, it is possible to deal with it in the game hall.

  The sound light side MPU 93 is used for imaging when face information acquired based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 when information corresponding to the number of usable game balls is newly set and when the return button 28 is operated. The face data acquired based on the imaging result of the board 71 is collated, and it is determined whether or not the operation of the return button 28 has been performed by an authorized player. This makes it possible to directly authenticate the owner of the storage medium and the performer of the ejection operation.

  The sound light side MPU 93 does not prevent the storage medium from being ejected even if the face authentication result is abnormal. As a result, even if face authentication is not accurately performed and the result of the face authentication becomes abnormal, it is possible to complete the ejection of the storage medium. On the other hand, since the notification is executed when the result of the face authentication becomes abnormal, it is possible to call attention to a game hall manager or the like.

  Since the face authentication process when the return button 28 is operated is started before the discharge of the storage medium is started, it is possible to start notification at an early stage when the return operation is performed illegally. Become.

  That face data was not acquired when information corresponding to the number of available game balls was newly set, or face data was not acquired when the return button 28 was operated. Notification is also executed when face authentication is not performed normally due to the cause. As a result, when there is any abnormality regarding face authentication, it is possible to call attention to the manager of the game hall. Further, even in this situation, the storage medium is ejected, so that it is possible to prevent a legitimate player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The sound light side MPU 93 performs notification when it is determined that the state of sitting in front of the pachinko machine 10 is continued without playing a game based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71. . Thereby, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to confirm whether or not the person should be removed. If there is a person seated without playing a game, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 will be reduced accordingly, which is an undesirable event for the gaming hall, and such an event has occurred. In some cases, it is preferable to encourage the person to leave the room.

  In addition, when the state where a person is seated without playing a game is continued, the notification is performed using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. Thereby, when a regular player is only taking a break between games, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The sound light side MPU 93 performs notification when the operation of the player grasped based on the image pickup result of the image pickup board 71 corresponds to the abnormality handling data stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94. Thereby, when there is a possibility that an illegal act is performed on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prompt the manager of the game hall to confirm it.

  Further, the notification when the operation corresponding to the abnormality handling data is performed is performed by using the display light emitting unit 23, and the notification is not performed by the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the regular player is only performing an action corresponding to the abnormality handling data for a reason different from the fraud. Become.

  The imaging substrate 71 is provided at a position where it cannot be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the imaging substrate 71 exists. If it is found that the imaging board 71 is provided in the pachinko machine 10 and that it captures an image of the player himself, the player may feel uncomfortable and may refrain from playing the game. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to give such a sense of incongruity.

  The stage member 68 is formed as a half mirror so as to have a beam splitter function, and an imaging substrate 71 is provided on the back side of the stage member 68. Thereby, it is possible to make the imaging device 73 invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 while allowing the imaging device 73 to receive light.

  An imaging substrate 71 is provided on the back side of the stage member 68 provided in the game area PA. Thereby, it is possible to hide the imaging substrate 71 by using the member that generates the game area PA while including the player facing the window panel 22 in the monitoring range.

  In particular, the stage member 68 is provided below the symbol display device 61 so as to extend in the front-rear direction between the display surface of the symbol display device 61 and the board surface of the game board 51. By providing the imaging substrate 71 on the back side of the member 68, a space in the front-rear direction between the display surface and the board surface exists above the imaging device 73, so that the imaging device 73 can easily receive light.

  Even when the front door frame 14 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 so that the stage member 68 is directly visible, the stage member 68 functions as a half mirror. Therefore, the imaging substrate 71, the light emitting device 72, and the imaging The device 73 cannot be visually observed. As a result, even when a ball clogging or the like occurs in the game area PA and it is necessary to open the front door frame 14 to eliminate it, the imaging substrate 71 is used for imaging. Can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

  In addition to the stage member 68 being formed as a half mirror, the substrate base 69 is formed to be colored and opaque. Then, even if the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the back pack unit 15 is separated from the main body frame 13 to expose the back of the gaming board 51, the imaging board 71, the light emitting device 72, and the imaging device 73 cannot be visually observed. Therefore, even a game hall employee can be prevented from recognizing that imaging is performed using the imaging substrate 71.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for performing the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and the various controls using the imaging results is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 73 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration for performing imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and various controls using imaging results.

  In the present embodiment, an imaging command to the imaging board 71 is transmitted not only from the sound light side MPU 93 but also from the main side MPU 83, and an imaging result on the imaging board 71 is transmitted not only to the sound light side MPU 93 but also to the main side MPU 83. Is also sent. That is, the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 and the various controls using the imaging results are executed in each of the main MPU 83 and the sound light MPU 93. In detail, the sound light side MPU 93 performs the reference switch monitoring process, the cancellation monitoring process, the height position monitoring process, and the first situation monitoring in the sound light side MPU 93 with respect to the processes executed by the MPUs 83 and 93. While the process, the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process are executed, the main MPU 83 performs the face authentication process, the imaging control process, and the like in the first embodiment. Is executed. Further, the main MPU 83 outputs a signal corresponding to the result of the face authentication process to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 109.

  Next, face authentication processing executed by the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S 3101, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in a post-return operation flag provided in the main RAM 85. Here, the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 operates when the return button 28 of the ball lending operation device 26 is operated in a situation where information corresponding to the number of game balls usable in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium is stored. Then, a return instruction generation command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the return instruction generation command, it sets “1” to the post-return operation flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 3101, that is, if a return operation is not performed, whether or not “1” is set in the face authentication monitoring flag provided in the main RAM 85 in step S 3102. Determine. The face authentication monitoring flag is used to capture an image of one frame on the imaging substrate 71 in order to acquire an image of the player's face when information for enabling the rental of game balls is newly added. This is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 83 that the situation is being performed.

  If “1” is not set in the face authentication monitoring flag, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not “1” is set in the face authentication request flag provided in the main RAM 85. Here, the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 has information corresponding to the number of game balls that can be used in the ball lending device Y or the storage medium as a result of the insertion of the bill into the ball lending device Y or the storage medium. When it is newly set or increased, a lending information addition command is transmitted to the main MPU 83. When the main MPU 83 receives the lending information addition command, it sets “1” to the face authentication request flag. If a negative determination is made in step S3103, the face authentication process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104.

  In step S3104, it is determined whether the face authentication monitoring standby time has elapsed. The waiting time for face authentication monitoring is arbitrary, but is set to 300 msec in this embodiment. The measurement of the waiting time is started when execution of face authentication monitoring is completed for an image of one frame acquired in response to an imaging command being issued in the face authentication process. Note that the measurement of the waiting time is started immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  If the face authentication monitoring standby time has not elapsed, the face authentication processing is terminated as it is, and if the face authentication monitoring standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S 3105, “1” is set to the imaging command flag provided in the main RAM 85 and “1” is set to the face authentication monitoring flag of the main RAM 85. Thereafter, the face authentication process is terminated. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process of the main MPU 83 and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The processing contents of the imaging control process are the same as the imaging control process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

  When “1” is set in the face authentication monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, and the flow proceeds to step S3106. In step S3106, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the main RAM 85. That is, it is determined whether or not the imaging of one frame for pre-acquisition of the face image has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S3106, the face authentication process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3107.

  In step S3107, the face authentication monitoring flag and the imaging completion flag in the main RAM 85 are cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S3108, face data extraction processing is executed. In the face data extraction process, the image data for one frame is grasped based on the distance data stored in the distance image storage area of the main RAM 85, and the human face portion is included in the grasped image data. It is determined whether corresponding image data exists. In the determination, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape, a circular shape, or an elliptical shape is extracted, and a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth, or ear exists in the extracted range. In this case, the extracted range is recognized as a face.

  Thereafter, in step S3109, it is determined whether or not face data extraction has been completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the face authentication process is terminated. If face data extraction has been completed, the extracted face data is stored in a pre-data storage area provided in the main RAM 85 in step S3110. Thereafter, after the face authentication request flag in the main RAM 85 is cleared to “0” in step S3111, the face authentication process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3101 that the return operation is being performed, the authentication process at the time of the return operation is executed in step S3112, and then the face authentication process is terminated. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an authentication process during the return operation.

  In step S3201, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the return-time authentication monitoring flag provided in the main RAM 85. When the return operation is performed, the return-time authentication monitoring flag is a situation where an image for one frame is being captured by the imaging substrate 71 in order to acquire an image of the player's face. This is a flag for specifying in the side MPU 83. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, “1” is set in the imaging command flag corresponding to return authentication in the main RAM 85 in step S3202, and the return authentication monitoring flag in the main RAM 85 is set. After setting “1”, the authentication process is terminated. By setting “1” to the imaging command flag, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process of the main MPU 83 and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71.

  When “1” is set in the return-time authentication monitoring flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, and the flow advances to step S3203. In step S3203, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the imaging completion flag of the main RAM 85. That is, it is determined whether or not imaging of an image for one frame for performing face authentication has been completed. If a negative determination is made in step S3203, the present authentication process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3203, the process proceeds to step S3204.

  In step S3204, the imaging completion flag in the main RAM 85 is cleared to “0”. In the subsequent step S3205, face data extraction processing is executed. The processing content of the extraction process is the same as the extraction process in step S3108 in the face authentication process (FIG. 74).

  Thereafter, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not face data extraction has been completed. If face data extraction has not been completed, the present authentication process is terminated. If face data extraction has been completed, the extracted face data is stored in a collation data storage area provided in the main RAM 85 in step S3207.

  In the subsequent step S3208, both the corresponding imaging command flag and the post-return operation flag in the main RAM 85 are cleared to “0”. Here, when “1” is set to the imaging command flag in the authentication process at the time of the return operation, the imaging command flag is not cleared to “0” simply by completing imaging on the imaging substrate 71. When face data is stored in the collation data storage area, “0” is cleared. As a result, until the face data for verification is acquired, imaging is repeated on the imaging substrate 71, and the face data for verification can be reliably acquired. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when face data cannot be extracted before the face authentication monitoring period elapses after the corresponding imaging command flag is set to “1” in step S3202, Similarly to step S3208, various flags may be cleared to “0” and alarm processing may be executed in steps S3212 and S3213 described later.

  Thereafter, in step S3209, the face data stored in the pre-data storage area of the main RAM 85 is compared with the face data stored in the check data storage area of the main RAM 85. In this case, a jaw line is extracted from each face data, and the relative position of the eyes, nose, mouth or ear with respect to the jaw line and the outer edge shape of the eyes, nose, mouth or ear are 90% or more in both face data. If it is correct, it is determined that these two face data match. If face data can be authenticated, a specific method for authenticating the face data is arbitrary.

  In the subsequent step S3210, it is determined whether or not the result of the collation process in step S3209 is a matching result. When face data is not stored in the pre-data storage area, it is handled that the face data does not match. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, a return permission command is transmitted to the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 in step S3211. When receiving the return permission command from the main MPU 83, the MPU 113 of the payout control device 111 transmits a return instruction signal indicating that the storage medium storing the rentable information should be ejected to the ball lending device Y. As a result, the storage medium storing the rentable information is discharged from the ball lending device Y.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3210, an alarm command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S3212. The sound light side MPU 93 reads the alarm light emission data from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 by receiving the alarm command. By reading the alarm light emission data, the alarm light emission data is referred to in the light emission control process (step S503) in the timer interruption process (FIG. 14), and the display light emitting unit 23 cannot normally perform face authentication. Light emission is performed in such a manner. As a result, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to confirm whether or not the storage medium has been returned to the legitimate player.

  Then, after executing the alarm external output process in step S3213, the present authentication process is terminated. In the alarm external output processing, a signal indicating that the collation of the face data with respect to the return operation of the storage medium does not match is output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 109. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to recognize that the abnormality has occurred.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the return button 28 of the ball lending operation device 26 is operated to eject the storage medium storing the rentable information, the storage medium is not immediately ejected. When the face data match, the storage medium is ejected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally acquiring the storage medium.

  In the present embodiment, the second situation monitoring process in the first embodiment may be executed by the main MPU 83. In this case, if an affirmative determination is made in the process corresponding to step S1513 in the second situation monitoring process (FIG. 36), in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the abnormality notification is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the progress of the game It is good also as a structure which performs the process for stopping. For example, by making an affirmative determination in step S206 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 11) of the main MPU 83, the progress of the game is progressed such as stopping the launch of the game ball and stopping the execution of the special figure special electric control process. It is good also as a structure stopped. Further, in addition to or instead of the process for stopping the progress of the game, a signal indicating that the operation corresponding to the abnormality is specified to the hall computer HC of the game hall may be externally output.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the imaging substrate 71 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 76 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the imaging substrate 71 in the present embodiment.

  The imaging substrate 71 of the present embodiment is provided with a light emitting device 72, a control circuit 74, an imaging device 131, and a signal processing circuit 141. The configurations of the light emitting device 72 and the control circuit 74 are the same as those of the imaging substrate 71 in the first embodiment.

  Unlike the imaging substrate 71 in the first embodiment, the imaging device 131 is configured to capture not only distance data but also a visible image. Specifically, the imaging device 131 is provided with a distance data imaging sensor 132 and a visible image imaging sensor 133.

  The distance data imaging sensor 132 is the same as the imaging sensor 73a in the first embodiment. The signal acquired by the distance data imaging sensor 132 is transmitted to the distance data signal processing circuit 142 provided in the signal processing circuit 141, and the distance data is derived by the distance data signal processing circuit 142.

  The visible image pickup sensor 133 uses a CCD sensor, a MOS sensor, or a CMOS sensor so that a monochrome image can be acquired. The signal acquired by the visible image imaging sensor 133 is transmitted to the visible image signal processing circuit 143 provided in the signal processing circuit 141, and the visible image signal processing circuit 143 derives a monochrome image. The visible image capturing sensor 133 may be configured to capture a color image.

  The distance data imaging sensor 132 and the visible image imaging sensor 133 are juxtaposed at close positions, and the same or substantially the same range is the imaging range. According to this configuration, it is possible to acquire distance data for each unit data, which is the minimum unit for determining color information in the visible image, and to recognize the visible image as a three-dimensional image.

  The imaging results of the imaging substrate 71 in the present embodiment are the monitoring process for cancellation, the height position monitoring process, the face authentication process, the first situation monitoring process, the second situation monitoring process, and the operation effect in the first embodiment. Used in each control process. In this case, since not only distance data but also a visible image is acquired, it is possible to accurately extract face data and hand data. Further, since not only the visible image but also the distance data is acquired, for example, it is possible to cancel the image portion based on the surface 22a of the window panel 22 as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the face data of the person to be monitored is stored in advance as reference face data in the sound-side ROM 94, and the player's face data extracted in the second situation monitoring process, for example, The reference face data may be collated, and the matching process may be executed if the collation results match. As the matching processing, for example, the pachinko machine 10 itself may be configured to perform notification, or may be configured to perform matching-corresponding external output to the hall computer of the game hall, and at least processing for controlling the progress of the game It is good also as a structure by which progress of a game is restrict | limited by not being performed partly. As a result, for example, it is possible to make the manager of the game hall recognize that a person registered as a fraudster has appeared, or to prevent the person from playing a game.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution aspect of the operation effect in a situation where “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound side RAM 95 in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the divided effect setting process in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether a split production start condition is satisfied. The split effect start condition is when a game data effect data table is read in the sound side RAM 95, and pointer data indicating the contents of the control target in the data table indicates the start of the split effect. This is true when it corresponds to data. If a negative determination is made in step S3301, the split effect setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302.

  In step S3302, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the reference flag of the sound side RAM 95. That is, it is determined whether or not the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position. In step S3303, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the restriction flag of the sound light side RAM 95.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S3302 and step S3303, various data for split display are read in step S3304. Various data for split display includes light emission data and sound output data for split display. These light emission data and sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light with the divided display pattern and the speaker unit 24 outputs the sound with the divided display pattern. In step S 3304, a display command for split display is transmitted to the display control device 96. Upon receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform divided display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-1).

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in either step S3302 or step S3303, various data for selection display are read in step S3305. Various data for selection display includes light emission data and sound output data for selection display, and these light emission data and sound output data are used for the light emission control process (step S503) and the sound of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14). By referring to the output control process (step S504), the display light emitting unit 23 emits light in the pattern for selective display, and the sound is output from the speaker unit 24 in the pattern for selective display. Furthermore, in step S3305, a display command for selection display is transmitted to the display control device 96. Upon receiving the display command, the display control device 96 causes the symbol display device 61 to perform selection display as shown in FIG. 45 (a-2).

  When the process of step S3304 or step S3305 is executed, after setting “1” to both the imaging command flag and the divided effect flag corresponding to the divided effect in the sound side RAM 95 in step S3306, the main divided effect setting is performed. End the process. By setting “1” in the imaging command flag, as already described, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted toward the imaging substrate 71 in the imaging control process (FIG. 21), and imaging is started on the imaging substrate 71. The

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in a situation where “1” is set in the restriction flag, selection display is performed instead of division display as a division effect. As already described, the restriction flag is set to “1” when it is determined in the monitoring process for cancellation (FIG. 25) that the monitoring target for cancellation has occurred. Then, the situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” may be a situation where the imaging substrate 71 cannot normally capture an image of one frame. In this case, by not performing the split display, it is not necessary to finely distinguish the selection operation in a situation where imaging cannot be performed normally. On the other hand, it is possible to generate an operation effect even in a situation where “1” is set in the restriction flag by performing selection display instead of not performing any division effect. Become.

  In the stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 52), when “1” is not set in the restriction flag, multiple rows are displayed as the stop operation effect, and “1” is set in the restriction flag. In this case, a single row display may be performed as a stop operation effect.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the height position monitoring process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing height position monitoring processing in the present embodiment.

  In the height position monitoring process according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the target extraction has been completed in the height position target extraction process (step S3411) (step S3412: YES), the height position group identification process ( Step S3414) is not executed, but the height position is determined in Step S3413 when it is specified that the distance data corresponding to the extracted height position is the distance data within the specific target range. The group specifying process (step S3414) is executed. In this case, the specific target range is the presence of the player's face when the player seated in the chair provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 is looking straight at the window panel 22 side in a stretched state. The specific target range is determined by experiments at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the specific target range is set as a range that is more than the first target distance away from the window panel 22 and less than or equal to the second target distance that is farther than the first target distance.

  Except for the point that the process of step S3413 is executed, the processing content of the height position monitoring process is the same as the height position monitoring process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, since the group of the height position is specified when the player's face is present at the position that should exist when performing the production operation, the height position group in various production control processes is specified. A corresponding operation effective range setting process (step S1707 and the like) can be appropriately performed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the cancellation monitoring process is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79, in the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined position within the game area PA that does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area PA (for example, a predetermined position on the back surface of the window panel 22). In the lower region, a plate P with predetermined information may be arranged. Examples of the predetermined information attached to the plate P include specifications of the pachinko machine 10 and explanations of the contents of effects. In this case, when the canceling monitoring process is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment when the plate P is arranged, the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 is obtained due to the presence of the plate P. Limitation of execution of the used effect and abnormality notification are executed. On the other hand, even if the pachinko machine 10 is the same model and the same model, the plate P may or may not be arranged in the game hall, and the area where the plate P is provided in the monitoring process for cancellation is generally determined. It is not preferable to exclude the monitoring target.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for appropriately performing the monitoring for cancellation even when the plate P is arranged will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the monitoring process for cancellation in the present embodiment.

  In steps S3501 to S3508, the same processes as those in steps S1001 to S1008 of the cancel monitoring process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment are executed. If it is determined in step S3509 that distance data corresponding to the monitoring distance or less exists, it is determined in step S3510 whether the exclusion setting switch is ON.

  The exclusion setting switch is provided at a position that can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 11 as in the sound emission control device 91, and between the ON position and the OFF position. Switching operation is possible. The exclusion setting switch is electrically connected to the sound light side MPU 93, and the sound light side MPU 93 is arranged at either the ON position or the OFF position according to the electrical signal received from the exclusion setting switch. Can be recognized.

  If the exclusion setting switch is located at the ON position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3510 and the process proceeds to step S3511. In step S511, it is determined whether or not the distance data determined to correspond to the monitoring distance or less is included in the exclusion target range in the image G for one frame corresponding to the virtual two-dimensional plane. The data of the exclusion target range is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94 and is set in correspondence with the position where the plate P is arranged in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  When the exclusion setting switch is arranged at the OFF position (step S3510: NO) or when the distance data determined to correspond to the monitoring distance or less is not included in the exclusion target range (step S3511: NO) In step S3512 to step S3517, whether or not the distance data is the distance data to be canceled is specified and processing for dealing with it is executed. Note that the processing contents of steps S3512 to S3517 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1010 to S1015 of the cancellation monitoring process (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, if the exclusion setting switch is located at the ON position (step S3510: YES), and the distance data determined to correspond to the monitoring distance or less is included in the exclusion target range ( In step S3511: YES, the processing shown in steps S3512 to S3517 is not executed.

  Due to the above configuration, when the plate P is arranged in the game area PA, the plate P can be ignored in the monitoring for cancellation. For example, due to the presence of the plate P, the imaging substrate 71 can be ignored. It is possible to prevent the execution of the performance using the imaging result and the abnormality notification from being executed.

  In addition, an exclusion setting switch that can be manually operated by the game hall manager is provided, and when the exclusion setting switch is arranged at the OFF position, the monitoring range where the plate P is originally arranged is also subject to monitoring for cancellation. It is said. As a result, it is possible to expand the range of monitoring for cancellation in a game hall in which no plate P is arranged.

  In addition, instead of the configuration in which the image G for one frame is acquired based on the distance data, the color of the plate P is designated in the configuration in which an image for one frame is acquired based on capturing a monochrome image or a color image. It is good also as a structure excluded from the object of the monitoring for cancellation by keeping.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) As shown in the modification of FIG. 81 (a), the selection images GA to GD may be displayed side by side not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction when divided display is performed in the symbol display device 61. . Specifically, the effect A selection image GA and the effect B selection image GB are displayed side by side without any interval, and the effect C selection image GC and the effect D selection image GD are displayed. The effect A selection image GA and the effect C selection image GC are displayed side by side in the vertical direction without any interval, and the effect B selection image is displayed. The GB and the effect D selection image GD are displayed side by side in the vertical direction without any interval. The operation effective ranges EA11 to EA14 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the selection images GA to GD at positions corresponding to the front of the selection images GA to GD.

  In this case, the operation effective range EA11 for selecting the effect A arranged in the horizontal direction and the operation effective range EA12 for selecting the effect B are set so as to be arranged in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval. The operation effective range EA13 for selecting the effect C and the operation effective range EA14 for selecting the effect D are set to be arranged in the horizontal direction at a predetermined interval. Further, the operation effective range EA11 for selecting the effect A arranged in the vertical direction and the operation effective range EA13 for selecting the effect C are set to be arranged in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval, and similarly in the vertical direction. The operation effective range EA12 for selecting the effect B to be arranged and the operation effective range EA14 for selecting the effect D are set to be arranged in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. With the above configuration, the possibility of simultaneously recognizing the occurrence of an operation in the plurality of effective operation ranges EA11 to EA14 is reduced while ensuring the display range of the selection images GA to GD as wide as possible.

  In particular, the interval IY between the operation effective ranges EA11 to EA14 arranged in the vertical direction is secured wider than the interval IX between the operation effective ranges EA11 to EA14 arranged in the horizontal direction. Thereby, due to the positional relationship between the imaging board 71 and the symbol display device 61 and the difference in the eye height of the player, the position where the player actually performed the rendering operation and the imaging of the imaging board 71 It is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation recognition with respect to the vertical direction in which the operation position grasped based on the result is easily shifted.

  Note that the selection images GA to GD are not limited to the configuration in which two selection images GA to GD are set in each of the vertical and horizontal directions, and three, four, or five or more are set in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. A plurality of selection images may be displayed side by side in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and the number in the vertical direction may be different from the number in the horizontal direction. In this case, the positional relationship between the imaging substrate 71 and the symbol display device 61 is increased by increasing the number of images for selection displayed side by side in the horizontal direction to the number of images for selection displayed side by side in the vertical direction, and Operation recognition regarding the vertical direction in which the position where the player actually performed the rendering operation and the operation position grasped based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71 are likely to be shifted due to the difference in the eye height of the player It becomes possible to improve the accuracy of the. The configuration in which the number of images for selection displayed side by side in the horizontal direction is larger than the number of images for selection displayed side by side in the vertical direction is not only for the symbol display device 61 having a horizontally long display surface. It is also effective for a symbol display device having a square display surface and a symbol display device having a vertically long display surface.

  (2) In the modification shown in FIG. 81 (b), when a plurality of columns are displayed in the stop operation effect, the plurality of variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction instead of in the horizontal direction. In each of the fluctuation display areas CA1 to CA3, the symbols are variably displayed in the horizontal direction. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the variable display of the symbols in the same manner as the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the effect for the game times.

  In this case, corresponding to the fact that the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction, the operation effective ranges EA21 to EA23 corresponding to the variable display areas CA1 to CA3 are also set in the vertical direction. . These operation effective ranges EA21 to EA23 are set side by side in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. As a result, the possibility of simultaneously recognizing the occurrence of an operation in the plurality of operation effective ranges EA21 to EA23 is reduced.

  (3) An antireflection agent may be applied to a member arranged in the game area PA and not included in the imaging range of the imaging device 73, or an antireflection sheet may be laminated. Thereby, reflection of light around the imaging device 73 can be suppressed, and distance data in the imaging substrate 71 can be derived with high accuracy.

  (4) Image data corresponding to the game ball is stored in the sound light side ROM 94 in advance, and an image portion extracted as an object existing on the imaging substrate 71 side than the window panel 22 corresponds to the game ball. If it corresponds to image data, it may be configured not to be subject to cancellation monitoring. In this case, the game balls flowing down the game area PA can be directly excluded from the targets for cancellation monitoring.

  (5) The imaging substrate 71 may be electrically connected to the display control device 96 instead of the sound light side MPU 93. In this case, the display control device 96 may be configured to execute various monitoring processes and various effects processes using the imaging results of the imaging substrate 71 in the above embodiment. Further, in this configuration, the result of imaging on the imaging substrate 71 can be displayed as it is on the symbol display device 61, so that, for example, in the confrontation effect, the image of the player's hand that has been captured is directly displayed as the symbol display device. It may be displayed at 61. In particular, in a configuration in which not only distance data but also a visible image such as a monochrome image or a color image is captured as in the third embodiment, the result captured on the imaging substrate 71 is displayed on the symbol display device 61 as it is. However, it is possible not to lower the appearance of the image.

  (6) The imaging substrate 71 may be electrically connected not only to the sound light side MPU 93 but also to the display control device 96. In this case, the sound image side MPU 93 is configured to execute various monitoring processes and various effects processes using the imaging results of the imaging board 71 in the above-described embodiment, and the result of imaging on the imaging board 71 is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Can be displayed as it is.

  (7) The main body that performs the imaging control of the imaging substrate 71 is not performed by the MPU provided to execute the control other than the imaging control, such as the sound light side MPU 93, but a dedicated MPU that performs the imaging control is provided. It is good also as a structure currently provided. In this case, the target image portion is extracted from the image G for one frame and the face authentication is performed by the dedicated MPU, and the authentication result is transmitted to the main MPU 83 or the sound light side MPU 93. Processing corresponding to the authentication result may be executed. In addition, the dedicated MPU determines whether the hand image portion is included in the operation effective range, and the determination result is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 so that the sound light side MPU 93 supports the rendering operation. It is good also as a structure by which execution control of the produced effect is performed.

  (8) The signal processing circuit 75 periodically acquires distance data corresponding to the image G for one frame regardless of whether or not the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 needs to be used (for example, 10 msec). If the imaging result needs to be used in the sound light side MPU 93, the imaging result corresponding to the image G for one frame may be read from the signal processing circuit 75. In this case, it is possible to shorten the time from the timing when the imaging result needs to be used in the sound light side MPU 93 to the timing when the imaging result can actually be used.

  (9) The position at which the imaging substrate 71 is provided is not limited to the position in the above embodiment, and may be provided in the roof unit 66 of the center frame 65, for example, and provided in the lower part of the game area PA. It is good also as a structure currently provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided in the pachinko machine 10 front rather than the pachinko machine 10 back rather than the window panel 22. FIG. For example, the configuration may be a configuration provided in the upper bulging portion 31, a configuration provided in the lower bulging portion 32, or a configuration provided in the upper portion of the front door frame 14. Even if the imaging substrate 71 is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 as described above, the imaging substrate 71 can be derived while the distance data can be derived in the imaging substrate 71 by providing a cover member that transmits light around the periphery. It becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the substrate 71.

  (10) The timing at which the cancellation monitoring process, the height position monitoring process, the face authentication process, the first situation monitoring process, and the second situation monitoring process are executed is not limited to the timing of the above embodiment, and is arbitrary. is there. For example, any processing may be performed only in a situation where the demo screen is displayed on the symbol display device 61, or may be configured only in a situation where the launch of the game ball is stopped. In 61, it is good also as a structure performed only in the condition where the effect for game times and the effect for opening / closing execution modes are not performed. Further, in the configuration in which each of the above processes is executed even in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed, the configuration is performed in a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is good also as a structure performed until reach production is started.

  (11) When the signal intensity received from the imaging device 73 in the signal processing circuit 75 is too higher than the assumed intensity, an intensity abnormality signal is transmitted from the signal processing circuit 75 to the sound light side MPU 93. It is good also as a structure by which the process for performing the abnormality alert | report corresponding to it in the sound light side MPU93 is performed. This makes it possible to prompt the game hall manager to deal with an abnormality in the imaging board 71 itself. In addition, when the sound light side MPU 93 receives the abnormal intensity signal, the abnormal imaging result is not used by preventing the processing using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 from being executed. Is possible.

  (12) The monitoring reference distance may be set in a plurality of stages in the monitoring process for cancellation, and the processing content executed thereafter may be different depending on which monitoring reference distance is less than the monitoring reference distance. . For example, when the distance data from the position slightly ahead of the front surface 22a of the window panel 22 to the back surface 22b of the window panel 22 is acquired, the execution restriction and notification of the effect using the imaging result are performed, and the window panel When the distance data corresponding to the presence of a foreign object behind the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the back surface 22b of 22 is acquired, the execution of at least a part of the processing for advancing the game is prevented. It is good also as a structure which alert | reports while advancing. Since processing for stopping the progress of the game needs to be performed in the main MPU 83, the imaging result of the imaging board 71 is transmitted to the main MPU 83 in addition to or instead of the sound light MPU 93. It is preferable. According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform a level of handling corresponding to each monitoring result.

  (13) When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position instead of a configuration in which the number of effective operation ranges is reduced and the effective operation range is set wide. However, the number of operation effective ranges is not changed, but each operation effective range may be set wider than in the case where the operation effective ranges are arranged at the OFF position. In this case, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of the production operation while not reducing the number of selections during the division production or the stop operation production.

  (14) When the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position, a configuration in which the operation effective range is set narrow may be used instead of the configuration in which the operation effective range is set wide. When the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position, the signal processing circuit 75 sets the reference signal intensity for deriving the distance data to be lower than that when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the OFF position. Noise may be easily picked up when data is derived. On the other hand, by setting the operation effective range to be narrow, the possibility of recognizing that the production operation is generated for the noise is reduced.

  (15) The reference distance from which the distance data is derived when the reference switch 91a is disposed at the ON position is a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the back surface 22b of the window panel 22, and the front surface 22a of the window panel 22. Instead of the configuration that is set to a distance closer to the imaging device 73 than the imaging device 73, a configuration that is set to a distance farther from the imaging device 73 than the surface 22a of the window panel 22 may be adopted. In this case, even when the anti-magnetic wave prevention sheet PS is attached not only to the back surface 22b of the window panel 22 but also to the front surface 22a, the use of the distance data derived by the imaging substrate 71 can be accommodated. It becomes.

  (16) When the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position, it is changed from the case where the signal strength reference for determining whether or not the distance data is derived in the signal processing circuit 75 is arranged at the OFF position. In addition, the distance data corresponding to less than the reference distance is not transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93, but only one of them may be performed.

  (17) In the first situation monitoring process, when it is specified that the game is not continuously performed despite being seated in front of the pachinko machine 10, the notification in the pachinko machine 10 itself is provided. The external output corresponding to the situation may be performed on the hall computer of the game hall without being performed. In this case, it is possible to allow the manager of the game hall to recognize that the situation is in place while not directly reporting the person sitting in front of the pachinko machine 10. . The external output may be configured by the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment, or may be configured by the main side MPU 83 in the second embodiment.

  (18) In the game hall, it is possible to set a period required for notification when the game is not continuously performed even though the user is seated in front of the pachinko machine 10. It is good also as a possible structure. This makes it possible to perform monitoring according to the game hall.

  (19) In the first situation monitoring process, when it is specified that the game is not continued even though the user is seated in front of the pachinko machine 10, the "game" A notification sound such as “Please move if not performed” may be output, or such a character may be displayed on the symbol display device 61.

  (20) A configuration in which when the operation for handling an abnormality is specified in the second situation monitoring process, the pachinko machine 10 itself is not notified and an external output corresponding to the situation is given to the hall computer of the game hall It is good. In this case, it is possible to allow the manager of the game hall to recognize that the situation has occurred while avoiding direct notification to the person who is the target of the action for handling the abnormality. . The external output may be configured by the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment, or may be configured by the main side MPU 83 in the second embodiment.

  (21) When an operation corresponding to an abnormality is specified in the second situation monitoring process, a notification sound such as “Recognized an abnormal operation” may be output from the speaker unit 24. Such a character may be displayed.

  (22) Instead of the configuration for specifying the height position of the player's face in the height position monitoring process, the configuration may be such that the height position of the player's eyes is specified. In this case, since it is preferable to extract the eyes themselves from the image G for one frame, the imaging substrate 71 can capture a visible image such as a monochrome image or a color image as in the third embodiment. It is preferable to do.

  (23) Instead of a configuration that adjusts the position of the operation effective range in the virtual two-dimensional plane (image G for one frame) in various effect control processes according to the height position of the face specified in the height position monitoring process. The position of the player's hand in the virtual two-dimensional plane may be adjusted. In addition, when the division effect is executed, the position of the selection image displayed on the symbol display device 61 may be adjusted according to the height position of the face specified in the height position monitoring process. Further, two or more adjustments among the adjustment of the position of the effective operation range in the virtual two-dimensional plane, the adjustment of the position of the hand in the virtual two-dimensional plane, and the adjustment of the position of the selection image may be performed.

  (24) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the adjustment according to the height position of the player's face is performed, a configuration in which the adjustment according to the lateral position of the player's face may be performed. In this case, one of the adjustment of the position of the operation effective range in the virtual two-dimensional plane, the adjustment of the position of the hand in the virtual two-dimensional plane, and the adjustment of the position of the selection image according to the specified lateral position. One adjustment may be performed, or two or more adjustments may be performed.

  (25) When the height position of the face is specified in the height position monitoring process, a notification that the specification is performed may be executed by the symbol display device 61 or the like. In this case, it is possible to specify the height position of the face in a situation where the player is in the posture when performing the production operation.

  (26) An operation unit that can be operated by a player is provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and the height position of the face is determined in the height position monitoring process when a specific start operation of the height position is performed on the operation unit. It is good also as composition specified.

  (27) The size and orientation of the image displayed on the symbol display device 61 may be adjusted according to the result of specifying the face position and eye position of the player. By applying such a configuration to, for example, 3D image display for making the symbol display device 61 feel the spread in the depth direction, it is possible to perform 3D image display according to the position of the player's eyes. The effect can be increased.

  (28) A configuration in which the position of the player's face and the position of the eyes are specified may be applied to the configuration in which the symbol display device 61 performs dual view display. In this case, it is possible to perform dual view display according to the position of the player's eyes, and it is possible to appropriately recognize each image displayed as the dual view.

  (29) In a situation where information on the number of game balls that can be rented is stored, when it is specified that the player has left the seat based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71, the notification process is executed. Also good. As the notification process, for example, a process for causing the display light emitting unit 23 to emit light in a predetermined mode, a process for outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speaker unit 24, and a predetermined notification image is displayed on the symbol display device 61. And processing for external output to the hall computer of the game hall may be considered, and any one of these processes may be executed, and a plurality of processes among these processes may be performed. It may be configured to be executed.

  (30) Configuration in which notification processing is executed when a player's face recognized based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71 is changed in a situation where information on the number of game balls that can be lent is stored It is good. As the notification process, for example, a process for causing the display light emitting unit 23 to emit light in a predetermined mode, a process for outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speaker unit 24, and a predetermined notification image is displayed on the symbol display device 61. And processing for external output to the hall computer of the game hall may be considered, and any one of these processes may be executed, and a plurality of processes among these processes may be performed. It may be configured to be executed.

  (31) When the return button 28 is operated, the payout control device 111 starts discharging a storage medium storing information corresponding to the number of usable game balls after a predetermined wait period has elapsed. A configuration may be adopted. In this case, face authentication is completed during the predetermined wait period and notification is started in the case of an abnormality, so that when a person who is not a regular player operates the return button 28, the memory for that is stored. Abnormality notification can be started before the discharge of the medium is started.

  (32) A part or all of the window panel 22 may be a liquid crystal panel that can transmit light, and a selection image that indicates a position where an effect operation should be performed on the liquid crystal panel may be displayed. In this case, since the position where the player puts out his hand to perform the production operation is closer to the position of the selection image than in the above embodiment, the influence of the face height position on the recognition of the hand height position is reduced. Is done.

  (33) In the configuration in which the window panel 22 is a touch panel and the selection operation image is displayed on the window panel 22, a configuration for setting the priority of the rendering operation may be applied. Specifically, in a configuration in which a plurality of selection operation images are displayed simultaneously on the window panel 22, there is a possibility that a plurality of selection operation images may be operated simultaneously. On the other hand, by setting in advance a priority to be recognized as the occurrence of the production operation, each production operation can be individually recognized according to a predetermined priority.

  (34) When a player's hand is simultaneously included in a plurality of operation effective ranges in the division effect or the stop operation effect, the image portion of the hand is included in the virtual two-dimensional plane (image G for one frame). It is good also as a structure which specifies that production operation was performed with respect to the operation effective range by the side with many areas. Thereby, it is possible to determine that one rendering operation is valid without setting the priority in advance.

  (35) In the first notification effect control process, the split effect control process, and the stop operation effect control process, when it is specified that the player's hand is included in the operation effective range, the generation of the effective operation is immediately specified. Instead of this, it may be configured to identify the occurrence of an effective operation when it is specified that the player's hand is included for an operation determination reference period (for example, 2 sec) or longer. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being identified as the production operation when the player moves his / her hand regardless of the production operation.

  (36) In the first notification effect control process, the second notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, and the stop operation effect control process, when the distance data corresponding to the player's hand corresponds to the reference target distance or more. However, instead of this, the distance data corresponding to the player's hand is determined in advance corresponding to the distance to a position slightly ahead of the surface 22a of the window panel 22. If the distance is less than the specified distance, it may be configured not to be a valid operation determination target. In this case, if the hand is too close to the window panel 22, it will not be determined as an effective operation, so the possibility that the surface 22a of the window panel 22 will be touched is reduced. Moreover, it is good also as a structure made into the determination object of effective operation, when the distance data corresponding to a player's hand are more than 1st distance and less than 2nd distance far from the said 1st distance. This makes it possible to set the effective operation range in the front-rear direction.

  (37) It is good also as a structure from which the reference object distance of whether to make a determination target of effective operation in each effect control process differs. For example, in the first notification effect control process, the second notification effect control process, the divided effect control process, and the stop operation effect control process, the same reference target distance as that in the above embodiment is set, and the continuous effect control process and the confrontation effect are performed. In the control process, another target distance farther than the reference target distance of the above embodiment is set, and in the continuous effect control process and the control process of the confrontation effect, for the hand data corresponding to the other target distance or more, an effective operation is performed. It is good also as a structure excluded from determination object.

  (38) It is good also as a structure by which the image displayed on the symbol display apparatus 61 is expanded or reduced based on the distance data of the hand when presentation operation is performed. For example, when a hand is included in the size determination reference range, a predetermined image is displayed at the initial size, and when a hand is present at a position closer to the size determination reference range, the size is larger than the initial size. The predetermined image is displayed, and when a hand is present at a position far from the size determination reference range, the predetermined image may be displayed with a size smaller than the initial size. Conversely, if a hand is present at a position closer to the size determination reference range, a predetermined image is displayed in a size smaller than the initial size, and a hand is present at a position farther than the size determination reference range. In this case, a predetermined image may be displayed with a size larger than the initial size. Thereby, the display of the image according to the position of a player's hand is attained.

  (39) The number of selection images displayed on the symbol display device 61 during the division effect is not limited to two, and may be three, four, or five or more. In this case, by arranging all of these selection images in the horizontal direction, it is possible to reduce the influence of the height position of the player's face when determining whether or not an effect operation has been performed.

  (40) Although the first notification effect can be executed in a situation where the division effect is being executed, the first notification effect may not be executed in a situation where the division effect is being executed. In this case, the operation effective range is not set in the vertical direction on the virtual two-dimensional plane (image G for one frame), and a plurality of operation effective ranges are always set in the horizontal direction. It is possible to reduce the influence of the height position of the player's face when determining whether or not the game has been performed.

  (41) When multi-row display is performed as a stop operation effect, it may be configured such that symbols different from the symbols variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed in the variable display areas CA1 to CA3. Moreover, when a multi-row display is performed as a stop operation effect, the symbol variation display direction in each variation display area CA1 to CA3 may be the same as the symbol variation display direction in the symbol row Z1 to Z3. Further, in the stop operation effect, the symbols may be displayed in a variable speed at which the symbols can be identified in each of the variation display areas CA1 to CA3. In this case, the player performs a stop operation to stop the desired symbols. It will be.

  (42) When the final effect is executed in the continuous effect, the fish character CH1 may be gradually moved toward the destination side in accordance with the position of the player's hand performing the horizontal sink operation. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the fish character CH1 has been moved by his own flowing operation. In the configuration, in the case of the completion effect, a display is performed in which the fish character CH1 moves to the end on the destination side according to the position of the player's hand. On the other hand, in the case of an incomplete production, the fish character CH1 follows up to the limit line BL up to the limit line BL, but returns to the end of the appearance side when the fish character CH1 reaches the limit line BL. Display that is retracted from the display to the outside of the display surface is performed.

  (43) The fish character CH1 may be moved to the end on the destination side according to the position of the player's hand. However, in order to distinguish it from the completion effect, even if it moves to the end on the destination side in the previous notice effect, the display disappears so as to move from the end on the destination side to the outside of the display surface. It is preferable that the configuration is not broken.

  (44) Instead of a configuration in which a display is performed in which the amount of movement in a predetermined movement direction of the fish character CH1 changes according to the position of the player's hand, the character is displayed on the display surface according to the position of the player's hand. It may be configured such that a display effect that appears on the display screen or disappears from the display surface is displayed, and the character appears on the display surface, disappears from the display surface, or has the predetermined motion when the movement of the player's hand is a predetermined motion. It is good also as a structure by which the display effect to perform is performed.

  (45) The confrontation effect may be re-executed when a draw result is obtained. However, since it is not preferable that the display duration time for the game times fluctuates accordingly, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the confrontation effect is executed within the range defined as the confrontation effect execution period. . For example, a confrontation effect in which an appearance target result on the side of the pachinko machine 10 is selected regardless of the selection target result selected by the player is executed first, but if the result is a draw result, the selection target selected by the player It is good also as a structure which attaches the conclusion of the said confrontation effect compulsorily by selecting the appearance object result by the side of the pachinko machine 10 based on a result. In this case, when the draw result occurs a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times determined in advance), the winning lottery process is executed in the next confrontation effect to determine either the victory result or the defeat result. If the result is a victory result, the appearance target result in which the player's selection target result is the victory result is derived from the selection target result. If the result is a defeat result, the player's selection target result is the defeat result. The appearance target result is derived from the selection target result. This makes it possible to settle the confrontation effect within a predetermined period.

  (46) In the case where the post-out prohibition effect is executed, the lottery process of the appearance target result is executed after the player's selection target result is confirmed, and an image of the appearance target result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Also good. Even in this case, the content of the effect performed after that changes according to the selection target result selected by the player.

  (47) The fact that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode can be the low-frequency support mode, and that the transition occurs at the time of transition to the latent state cannot be recognized from the effect contents of the pachinko machine 10 Or it is good also as a structure which is hard to recognize. In this case, the confrontation effect that occurs in the latent state results in a victory result regardless of the selection target result selected by the player, and occurs in the non-latent state where the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In such a confrontation effect, a non-winning result is obtained regardless of the selection target result selected by the player, so that the confrontation effect can be used to notify whether the player is in a latent state. Alternatively, a confrontation effect that occurs in the latent state can be a winning result according to the player's selection target result, and a confrontation effect that occurs in the non-latent state does not win regardless of the player's selection target result. A resulting configuration may be used.

  (48) In the confrontation effect, in the game round of the jackpot result in which the special reach A effect occurs, an effect that can be added later is executed with a predetermined probability, and when it is a victory result, the special reach A effect for premium is executed, If it is a non-winning result, a special reach A production for non-premium jackpot is executed, and a forced production is executed at a game result of a losing result in which the special reach A production occurs, resulting in a non-winning result. It is good also as a structure.

  (49) When the start condition of the second confrontation effect in which one of the small bubble effect and the large bubble effect occurs as the notice effect according to the result of the confrontation effect, the configuration is limited to a configuration in which only an effect that can be put out later is executed. It may be configured that the compulsory effect can be executed, or can be configured such that an effect that cannot be performed later can be executed.

  (50) The content of the notice effect executed according to the result of the second confrontation effect is not limited to the small bubble effect and the large bubble effect. For example, if the result is a victory result, the fish effect is executed. In the case of a non-winning result, a bubble effect is executed, and the type of character used in the notice effect is completely different between a winning result and a non-winning result. It is good.

  (51) Instead of the configuration in which the “janken effect” is executed as the confrontation effect, a configuration in which the “quiz effect” is executed may be employed. In this case, for the quiz given on the symbol display device 61, the player expresses “O” or “X” by the movement of the hand. The configuration specified by Then, if the answer is correct for the quiz, an effect corresponding to the correct answer is executed thereafter, and if the answer is incorrect, the effect corresponding to the incorrect answer is executed thereafter. In this case, as a post-production effect, the correct answer is displayed on the symbol display device 61 before the time limit for the player to present an answer elapses.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which "a hoi effect is turned away" is performed as a confrontation effect. In this case, the opponent character displayed on the symbol display device 61 is displayed to move his / her face up / down / left / right, whereas the player shows his / her finger up / down / left / right. A win result is obtained when the face of the opponent character faces in the indicated direction, and a non-win result is obtained when the face of the opponent character does not face in the direction indicated by the player. In this configuration, the direction in which the player's finger indicates is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71. In this case, as a post-production effect, the face direction of the opponent character as the appearance target result is displayed before the time limit for presenting the player's selection target result has elapsed. Contrary to the above configuration, the player moves his / her face up / down / left / right, while the opponent character displayed on the symbol display device 61 shows up / down / left / right with a finger. In this configuration, the direction in which the player's face is facing is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71. In this case, as a later-stage effect, the finger direction of the opponent character as the appearance target result is displayed before the limit period for presenting the selection target result of the player has elapsed.

  Further, a “card selection effect” may be executed as a confrontation effect. In this case, in the symbol display device 61, the winning card indicated to be hit on the front surface and the detaching card indicated to be disengaged on the surface are displayed at the same time, and the cards in the state where the cards are turned over are displayed. If the card selected by the player after the placement position is shuffled is a winning card, the winning result is obtained. If the card selected by the player is a removed card, the winning result is obtained. In this configuration, which card the player has selected is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71. In this case, the post-production effect includes a configuration in which the arrangement position is shuffled in a state where the front of the card is shown. In the case of this configuration, when the player selects a card, a plurality of operation effective ranges are set corresponding to the display position of each card, but the operation effective range corresponding to the winning card corresponds to the outlier card. It is preferable that the priority for the production operation is set higher than the effective operation range. Thereby, even when a production operation is performed simultaneously on a plurality of operation effective ranges, it is possible to give priority to the selection of a winning card.

  Further, a “chick selection effect” may be executed as a confrontation effect. In this case, one chick and a plurality of opaque cups are displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the player selects after shuffling the placement positions of the plurality of cups in a state where the chick is covered with one cup. If there is a chick in the cup, the result is a win. If there is no chick in the cup selected by the player, the result is a non-win. In the configuration, which cup is selected by the player is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71. In this case, as a later-stage production, before the time limit for presenting the player's selection target result has elapsed, a display in which a part of the chick is exposed from the cup containing the chick or the cup vibrates is displayed. Configurations that can be performed are listed.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which a "cutter half effect" is performed as a confrontation effect. In this case, when the display for determining the half is performed on the symbol display device 61 and the result selected by the player in the half is coincident with the result finally displayed on the symbol display device 61 in the half Will result in a win, and if the results do not match, the result will be a non-win. In this configuration, which one of the halves the player has selected is specified based on the imaging result of the imaging board 71. In this case, the post-stage effect includes a configuration in which the result of the half on the pachinko machine 10 side is displayed before the time limit for presenting the selection target result of the player has elapsed.

  (52) In the confrontation production, the winning expectation of the game ball is not changed between the case where the victory result is obtained and the case where the result is non-winning. A configuration that is more advantageous for the player in consideration of the expected degree of acquisition of the game ball than the case may be adopted. For example, the opening / closing execution mode may be generated when a victory result is achieved in a confrontation effect, and the opening / closing execution mode may not be generated when a non-winning result is achieved. The opening / closing execution mode with a large number of round games may occur, and if the result is a non-winning result, the opening / closing execution mode with a small number of round games may be generated. May be configured such that the winning / rafting lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the low probability mode when a non-winning result is obtained.

  (53) A configuration in which the first notification effect, the second notification effect, the division effect, the continuous effect, and the confrontation effect are not limited to be executed as effects for game times, and are executed as effects for the opening / closing execution mode. It is good. Further, the stop operation effect is not limited to the configuration that is executed as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and may be configured as an effect for the game times.

  (54) When a jackpot result is obtained, instead of a configuration for shifting to an opening / closing execution mode in which an expected rate of acquisition of game balls per unit number of shots is improved, a configuration in which game balls are paid out may be used.

  (55) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the stage member 68 is provided as a half mirror, and the stage member 68 may be configured to be colorless and transparent or colored and transparent and not have a beam splitter function. .

  (56) The signal processing circuit 75 may have a configuration in which the reference intensity of the imaging signal that is a criterion for determining whether or not to obtain the distance data is set in three, four, or five or more stages instead of two. In this case, it is preferable that the number of operation positions of the reference switch 91a correspond to the number of steps of the reference intensity on a one-to-one basis so that a plurality of reference intensity setting operations can be performed.

  (57) Based on the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71 acquired when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the supply of operating power is started, the reference switch 91a is arranged at the ON position in each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which one of the process when it is present and the process when it is disposed at the OFF position. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the distance data based on the first reference strength is used in the same manner as in the processing when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the OFF position in each of the above embodiments. The process for deriving is performed. As a result, the number of pixels from which the distance data corresponding to the imaging device 73 side is derived from the window panel 22 in each pixel of the pixel array unit 73c is a predetermined number (for example, 50% of the number of pixels of the pixel array unit 73c). ), The distance data is derived based on the processing when the reference switch 91a is arranged at the OFF position in each of the above embodiments. If the number is a predetermined number or more, the reference switch 91a is turned on in each of the above embodiments. The distance data is derived based on the processing in the case of being arranged at the position. As a result, even if the reference switch 91a is not provided, it is possible to automatically cope with the presence / absence of the anti-electric wave sheet PS. In addition, it is possible to change the manner in which the distance data is derived depending on whether or not a fingerprint is attached to the surface 22a of the window panel 22.

  (58) In the configuration in which the priority of the presentation operation is set when a plurality of operation effective ranges are set simultaneously, the priority depends on whether or not the game times in which the operation presentation occurs corresponds to the jackpot result May be configured to be switched. For example, if two operation effective ranges are set in the horizontal direction in the split effect, the left operation effective range has a higher priority than the right operation effective range in game times that do not correspond to the jackpot result. In the game times that are set and correspond to the jackpot result, the right operation effective range may have a higher priority than the left operation effective range. In this case, when the production operation is performed on the right operation effective range, a production having a higher expectation level that is a jackpot result is executed than when the production operation is performed on the left operation effective range. By doing so, priority is given to the production operation corresponding to the production of the side with low expectation in the game times not corresponding to the jackpot result, and the side with high expectation in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result It is possible to give priority to the production operation corresponding to the production.

  (59) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the distance data is derived based on the light reception result in the imaging device 73, and the configuration may be such that the distance data is derived based on the result received by the receiving unit using ultrasonic waves. In addition, the distance data may be derived based on the result received by the receiving unit using an electric field or a magnetic field.

  (60) A virtual two-dimensional plane (for one frame) according to the positional relationship between a player's actual viewpoint or virtual viewpoint and a selection operation target reference such as a selection image or a selection target member (for example, movable object unit 38). The position of the player's hand data in the image) may be corrected.

  For example, the height position of the player's viewpoint is extracted in advance in the height position monitoring process or the like in each of the above embodiments, and the hand is based on a virtual line connecting the extracted height position and the selection target criterion. A configuration in which the height position and the lateral position of the data are corrected may be employed. Since the hand is closer to the position of the viewpoint as the position where the production operation is performed is farther in front of the pachinko machine 10 than the window panel 22, the hand reaches the surface 22a of the window panel 22 based on the three-dimensional inclination and position of the virtual line. Assuming that the position is extended, the height position and the lateral position of the hand data are corrected.

  Further, for example, when data corresponding to the height position of a general player's viewpoint is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94, hand data based on a virtual line connecting the viewpoint data and the selection target criterion. The height position and the horizontal position may be corrected.

  (61) Instead of the configuration in which the display controller 96 is controlled by the sound emission controller 91 based on the command output from the main controller 81, display control is performed based on the command output from the main controller 81. The device 96 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 96 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 81, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 81. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 91 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 96 are also arbitrary.

  (62) The device for executing the effect for game times is not limited to the symbol display device 61, and the effect for effect for game times is executed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (63) In the above embodiment, the special figure display unit 62a displays a stop result corresponding to each game result. However, instead of this, the special figure display unit 62a may be omitted. Even if it is a game result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed in the special figure display part 62a, and a special figure display part 62a is eventually displayed by displaying a stop result in the special figure display part 62a at random. It is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result is from the display.

  (64) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
Adjustment means (step S805 in the signal processing circuit 75) that prevents the state information from being derived from the light reception result of the cancellation target or prevents the cancellation target information included in the state information from being used in the specific processing. , A function of executing the processing of step S808 and step S810, a function of executing the processing of step S910 to step S911 and step S1013 in the sound light side MPU 93),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, the adjustment is performed so that the state information is not derived from the light reception result of the cancellation target, or the cancellation target information included in the state information is adjusted so as not to be used in the specific process. Thereby, it is possible to prevent state information that is not appropriate for executing the specific process from being used as it is, and it is possible to appropriately execute the specific process using the state information.

Feature A2. The information deriving means derives the state information based on a light reception result that is not a light reception side cancellation target among light reception results in the light receiving unit,
The adjusting means includes
Cancel target specifying means for specifying whether or not the state-side cancel target information is included in the state information derived by the information deriving means (a function for executing the processes of steps S910 and S1009 in the sound light side MPU 93); ,
When it is specified that the state-side cancel target information is included in the state information by the cancel target specifying unit, the state-side cancel target information is not used in the specifying process. Adjustment execution means (function to execute the processing of step S911 and step S1013 in the sound light side MPU 93);
The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising:

  According to the feature A2, since the state information is derived based on the light reception result that is not the cancellation target, for example, when the light reception result including noise is received, the state information corresponding to the noise portion is derived as it is. Is prevented. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately derive the state information. In addition, when the derived state information includes information on a cancel target that is different from the cancel target on the light reception result, adjustment is made so that the information on the cancel target is not used in the specifying process. Thereby, it is possible to appropriately execute the specific process using the state information.

  In particular, the process for excluding the cancellation target is executed in each of the case where the state information is derived from the light reception result and the case where the derived state information is used in the specific process. This makes it possible to execute a process different from the specific process using the state information including the information to be canceled, as compared to the configuration in which all the cancellation targets are excluded when the state information is derived. Compared to the configuration performed on the state information from which the exclusion is derived, the processing load of the adjustment process can be reduced.

Feature A3. The specific execution means is
An effect specific execution means (function to execute an operation effect control process in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes an effect specifying process using the state information;
Anomaly monitoring specific execution means (function to execute face authentication processing, first status monitoring processing, and second status monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes an abnormal monitoring specific processing using the status information; ,
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A3, not only the specific process for performance but also the specific process for abnormality monitoring is executed using the state information. As a result, the configuration for deriving the state information in a non-contact manner can be used for both production and abnormality monitoring, and the configuration can be used effectively.

  Feature A4. The adjusting means prevents the information to be canceled from being used in the specific process when the state information is used in the specific process for the production, and the state information is used for the abnormality monitoring. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein when used in a specific process, the information to be canceled is used in the specific process.

  According to the feature A4, it is possible to execute the effect using accurate state information by preventing the information to be canceled from being used when the effect is executed. On the other hand, since the information to be canceled can be regarded as information different from the regular information, the information to be canceled can be used by using the information to be canceled in the specific process for monitoring the abnormality. Abnormality monitoring can be performed.

Feature A5. The information deriving means has a plurality of the light receiving portions so as to exist over a predetermined range, and derives the state information for the monitoring range by deriving unit state information based on the light reception results in each of the light receiving portions. Is what
The adjustment unit prevents the unit state information corresponding to the information to be canceled among the unit state information acquired based on the light reception results in the plurality of light receiving units from being used in the specifying process, and The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein unit state information not corresponding to information is used in the specific process.

  According to the feature A5, even if the status information includes the information to be canceled, the information to be canceled is excluded from the information to be canceled and is used in the specifying process. Compared to a configuration in which the included state information is not used at all in the specifying process, the specifying process using the state information can be executed earlier.

  Feature A6. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5.

  According to the feature A6, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specifying process is executed using the position information. Therefore, the specifying process is executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature A7. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the adjusting means handles position information corresponding to a distance from a distance measurement reference less than the adjustment target distance as the information to be canceled.

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to prevent information corresponding to an object existing on the rear side of the gaming machine from a predetermined reference from being executed in the specific process. As a result, it is possible to extract only information corresponding to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine from the predetermined reference and execute the specific process.

Feature A8. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving part is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel part,
The game according to Feature A6 or A7, characterized in that the adjustment means handles position information corresponding to being present behind the gaming machine from the window panel as the information to be canceled. Machine.

  According to the feature A8, it is determined whether or not the position information is to be used in the specific process based on whether or not it exists in front of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel. As a result, even if the light receiving unit is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit, an object existing on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit is to be monitored for the specific process. The possibility of misidentification is reduced.

  Feature A9. The adjustment means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine from the position information corresponding to the existence on the rear side of the gaming machine from the front side of the window panel part or the position determined in front of the gaming machine from the front side. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein position information corresponding to being held is handled as information to be canceled.

  According to the feature A9, when a fingerprint or a foreign object is attached to the window panel, it is possible to prevent position information corresponding to the fingerprint or the foreign object from being used in the specifying process.

  Feature A10. A special process for executing special processing when an event corresponding to the cancellation target continues or when the state information corresponding to the cancellation target information is continuously derived by the information deriving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, comprising execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1013 to S1015 in the sound light side MPU 93).

  The case where the situation where the information to be canceled is derived as the state information continues is a case where some abnormality has occurred. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature A10, when such a situation continues, special processing is executed. For example, the cause of the game hall manager or the like continuing the situation. It is possible to prompt them to resolve.

Feature A11. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving part is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel part,
The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit,
The adjusting means treats position information corresponding to the presence on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel portion as the information to be canceled,
The special execution means is the special execution means when position information corresponding to being present behind the gaming machine from the window panel portion is continuously derived by the information deriving means over an abnormality determination period. The gaming machine according to Feature A10, wherein the gaming machine executes processing.

  If a state where some foreign matter is present behind the gaming machine from the window panel portion continues, there is a possibility that an illegal act using the foreign matter has been performed. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature A11, when such a situation continues, a special process is executed. For example, the management of a game hall or the like causes the situation to continue. It is possible to prompt them to resolve.

Feature A12. The game area where the game ball flows down is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine through the window panel portion,
The abnormality determination period is set as a period longer than a maximum period assumed as a period required for the game ball to pass through the monitoring range when the game ball normally flows down the game area. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, which is characterized.

  According to the feature A12, it is possible to prevent the special process from being executed when the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the monitoring range.

Feature A13. The adjustment means is located on the rear side of the gaming machine from the position information corresponding to the existence on the rear side of the gaming machine from the front side of the window panel part or the position determined in front of the gaming machine from the front side. The position information corresponding to the information being handled as the information to be canceled,
The special execution means exists on the rear side of the gaming machine from the position information corresponding to the existence on the rear side of the gaming machine from the front side of the window panel part or the position determined in front of the gaming machine from the front side. The gaming machine according to the feature A11 or A12, wherein the special processing is executed when position information corresponding to being performed is continuously derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature A13, since special processing is executed when a fingerprint or a foreign object is attached to the window panel, it is possible to urge a game hall manager or the like to cancel the state. .

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to any one of features A10 to A13, wherein the special execution unit is configured to prevent the specific execution unit from executing the specific process as the special process.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to cause the specific process to be executed under an appropriate situation by preventing the specific process from being executed when any abnormality occurs.

Feature A15. The specific execution means executes, as the specific process, a process for specifying a player's action using the state information and executing an effect corresponding to the action,
Any one of features A10 to A14, wherein the special execution means executes, as the special process, a process for giving a restriction on the execution content of the effect using the state information or the presence or absence of the execution. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A14, when some abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, a restriction is imposed on the execution of the effect using the state information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from being performed using the abnormal state information.

Feature A15. The specific execution means specifies, as the specifying process, that the presentation operation has been performed when the player's hand is present in the operation effective range in front of the gaming machine rather than the front of the gaming machine, and corresponds to the presentation operation. It performs processing to make the production run,
The game machine according to Feature A14, wherein the special execution means sets the effective mode setting mode as a limited mode as the special processing.

  According to the feature A15, when any abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, a restriction is imposed on the setting mode of the operation effective range. As a result, there is a possibility that inconvenience that the operation content of the player does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while the effect using the state information can be executed even in the situation where the abnormality occurs. It becomes possible to reduce.

  Feature A16. The special execution means executes, as the special process, a process for reducing the number of effective operation ranges set at one time as compared with a case where the special process is not executed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A16, when some abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, the number of operation effective ranges set at one time is limited to be small, so that one operation effective range is ensured to be large. It becomes possible. As a result, there is a possibility that inconvenience that the operation content of the player does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while the effect using the state information can be executed even in the situation where the abnormality occurs. It becomes possible to reduce.

  Feature A17. The game machine according to any one of features A10 to A16, wherein the special execution means executes a process for causing notification to be executed as the special process.

  According to the feature A17, when a situation in which abnormal state information is derived continues, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to eliminate the cause.

Feature A18. The adjusting means includes
First adjustment means (step S805 in the signal processing circuit 75) for deriving the state information by the information deriving means when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to a signal intensity equal to or higher than the first criterion. Function to execute processing)
Second adjustment means (step S808 in the signal processing circuit 75) for deriving the state information by the information deriving means when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to a signal intensity equal to or higher than a second determination criterion. Function to execute processing)
With
The specific execution means is characterized in that execution contents of the specific process differ between when the adjustment is performed by the first adjustment means and when the adjustment is performed by the second adjustment means. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A17.

  According to the feature A18, since the signal strength determination criterion for determining whether or not to derive the state information based on the light reception result is changed according to the situation, the light reception result to be canceled is changed according to each situation. It becomes possible to change. This makes it possible to derive state information corresponding to each situation. In this case, the execution content of the specific process is different according to the determination criterion. As a result, the execution contents of the specific process can be made different according to the accuracy of the state information, and the specific process can be appropriately executed.

  Feature A19. The specific execution means executes, as the specifying process, a process for specifying a player's action using the state information and executing an effect corresponding to the action. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18.

  In the configuration in which it is detected in a non-contact manner whether or not the player has performed a predetermined performance operation, it is possible to achieve the effects as described above.

Feature A20. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
Adjustment means (step S805 in the signal processing circuit 75) that prevents the status information from being derived from the reception result of the cancellation target or prevents the cancellation target information included in the status information from being used in the specific processing. , A function of executing the processing of step S808 and step S810, a function of executing the processing of step S910 to step S911 and step S1013 in the sound light side MPU 93),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A20, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, the configuration is adjusted so that the status information is not derived from the reception result of the cancellation target, or is adjusted so that the cancellation target information included in the status information is not used in the specific process. Thereby, it is possible to prevent state information that is not appropriate for executing the specific process from being used as it is, and it is possible to appropriately execute the specific process using the state information.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features A1 to A20, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
When the light reception result of the light receiving unit is an abnormality response result or when the state information corresponds to the abnormality response information, special execution means for executing special processing (the processing of steps S1013 to S1015 in the sound light side MPU 93 is performed). Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, a special process is executed when the light reception result of the light receiving unit is an abnormality response result or when the state information corresponds to the abnormality response information. As a result, when any abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall, for example, to eliminate the cause of continuing the situation.

  Feature B2. The special execution means determines that an event in which the light reception result corresponds to the abnormality response result continues for an abnormality determination period or more, or an event in which the state information corresponds to the abnormality response information is determined to be abnormal. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the special processing is executed when the processing continues for a period of time or more.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to prevent the special processing from being executed for sudden noise generation or the like.

Feature B3. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving part is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel part,
The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit,
The special execution means is the special execution means when position information corresponding to being present behind the gaming machine from the window panel portion is continuously derived by the information deriving means over an abnormality determination period. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, wherein the gaming machine executes processing.

  If a state where some foreign matter is present behind the gaming machine from the window panel portion continues, there is a possibility that an illegal act using the foreign matter has been performed. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the feature B3, when such a situation continues, special processing is executed. For example, a management of a game hall or the like causes the situation to continue. It is possible to prompt them to resolve.

Feature B4. The game area where the game ball flows down is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine through the window panel portion,
The abnormality determination period is set as a period longer than a maximum period assumed as a period required for the game ball to pass through the monitoring range when the game ball normally flows down the game area. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, which is characterized.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to prevent the special process from being executed when the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the monitoring range.

  Feature B5. The special execution means exists on the rear side of the gaming machine from the position information corresponding to the existence on the rear side of the gaming machine from the front side of the window panel part or the position determined in front of the gaming machine from the front side. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the special processing is executed when position information corresponding to being performed is continuously derived by the information deriving means.

  According to the feature B5, since special processing is executed when a fingerprint or a foreign object is attached to the window panel, it is possible to urge a game hall manager or the like to cancel the state. .

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the special execution unit is configured to prevent the specific execution unit from executing the specific process as the special process.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to execute the specific process under an appropriate situation by preventing the specific process from being executed when an abnormality has occurred regarding the acquisition of the state information. Become.

Feature B7. The specific execution means executes, as the specific process, a process for specifying a player's action using the state information and executing an effect corresponding to the action,
Any one of the characteristics B1 to B6, wherein the special execution means executes, as the special process, a process for giving a restriction on an execution content of the effect using the state information or execution presence / absence thereof. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B7, when any abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, a restriction is imposed on the execution of the effect using the state information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance from being performed using the abnormal state information.

Feature B8. The specific execution means specifies, as the specifying process, that the presentation operation has been performed when the player's hand is present in the operation effective range in front of the gaming machine rather than the front of the gaming machine, and corresponds to the presentation operation. It performs processing to make the production run,
The game machine according to Feature B7, wherein the special execution means sets the effective mode setting mode as a limited mode as the special processing.

  According to the feature B8, when any abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, a restriction is imposed on the setting mode of the operation effective range. As a result, there is a possibility that inconvenience that the operation content of the player does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while the effect using the state information can be executed even in the situation where the abnormality occurs. It becomes possible to reduce.

  Feature B9. The special execution means executes, as the special process, a process for reducing the number of effective operation ranges set at one time as compared with a case where the special process is not executed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B9, when some abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, the number of operation effective ranges set at one time is limited to be small, so that one operation effective range is ensured to be large. It becomes possible. As a result, there is a possibility that inconvenience that the operation content of the player does not correspond to the execution content of the effect while the effect using the state information can be executed even in the situation where the abnormality occurs. It becomes possible to reduce.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the special execution unit executes a process for causing notification to be executed as the special process.

  According to the feature B10, when the situation where abnormal state information is derived continues, it is possible to prompt the game hall manager to eliminate the cause.

Feature B11. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
When the reception result of the receiving unit is an abnormality response result or when the state information corresponds to the abnormality response information, special execution means for executing special processing (the processing of steps S1013 to S1015 in the sound light side MPU 93 is performed). Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B11, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, special processing is executed when the reception result of the receiving unit is an abnormality response result or when the state information corresponds to the abnormality response information. As a result, when any abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, it is possible to urge the manager of the game hall, for example, to eliminate the cause of continuing the situation.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
A mode setting means (sound light side) that sets a target mode that is at least one of a derivation mode when the status information is derived from the light reception result and a usage mode of the status information as one of a plurality of types of setting modes A function of executing a reference switch monitoring process in the MPU 93);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since the specific process is performed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, at least one of the state information derivation mode and the usage mode can be changed according to the environment in which the gaming machine is used. Thereby, it is possible to make the execution content of the specific process using the state information appropriate for the environment in which the gaming machine is used.

  Feature C2. The game machine according to Feature C1, wherein the specific execution unit is configured to make the execution content of the specific process different according to the setting mode set by the mode setting unit.

  According to the feature C2, the execution content of the specific process is different according to at least one of the state information derivation mode and the usage mode. As a result, the execution contents of the specific process can be made different according to the accuracy of the state information, and the specific process can be appropriately executed.

Feature C3. It is provided with manually operable setting operation means (reference switch 91a),
The gaming machine according to C1 or C2, wherein the mode setting unit sets one of the plurality of types of setting modes according to an operation of the setting operation unit.

  According to the feature C3, at least one of the state information derivation mode and the usage mode can be changed by manual operation of the setting operation unit. Thereby, according to the environment where a game machine is used, the administrator of a game hall etc. can change at least one among the derivation | leading-out object of state information, and a utilization aspect.

Feature C4. The mode setting means is configured to make a setting for restricting the derivation of the state information in the case of the second situation or a setting for reducing the accuracy of the state information than in the case of the first situation. What to do,
The specific execution means executes, as the specifying process, a process for specifying a player's action using the state information and causing an effect corresponding to the action to be executed, The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, characterized in that in the second situation, a restriction is imposed on the execution contents or presence / absence of execution using the state information.

  According to the feature C4, when a restriction is given regarding the derivation of the state information or when the accuracy of the state information is lowered, a restriction is given regarding the execution of the effect using the state information. Thereby, in the configuration in which the state information is derived in a manner corresponding to the environment in which the gaming machine is used, even if the state information derivation level is reduced, for example, the player's action and the content of the effect do not correspond It is possible to make it difficult to generate such inconveniences.

  Feature C5. The specific execution means specifies, as the specifying process, that the presentation operation has been performed when the player's hand is present in the operation effective range in front of the gaming machine rather than the front of the gaming machine, and corresponds to the presentation operation. A feature C4 is characterized in that a process for performing an effect is executed, and in the case of the second situation, the setting mode of the operation effective range is set as a limiting mode. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C5, when a restriction is imposed on the derivation of the state information or when the accuracy of the state information is lowered, a restriction is imposed on the setting mode of the operation effective range. Thereby, in the configuration in which the state information is derived in a manner corresponding to the environment in which the gaming machine is used, even if the state information derivation level is reduced, for example, the player's action and the content of the effect do not correspond It is possible to make it difficult to generate such inconveniences.

  Feature C6. The characteristic execution unit according to C5, wherein the specific execution unit is configured to reduce the number of operation effective ranges set at a time in the second situation as compared to the case in the first situation. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C6, when the derivation level of the state information is reduced, the number of operation effective ranges set at a time is limited so that one operation effective range can be secured large. Become. Thereby, in the configuration in which the state information is derived in a manner corresponding to the environment in which the gaming machine is used, even if the state information derivation level is reduced, for example, the player's action and the content of the effect do not correspond It is possible to make it difficult to generate such inconveniences.

Feature C7. The information deriving means includes
First information deriving means for deriving the state information based on the light reception result when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to a signal intensity equal to or higher than the first determination criterion (the processing of step S806 in the signal processing circuit 75 is performed). Function to execute)
Second information for deriving the state information based on the light reception result when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to a signal strength equal to or higher than a second determination criterion corresponding to a signal strength lower than the first determination criterion. Derivation means (function to execute the processing of step S809 in the signal processing circuit 75);
With
In the first situation, the state setting means causes the state information to be derived by the first information deriving means, and in the second situation, the state information is derived by the second information deriving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that:

  According to the feature C7, since the signal strength determination criterion for determining whether or not to derive the state information based on the light reception result is changed according to the situation, the light receiving unit receives light corresponding to the monitoring target. It becomes possible to derive the state information according to the ease.

Feature C8. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit,
The aspect setting means includes:
First mode setting means for setting position information corresponding to a distance from the distance measurement reference that is equal to or less than the reference distance to be used in the specifying process (function for executing the process of step S807 in the signal processing circuit 75) When,
Second mode setting means for setting the position information corresponding to the distance from the distance measurement reference equal to or less than the reference distance to be not used in the specifying process (function for executing the process of step S811 in the signal processing circuit 75) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, comprising:

  According to the feature C8, the position information can be derived in a manner corresponding to the environment within a range that is equal to or less than the reference distance.

Feature C9. Provided on the front side of the gaming machine, comprising a window panel portion (window panel 22) that allows the gaming area where gaming balls flow down to be visible from the front of the gaming machine,
The light receiving part is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel part,
The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein the position corresponding to the reference distance is a position in front of the gaming machine with respect to the rear surface of the window panel portion.

  A predetermined film may be attached to the rear surface of the window panel for the purpose of preventing fraud. In this case, there is a state in which position information corresponding to a distance equal to or less than a reference distance from the rear surface of the window panel portion to a position in front of the gaming machine is used in the specific process and a state in which the position information is not used When the film is not attached, the range of position information that can be used in the specific process is expanded. On the other hand, when the predetermined film is attached, the specific process is executed while stopping the influence of the film. It becomes possible to do.

Feature C10. The information deriving means includes
First information deriving means for deriving the position information based on the light reception result when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to a signal intensity equal to or higher than the first determination criterion (the process of step S806 in the signal processing circuit 75 is performed). Function to execute)
Second information for deriving the position information based on the light reception result when the light reception result in the light receiving unit corresponds to a signal strength equal to or higher than a second determination criterion corresponding to a signal strength corresponding to the first determination criterion. Derivation means (function to execute the processing of step S809 in the signal processing circuit 75);
With
The mode setting means is configured such that, when the setting by the first mode setting means is performed, the position information is derived by the first information deriving means, and the setting by the second mode setting means is performed. The game machine according to Feature C9, wherein the position information is derived by the second information deriving unit when the second information is derived.

  When the predetermined film is attached to the rear surface of the window panel unit, it is considered that the intensity of light received by the light receiving unit from the monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine is lower than the window panel unit. . In this case, when a predetermined film is attached, even if the light reception result corresponds to a low signal intensity, the position information is derived. As a result, even when a predetermined film is pasted, it is possible to derive position information corresponding to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine from the window panel unit.

Feature C11. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
A mode setting means for setting a target mode that is at least one of a derivation mode when the status information is derived from the reception result and a usage mode of the status information (a reference switch in the sound light side MPU 93) Monitoring function), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C11, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, at least one of the state information derivation mode and the usage mode can be changed according to the environment in which the gaming machine is used. Thereby, it is possible to make the execution content of the specific process using the state information appropriate for the environment in which the gaming machine is used.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features C1 to C11, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the features of the feature A group, the feature B group, and the feature C group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration capable of recognizing the player's operation and appearance in a non-contact manner, for example, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's non-contact operation. It is possible to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. In this case, it is necessary to be able to suitably recognize the player's operation and appearance in a non-contact manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Position specifying means for specifying the position of the recognition target part of the player (function for executing height position monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93);
Effect control means (first notification effect control process and second notification effect in the sound light side MPU 93) that causes the effect processing to be executed in a manner corresponding to the position of the recognition target part specified by the position specifying means. Control process, division effect control process, stop operation effect control process and continuous effect control process)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, it is possible to execute an effect in a manner corresponding to the position of the recognition target portion of the player. Therefore, the degree of attention to the production can be increased.

  Feature D2. The game machine according to Feature D1, wherein the position specifying means specifies a height position of a part corresponding to a player's eyes or face as a position of a recognition target part.

  According to the feature D2, the visibility of the effect and the operability during the effect can be adjusted according to the eye height position, and the degree of attention to the effect can be increased.

Feature D3. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (information processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
The position specifying means includes
Extraction means for extracting the recognition target part using the state information derived by the information deriving means (function for executing the process of step S1111 in the sound light side MPU 93);
Position grasping means for grasping the position of the recognition target part using the extraction information extracted by the extracting means (function for executing the process of step S1113 in the sound light side MPU 93);
A gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D3, the position of the recognition target part can be specified in a non-contact manner without requiring a player's operation.

  The information deriving means replaces the configuration in which the state information of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit can be derived, and the information deriving unit determines the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit. The state information may be derived.

Feature D4. The production control means includes
A process for specifying that the production operation has been performed when the player's hand is present in the operation effective range in front of the gaming machine from the front of the gaming machine and performing the production corresponding to the production operation. Operation corresponding control means (steps S1709 to S1711, steps S1809 to S1816, steps S2009 to S2015, steps S2210 to S2215, steps S2510 to S2513 and steps S2607 to S2610 in the sound light side MPU 93) Function to execute)
When identifying whether or not the player's hand is present in the effective operation range, position correspondence adjusting means (steps S1707 and S1807 in the sound light side MPU 93) that performs adjustment based on the result of specifying the position specifying means. Step S2007, Step S2207, Step S2508, and Step S2605)
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, comprising:

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to specify whether or not a hand exists in the effective operation range according to the position of the recognition target part of the player, and therefore, the player's presentation operation and the corresponding operation are performed. The possibility that the content of the produced performance does not match is reduced.

Feature D5. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (information processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Both the specification of the position of the recognition target part by the position specifying means and the specification of the position of the player's hand with respect to the effective operation range by the operation response control means are performed using the state information. A gaming machine according to Feature D4.

  According to the feature D5, the state information can be used both for specifying the position of the recognition target part and specifying the presence / absence of the presentation operation, and the configuration is simplified compared to the configuration in which each specification is performed by another means. Can be achieved. In addition, since the presence / absence of the production operation is specified using the state information used when specifying the position of the recognition target part, the position of the recognition target part is determined under the condition when the presence / absence of the production operation is specified. It becomes possible to specify, and the effect of using the result of specifying the position of the recognition target part when specifying the presence or absence of the production operation is enhanced.

  The information deriving means replaces the configuration in which the state information of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit can be derived, and the information deriving unit determines the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit. The state information may be derived.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to claim D4 or D5, wherein the position correspondence adjusting unit adjusts the position of the effective operation range based on a result of the position specifying unit.

  According to the feature D6, the position of the operation effective range can be set to a position corresponding to the position of the recognition target part of the player, and the presence / absence of the production operation can be specified accurately.

Feature D7. Provided with display means (symbol display device 61) for producing an effect,
The production control means includes
Means for performing a display for selection in the display means (function of executing the processing of step S1904, step S1905, step S2104 and step S2105 in the sound light side MPU 93);
Means for setting the operation effective range at a position corresponding to the selection display (function for executing the processes of steps S2009, S2210, and S2217 in the sound light side MPU 93);
With
The position correspondence adjusting unit is configured to change the position of the effective operation range to the identification result of the position identification unit while preventing the position where the selection display is performed on the display surface from being changed based on the identification result of the position identification unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6, wherein the gaming machine is adjusted based on the adjustment.

  According to the feature D7, since the player reaches his / her hand toward the display for selection and the hand is in the effective operation range, the player recognizes that the selection operation has been performed on the display for selection. It will be. In this case, since the position of the effective operation range is adjusted while fixing the position of the display for selection, the processing load can be reduced and the range of the display surface is limited as compared with the configuration in which both are adjusted. The degree of freedom of adjustment is increased compared to a configuration in which only the position of the display for selection is adjusted.

Feature D8. Information deriving means (a signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment and the like, a signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) for deriving position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine is provided. ,
The position specifying means specifies the position of the recognition target part when it is specified that the recognition target part exists at a distance of the position specification target range based on the position information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7.

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to specify the position of the recognition target part when the player is in a posture to normally play a game, and the production is performed in a manner corresponding to an incorrect position as the position of the recognition target part. The possibility of being executed is reduced.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features D1 to D8, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
It is determined that the production operation has been performed on the basis of the state information that the predetermined part of the player exists in the operation effective range in front of the gaming machine from the front of the gaming machine, and the production is performed. Effect control means for executing a process for causing an effect corresponding to the operation to be executed (first notice effect control process, second notice effect control process, divided effect control process, stop operation effect control in sound light side MPU 93) Processing and the function of executing continuous effect control processing),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, since it is configured to specify that the presentation operation has been performed when it is specified that the predetermined part of the player exists in the operation effective range, the aspect of the effect operation depends on how the operation effective range is set. Can be diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention to the production can be increased.

  Feature E2. The effect control unit includes a range setting unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S2009 and S2210 in the sound light side MPU 93) that sets a plurality of effective operation ranges at a time. Game machines.

  According to the feature E2, since a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at a time, it is possible for the player to perform a rendering operation such as 2 or 3 selection by moving a predetermined part, thereby improving the operability of the rendering operation. It becomes possible. In addition, since the operation effective range is set in relation to the state information, it is possible to set a plurality of operation effective ranges by one configuration for deriving the state information, and the number of operation effective ranges Accordingly, it is possible to simplify the configuration in that it is not necessary to increase the configuration for detecting operation according to the above.

  Feature E3. The game machine according to Feature E2, wherein the range setting means sets the operation effective range in a horizontal direction when setting a plurality of the operation effective ranges at a time.

  When a game is played in a gaming machine, it is common for the game to be played while sitting on a chair provided in front of the gaming machine. In this case, the height position of the player's viewpoint differs depending on the height of the player's back, but the method of recognizing the operation effective range differs if the height position of the viewpoint is different. Under such circumstances, according to the feature E3, when a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at a time, the operation effective ranges are set in the horizontal direction. Thereby, when grasping the positional relationship between the predetermined part of the player and the operation effective range, it becomes easy to recognize which operation effective range the operation does not take into account the height position of the viewpoint.

  Feature E4. In the feature E2 or E3, the range setting means performs the setting so that a non-effective range exists between the operation effective ranges when a plurality of the operation effective ranges are set at a time. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature E4, when a plurality of operation effective ranges are set at a time, an ineffective range exists between these operation effective ranges. As a result, it becomes difficult for the predetermined part of the player to enter the plurality of effective operation ranges at the same time, so that it is difficult for the inconvenience that the content of the player's performance operation differs from the content of the performance executed for the player. .

Feature E5. Provided with display means (symbol display device 61) for producing an effect,
The production control means includes
A selection display execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S1904, step S1905, step S2104, and step S2105 in the sound light side MPU 93) for performing display for selection in the display means;
Range setting means for setting the operation effective range at a position corresponding to the selection display (function for executing the processes of steps S2009, S2210 and S2217 in the sound light side MPU 93);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, comprising:

  According to the feature E5, since the predetermined part such as the hand is extended in the operation effective range by the player extending the predetermined part such as the hand toward the selection display, the selection operation is performed on the selection display as the player. Will be recognized.

  Feature E6. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the effect control unit is configured to change a setting mode of the operation effective range according to a type of effect.

  According to the feature E6, since the setting mode of the operation effective range differs depending on the type of effect, the operation effect range is diversified and the operation effective range is set in a mode corresponding to each effect. It becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom in the design of the production.

  Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the effect control means is configured to make the number of the effective operation ranges set at a time different according to the type of effect.

  According to the feature E7, since the number of operation effective ranges differs depending on the type of effect, the operation effect modes are diversified and the operation effective range is set in a mode corresponding to each effect. It becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of design of production.

  Feature E8. When the production control means is in a production execution restriction situation (a situation where the restriction flag is set to “1” or a situation where the reference flag is set to “1”), the operation effective range setting mode The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein:

  According to the feature E8, when the execution execution restriction state is set, the setting mode of the operation effective range is limited, and thus the state information is used even when some abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information. It is possible to reduce the possibility of inconveniences such as the player's operation content and the performance execution content not corresponding to each other while the performance can be performed.

  Feature E9. The production control means executes a process for reducing the number of effective operation ranges set at a time in a situation that is not the production execution restriction situation when the production execution restriction situation occurs. The gaming machine according to Feature E8, characterized in that

  According to the feature E9, when the production execution restriction state is reached, the number of operation effective ranges set at a time is limited so that one operation effective range can be secured large. . Thereby, even if some abnormality has occurred regarding the derivation of the state information, there is a disadvantage that the operation contents of the player and the execution contents of the effect do not correspond while enabling the execution of the effect using the state information. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

  Feature E10. When the specified control part of the player who has been present in the operation effective range performs a predetermined action for a predetermined period, the effect control means is configured to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, further comprising means for executing a process for achieving the above.

  According to the feature E10, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a predetermined action of the player.

  Feature E11. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

  According to the feature E11, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specific process is executed using the position information. Therefore, the operation effect is supported in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. It is possible to execute the effect.

Feature E12. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving part is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel part,
The gaming machine according to Feature E11, wherein the effective operation range is set in front of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion.

  According to the feature E12, it is determined whether or not to use the position information as an effect on the basis of whether or not it exists in front of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel. As a result, even if the light receiving part is provided behind the gaming machine behind the window panel part, an object present behind the gaming machine behind the window panel part is misidentified as the occurrence of the operation effect. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

Feature E13. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
It is determined that the production operation has been performed on the basis of the state information that the predetermined part of the player exists in the operation effective range in front of the gaming machine from the front of the gaming machine, and the production is performed. Effect control means for executing a process for causing an effect corresponding to the operation to be executed (first notice effect control process, second notice effect control process, divided effect control process, stop operation effect control in sound light side MPU 93) Processing and the function of executing continuous effect control processing),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E13, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, since it is configured to specify that the presentation operation has been performed when it is specified that the predetermined part of the player exists in the operation effective range, the aspect of the effect operation depends on how the operation effective range is set. Can be diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention to the production can be increased.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features E1 to E13, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the features of the feature group D and the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned example, an effect for expecting a result advantageous to the player is executed, but in order to improve the interest of the game, the degree of attention to the effect is increased. There is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Corresponding control means (step S1711, step S2014, step S2015 and step S2213 in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes processing corresponding to the predetermined operation when it is specified that the predetermined operation of the player is performed in the operation effective range Function to execute processing)
In a situation where a plurality of operation effective ranges are set, priority setting means (step S2010 in the sound light side MPU 93) sets priority for the plurality of operation effective ranges when it is specified that the predetermined operation has been performed. And a function of executing the process of step S2212),
With
When the predetermined operation is performed on a plurality of the effective operation ranges, the response control unit specifies that the predetermined operation is performed on the operation effective range on the higher priority side. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F1, since a plurality of operation effective ranges can be set simultaneously, it is possible to allow the player to perform a selective operation. In this case, in a situation where a plurality of operation effective ranges are set, since the priority for specifying that a predetermined operation has been performed is set, the predetermined operations are simultaneously performed on the plurality of operation effective ranges. Even in such a case, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to a predetermined operation on the operation effective range having a higher priority level.

Feature F2. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (information processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
The correspondence control means specifies that the predetermined operation has been performed when it is specified based on the state information that a player's hand exists in the operation effective range in front of the gaming machine from the front of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein:

  According to the feature F2, since it is configured to specify whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed in the effective operation range using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, the player's operation and state, etc. Can be recognized in a non-contact manner. In this case, if a plurality of operation effective ranges are set, the player may not be able to clearly distinguish the plurality of operation effective ranges, and predetermined operations for the plurality of operation effective ranges are performed simultaneously. There is a concern that On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature F1, even if a predetermined operation is simultaneously performed on a plurality of operation effective ranges, a predetermined operation effective range having a higher priority is predetermined. It is possible to execute processing corresponding to the operation.

  The information deriving means replaces the configuration in which the state information of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit can be derived, and the information deriving unit determines the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit. The state information may be derived.

  Feature F3. The correspondence control means executes a process for causing an effect corresponding to the operation effective range in which the predetermined operation is performed when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed in the operation effective range. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, wherein the gaming machine is a thing.

  According to the feature F3, in the configuration in which an effect corresponding to the effective operation range is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the effective operation range, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above. It becomes.

Feature F4. The correspondence control means includes
First correspondence control means (step in the sound light side MPU 93) that causes the first operation corresponding effect to be performed when the predetermined operation is performed in the first operation effective range among the plurality of set operation effective ranges. The function of executing the processing of S2014 and step S2015),
When the predetermined operation is performed in the second operation effective range among the plurality of operation effective ranges that are set in a plurality, the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur is higher than the first operation corresponding effect. Second response control means (function for executing the process of step S1711 in the sound light side MPU 93) to perform the second operation response effect;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the priority setting means is configured such that the second operation effective range has a higher priority than the first operation effective range.

  According to the feature F4, when a predetermined operation is simultaneously performed in both the first operation effective range and the second operation effective range, execution of the second operation corresponding effect with high expectation is given priority. Thereby, it is possible to increase the chance that the second operation-compatible effect is executed while preventing the first operation-compatible effect and the second operation-compatible effect from occurring at the same time.

  Feature F5. The gaming machine according to Feature F4, wherein the second operation effective range is set at a position above the first operation effective range.

  In the configuration in which the second operation effective range is provided above the first operation effective range, the predetermined operation is also performed in the first operation effective range unintentionally even though the predetermined operation is performed on the second operation effective range. May be identified as having been performed. On the other hand, when the predetermined operation is simultaneously performed in both the first operation effective range and the second operation effective range by providing the configuration of the feature F4, the second operation corresponding effect with high expectation. Since execution of is prioritized, it is possible to execute the second operation corresponding effect.

Feature F6. The correspondence control means includes
Fluctuation display means (function to execute the process of step S2104 in the sound light side MPU 93) for performing a variation display of the pattern in each of the plurality of variation display areas (variation display areas CA1 to CA3);
Range setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2210 in the sound light side MPU 93) for setting a plurality of the effective operation ranges in correspondence with the variable display area;
With
The variation display means includes means for ending the variation display of the pattern in the variation display area corresponding to the operation effective range when the predetermined operation is performed in the operation effective range,
In any one of the features F3 to F5, the priority setting means sets the priority with respect to the plurality of operation effective ranges set corresponding to the variable display area. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature F6, there is an effect in which the variation display of the pattern is performed in the plurality of variation display areas and the variation display of the pattern is stopped in the variation display area where the predetermined operation is performed. In this case, since priority is set for a plurality of operation effective ranges set in correspondence with the variable display area, even if predetermined operations are simultaneously performed on the plurality of operation effective ranges, It is possible to stop the change display according to a predetermined priority.

Feature F7. The variation display means is configured to display three or more variation display areas when starting an effect of performing variation display of a pattern in each of the plurality of variation display areas.
The priority setting unit changes the setting mode of the priority when the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area is stopped and there is still a pattern display area where the variable display of the pattern is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the feature F7, since the priority setting mode is changed as the pattern variation display is stopped, even if the variation display of the pattern in any variation display area is stopped, a plurality of operations are enabled. It is possible to appropriately cope with a predetermined operation performed on the range at the same time.

  Feature F8. When the priority is set by the priority setting means, the pattern variation display in the plurality of variation display regions is stopped for each variation display region with respect to the predetermined operation. A gaming machine according to F6 or F7.

  According to the feature F8, it is possible to sequentially stop the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas with a predetermined operation.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features F1 to F8, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the features of the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration capable of recognizing the player's movement with respect to the effective operation range, for example, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's movement. In this case, it is necessary to appropriately recognize the player's movement, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). Or information deriving means (a signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, a signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G) for one frame;
Operation specifying means (steps S1709, S1809 and S1 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether or not the player's recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means. S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607)
Based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, the specific executing means (steps S1711 and S1815 in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes the specific processing corresponding thereto is performed. Step S1816, Step S2014, Step S2015, Step S2213, Step S2218, Step S2512, Step S2513, Step S2609 and Step S2610)
With
The operation specifying unit executes a specific adjustment process (steps S1706, S1708, and step S1708 in the sound light side MPU 93) for performing a specific adjustment process based on the position information of the recognition target part so that the specific method of the recognition target part is different. S1806, step S1808, step S2006, step S2008, step S2206, step S2208, step S2509, and a function for executing the processing of step S2606).

  According to the feature G1, since the specific process is executed using the position information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In addition, since the position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the identification process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it is possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information.

Feature G2. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). Or information deriving means (a signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, a signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G) for one frame;
Operation specifying means (steps S1709, S1809 and S1 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether or not the player's recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means. S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607)
Based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, the specific executing means (steps S1711 and S1815 in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes the specific processing corresponding thereto is performed. Step S1816, Step S2014, Step S2015, Step S2213, Step S2218, Step S2512, Step S2513, Step S2609 and Step S2610)
With
The operation specifying means executes specific adjustment processing for adjusting the positional relationship between the recognition target part and the effective operation range based on the position information of the recognition target part (step S1708 in the sound light side MPU 93). , A function of executing the processing of step S1808, step S2008, step S2208, step S2509, and step S2606).

  According to the feature G2, since the specific process is executed using the position information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In addition, since the position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the identification process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the positional relationship is adjusted based on the positional information, it is possible to accurately grasp the positional relationship of the recognition target part with respect to the effective operation range.

Feature G3. The operation specifying means is for specifying whether or not the information on the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range in a virtual two-dimensional plane,
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the specific adjustment means adjusts the position of the information of the recognition target part in the virtual two-dimensional plane based on the position information.

  According to the feature G3, since the position of the information on the recognition target part on the virtual two-dimensional plane is directly adjusted based on the position information on the recognition target part, the position of the operation effective range on the virtual two-dimensional plane is recognized. It is not necessary to adjust based on the position information of the target part, and even when there are a plurality of recognition target parts, it is possible to appropriately grasp the positional relationship of each recognition target part with respect to the operation effective range.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein a position in the virtual two-dimensional plane is adjusted for the entire information of the recognition target part.

  According to the feature G4, since the position of the entire recognition target part information is adjusted, the positional relationship of the operation effective range with respect to the entire recognition target part can be appropriately grasped.

  Feature G5. The specific adjustment means specifies whether or not the recognition target part corresponding to the position information corresponding to the position information corresponding to the distance outside the reference target distance range is included in the operation effective range from the distance measurement standard to the front of the gaming machine The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the gaming machine is outside.

  According to the feature G5, since only the recognition target part to be referred to in relation to the position information specifies the positional relation with the operation effective range, it is possible to select the recognition target part to be referred to, and the operation is effective. It becomes possible to appropriately grasp the positional relationship with the range.

  Feature G6. The specific adjusting means excludes a recognition target part corresponding to position information corresponding to a reference target distance or more from being specified as to whether or not it is included in the effective operation range. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G6, for example, when the player's hand is the recognition target part, when the player moves his / her hand without intending to operate in relation to the operation effective range, the operation is performed on the operation effective range. It is possible not to recognize that it is.

  Feature G7. The specific adjustment unit is configured to exclude the specific adjustment unit when the position information corresponding to the closest distance among the recognition target parts corresponds to the reference target distance or more. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G7, it is not necessary to determine whether or not all position information of the recognition target part corresponds to the reference target distance or more, and whether or not one position information corresponds to the reference target distance or more. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the case where it is determined whether or not to exclude the target.

Feature G8. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit.

  According to the characteristic G8, the position information of the recognition target part of the player existing ahead of the gaming machine from the window panel unit is derived using the light receiving unit provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel unit. Therefore, although the distance between the light receiving unit and the recognition target part is increased accordingly, the configuration of the feature G1 makes it possible to appropriately recognize the positional relationship between the recognition target part and the operation effective range based on the position information. Can be done.

  Feature G9. The specifying execution unit is configured to execute an operation-corresponding effect as the specifying process based on the fact that the operation specifying unit specifies that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, wherein the gaming machine executes processing for performing the processing.

  According to the feature G9, in the configuration in which an effect corresponding to the fact that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range is executed, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above.

Feature G10. There are multiple types of corresponding effects in which an effect corresponding to the recognition target part being included in the operation effective range is executed,
The gaming machine according to Feature G9, wherein the specific adjustment unit is configured to make the presence / absence or execution mode of the specific adjustment process different depending on the type of the corresponding effect.

  According to the feature G10, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is changed according to the type of the corresponding effect, it becomes possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part in a manner corresponding to the content of each corresponding effect. .

  Feature G11. The specific adjustment means includes, as the specific adjustment process, a recognition target portion corresponding to position information in which a distance from the distance measurement standard toward the front of the gaming machine is outside the reference target distance range is included in the operation effective range. A non-target determination process (a function for executing the processes of Step S1706, Step S1806, Step S2006, and Step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 93) for determining whether or not it is a specific target is performed. A gaming machine according to Feature G10.

  According to the feature G11, for example, when the player's hand is a recognition target part and the player moves his / her hand without intending the operation in relation to the operation effective range, the operation is performed on the operation effective range. It is possible not to recognize that it is. In addition, by providing the configuration of the feature G10, the relationship between the reference target distance range and the recognition target part can be made to correspond to the corresponding effect, and the recognition target part can be changed in a manner corresponding to the content of each corresponding effect. It becomes possible to specify appropriately.

  Feature G12. The specific adjustment means performs the exclusion determination process when the type of the corresponding effect is a first corresponding effect (first notification effect, second notification effect, split effect and stop operation effect) The gaming machine according to Feature G11, wherein when the type of the corresponding effect is the second corresponding effect (continuous effect and confrontation effect), the exclusion determination process is not executed.

  According to the feature G12, in the case of the first corresponding effect, if the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range, it is specified whether or not the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range. Therefore, in the first corresponding effect, it is possible to prevent the player's operation from being unintentionally recognized as an effect operation. On the other hand, in the case of the second corresponding effect, whether or not the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range is determined regardless of whether or not the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range. Therefore, in the second corresponding effect, it is possible to easily recognize the player's operation as an effect operation.

  Feature G13. In the case where the specifying execution means is the first corresponding effect, the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, so that the corresponding effect is executed. In the case of the second corresponding effect, when it is specified that the recognition target part specified by the operation specifying means has been included in the operation effective range, an effect corresponding thereto is specified. The game machine according to Feature G12, wherein the game machine is executed.

  In the first corresponding effect, it is specified that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range, and the corresponding effect is executed. Therefore, the recognition target part is recognized by the player's positive operation. It is preferable to accurately grasp whether or not there is. On the other hand, since the position corresponding to the operation effective range is specified when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first corresponding effect by including the configuration of the feature G12, It is possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition target part is recognized by the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second corresponding effect, even if it is specified that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range, it is specified that the recognition target part has performed the specific operation without performing the corresponding effect. Since the production corresponding to the case is executed, if the occurrence of the specific action is specified, there is a high possibility that it is an active operation by the player. On the other hand, with the configuration of the feature G12, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the second corresponding effect. Therefore, when a specific operation is performed, it is possible to increase the chance that an effect corresponding to the specific operation is executed.

Feature G14. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving part is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel part,
The specific adjustment means, as the non-target determination process, is a process for excluding a recognition target part corresponding to position information corresponding to a reference target distance or more from being included in the operation effective range. Is to execute
The first corresponding effect is an effect in which a player's hand that is directed toward the window panel portion is the recognition target part.
The second corresponding effect is an effect in which a player's hand that is moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction in front of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel portion is the recognition target part. G12 or G13 The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the first corresponding effect, the player's hand that is directed toward the window panel is recognized as the recognition target part, so the hand that the player has brought near the face is treated as the recognition target part and the corresponding effect. Is not preferred. On the other hand, since the position corresponding to the operation effective range is specified when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first corresponding effect by including the configuration of the feature G12, It is possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition target part is recognized by the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second corresponding effect, the player's hand moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction is recognized as a recognition target part. Therefore, when the occurrence of the movement in the direction is specified, it is the player's active operation. There is a high possibility. On the other hand, with the configuration of the feature G12, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the second corresponding effect. For this reason, it is possible to increase the chances that an effect corresponding to the player's operation is executed.

Feature G15. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). Or information deriving means (a signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, a signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G) for one frame;
Operation specifying means (steps S1709, S1809 and S1 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether or not the player's recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means. S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607)
Based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, the specific executing means (steps S1711 and S1815 in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes the specific processing corresponding thereto is performed. Step S1816, Step S2014, Step S2015, Step S2213, Step S2218, Step S2512, Step S2513, Step S2609 and Step S2610)
With
The operation specifying unit executes a specific adjustment process (steps S1706, S1708, and step S1708 in the sound light side MPU 93) for performing a specific adjustment process based on the position information of the recognition target part so that the specific method of the recognition target part is different. S1806, step S1808, step S2006, step S2008, step S2206, step S2208, step S2509, and a function for executing the processing of step S2606).

  According to the feature G15, since the specific process is executed using the position information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In addition, since the position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the identification process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it is possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information.

Feature G16. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). Or information deriving means (a signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, a signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G) for one frame;
Operation specifying means (steps S1709, S1809 and S1 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether or not the player's recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means. S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607)
Based on the fact that the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, the specific executing means (steps S1711 and S1815 in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes the specific processing corresponding thereto is performed. Step S1816, Step S2014, Step S2015, Step S2213, Step S2218, Step S2512, Step S2513, Step S2609 and Step S2610)
With
The operation specifying means executes specific adjustment processing for adjusting the positional relationship between the recognition target part and the effective operation range based on the position information of the recognition target part (step S1708 in the sound light side MPU 93). , A function of executing the processing of step S1808, step S2008, step S2208, step S2509, and step S2606).

  According to the feature G16, since the specific process is executed using the position information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In addition, since the position information corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target is used, the identification process can be executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the positional relationship is adjusted based on the positional information, it is possible to accurately grasp the positional relationship of the recognition target part with respect to the effective operation range.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features G1 to G16, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to each feature of the feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration capable of recognizing the player's operation and appearance in a non-contact manner, for example, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's non-contact operation. It is possible to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. In this case, it is necessary to be able to suitably recognize the player's operation and appearance in a non-contact manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). Or information deriving means (a signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, a signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G) for one frame;
Operation specifying means (steps S1709, S1809 and S1 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether or not the player's recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means. S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607)
Based on the fact that the operation specifying means has specified that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, specific execution means (step in the sound light side MPU 93) is executed. S1711, Step S1815, Step S1816, Step S2014, Step S2015, Step S2213, Step S2218, Step S2512, Step S2513, Step S2609 and Step S2610)
Specific adjustment means (steps S1706, S1708, and S1806 in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes specific adjustment processing so that the method of specifying the recognition target part in the operation specifying means is different based on the position information of the recognition target part. Step S1808, Step S2006, Step S2008, Step S2206, Step S2208, Step S2509 and Step S2606)
With
There are multiple types of corresponding effects in which an effect corresponding to the recognition target part being included in the operation effective range is executed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific adjustment means is configured to make the presence / absence or execution mode of the specific adjustment process different depending on the type of the corresponding effect.

  According to the feature H1, it is specified whether or not the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and is included in the operation effective range. Based on what has been specified, the corresponding production is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to recognize the player's performance operation in a non-contact manner. In addition, since the position information is used, it is possible to specify the presence / absence of the operation effect in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it is possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information. Moreover, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is changed according to the type of the corresponding effect, it is possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part in a manner corresponding to the content of each corresponding effect.

  Feature H2. The specific adjustment means includes, as the specific adjustment process, a recognition target portion corresponding to position information in which a distance from the distance measurement standard toward the front of the gaming machine is outside the reference target distance range is included in the operation effective range. A non-target determination process (a function for executing the processes of Step S1706, Step S1806, Step S2006, and Step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 93) for determining whether or not it is a specific target is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature H1.

  According to the feature H2, for example, in the case where the player's hand is a recognition target part, when the player moves his / her hand without intending an operation in relation to the operation effective range, the operation is performed on the operation effective range. It is possible not to recognize that it is. Further, the relationship between the reference target distance range and the recognition target part can be made to correspond to the corresponding effect, and the recognition target part can be appropriately specified in a manner corresponding to the content of each corresponding effect.

  Feature H3. The specific adjustment means performs the exclusion determination process when the type of the corresponding effect is a first corresponding effect (first notification effect, second notification effect, split effect and stop operation effect) The gaming machine according to Feature H2, wherein when the type of the corresponding effect is a second corresponding effect (continuous effect and confrontation effect), the exclusion determination process is not executed.

  According to the feature H3, in the case of the first corresponding effect, if the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range, it is specified whether or not the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range. Therefore, in the first corresponding effect, it is possible to prevent the player's operation from being unintentionally recognized as an effect operation. On the other hand, in the case of the second corresponding effect, whether or not the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range is determined regardless of whether or not the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range. Therefore, in the second corresponding effect, it is possible to easily recognize the player's operation as an effect operation.

  Feature H4. In the case where the specifying execution means is the first corresponding effect, the operation specifying means specifies that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, so that the corresponding effect is executed. In the case of the second corresponding effect, when it is specified that the recognition target part specified by the operation specifying means has been included in the operation effective range, an effect corresponding thereto is specified. The game machine according to Feature H3, wherein the game machine is executed.

  In the first corresponding effect, it is specified that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range, and the corresponding effect is executed. Therefore, the recognition target part is recognized by the player's positive operation. It is preferable to accurately grasp whether or not there is. On the other hand, since the position corresponding to the operation effective range is specified when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first corresponding effect by having the configuration of the feature H3, It is possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition target part is recognized by the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second corresponding effect, even if it is specified that the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range, it is specified that the recognition target part has performed the specific operation without performing the corresponding effect. Since the production corresponding to the case is executed, if the occurrence of the specific action is specified, there is a high possibility that it is an active operation by the player. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature H3, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the second corresponding effect. Therefore, when a specific operation is performed, it is possible to increase the chance that an effect corresponding to the specific operation is executed.

Feature H5. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving part is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine from the window panel part,
The specific adjustment means, as the non-target determination process, is a process for excluding a recognition target part corresponding to position information corresponding to a reference target distance or more from being included in the operation effective range. Is to execute
The first corresponding effect is an effect in which a player's hand that is directed toward the window panel portion is the recognition target part.
The feature H3 or H4, wherein the second corresponding effect is an effect in which a player's hand moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction in front of the gaming machine than the window panel portion is the recognition target part. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the first corresponding effect, the player's hand that is directed toward the window panel is recognized as the recognition target part, so the hand that the player has brought near the face is treated as the recognition target part and the corresponding effect. Is not preferred. On the other hand, since the position corresponding to the operation effective range is specified when the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the first corresponding effect by having the configuration of the feature H3, It is possible to accurately grasp whether or not the recognition target part is recognized by the player's positive operation. On the other hand, in the second corresponding effect, the player's hand moved in a direction different from the front-rear direction is recognized as a recognition target part. Therefore, when the occurrence of the movement in the direction is specified, it is the player's active operation. There is a high possibility. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature H3, the positional relationship with the operation effective range is specified regardless of whether or not the recognition target part is included in the reference target distance range in the second corresponding effect. For this reason, it is possible to increase the chances that an effect corresponding to the player's operation is executed.

Feature H6. Position information (distance data) corresponding to the distance to the monitoring target existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment and the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). Or information deriving means (a signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, a signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment) capable of deriving an image G) for one frame;
Operation specifying means (steps S1709, S1809 and S1 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying whether or not the player's recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived by the information deriving means. S2009, step S2210, step S2217, step S2510 and step S2607)
Based on the fact that the operation specifying means has specified that the recognition target part is included in the effective operation range, specific execution means (step in the sound light side MPU 93) is executed. S1711, Step S1815, Step S1816, Step S2014, Step S2015, Step S2213, Step S2218, Step S2512, Step S2513, Step S2609 and Step S2610)
Specific adjustment means (steps S1706, S1708, and S1806 in the sound light side MPU 93) that executes specific adjustment processing so that the method of specifying the recognition target part in the operation specifying means is different based on the position information of the recognition target part. Step S1808, Step S2006, Step S2008, Step S2206, Step S2208, Step S2509 and Step S2606)
With
There are multiple types of corresponding effects in which an effect corresponding to the recognition target part being included in the operation effective range is executed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific adjustment means is configured to make the presence / absence or execution mode of the specific adjustment process different depending on the type of the corresponding effect.

  According to the feature H6, it is specified whether or not the recognition target part is included in the operation effective range using the position information derived based on the reception result in the reception unit, and is included in the operation effective range. Based on what has been specified, the corresponding production is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to recognize the player's performance operation in a non-contact manner. In addition, since the position information is used, it is possible to specify the presence / absence of the operation effect in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. In this case, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is different based on the position information of the recognition target part, it is possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part based on the position information. Moreover, since the method of specifying the recognition target part is changed according to the type of the corresponding effect, it is possible to appropriately specify the recognition target part in a manner corresponding to the content of each corresponding effect.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features H1 to H6, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Display control means for controlling display means (symbol display device 61) so as to have display contents corresponding to the action of the player specified based on the state information (function for executing continuous effect control processing in sound light side MPU 93) When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, since the state information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation or the like in a non-contact manner. In this case, since the display corresponding to the player's action specified based on the state information is performed, the display effect on the display means can be diversified, and the player's action can be reflected in the contents of the display effect. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that they are actively participating in the game.

Feature I2. The display means includes a display surface for displaying an individual image for production,
The display control means controls the display means so that the specific individual image (fish character CH1) is displayed at the position on the display surface corresponding to the position of the recognition target part of the player specified based on the state information. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, wherein:

  According to the feature I2, since the specific individual image is displayed at a position corresponding to the position of the player's hand or the like, a display effect closely related to the operation of the player can be performed.

  Feature I3. The display control means controls display of the display means so that a display effect in which the specific individual image moves from a position on the appearance source side to a position corresponding to the recognition target part is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature I2.

  According to the feature I3, the specific individual image can be moved so as to follow the position of the recognition target part, and it is easy to give the player the impression that the specific individual image has moved according to the player's operation.

  Feature I4. The display control means starts a display effect of displaying the specific individual image at a position corresponding to the recognition target part from a state where the specific individual image is displayed at an initial display position on the display surface. The gaming machine according to Feature I3, wherein:

  According to the feature I4, since the specific individual image moves from the state displayed at the initial display position to the position corresponding to the recognition target part, the impression that the specific individual image has moved according to the player's action. Is easily given to the player.

  Feature I5. Even if it is specified that the recognition target part exists at a position closer to the appearance source than the initial display position in the situation where the specific individual image is displayed at the initial display position, the display control means, The gaming machine according to Feature I4, wherein the display at the initial display position of the specific individual image is continued.

  According to the feature I5, the display of the specific individual image at the initial display position can be continued even when the recognition target part exists at a position corresponding to the outside of the display surface. Even when a player's hand or the like is unintentionally arranged at a position corresponding to the outside, the player can be made aware that the display effect using the specific individual image is being executed. Become.

Feature I6. The display control means includes means for controlling display of the display means such that a display effect is performed in which the specific individual image moves in a predetermined direction regardless of the position of the recognition target part.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein when the specific individual image moves toward the position of the recognition target part, the specific individual image moves in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature I6, it is possible to give the player an impression that the specific individual image moves in a predetermined direction, and the player does not feel uncomfortable when the specific individual image moves toward the position of the recognition target part. It becomes possible to do so.

  Feature I7. The display control means restricts the display position of the specific individual image corresponding to the position of the recognition target part within a display restriction range which is a part of the display surface (steps S2511 to S2511 in the sound light side MPU 93). The gaming machine according to any one of features I2 to I6, which includes a function of executing the processing of step S2513.

  According to the feature I7, it is possible to cause a situation where the display position is restricted when the specific individual image is displayed in correspondence with the player's action, and the content of the display effect is prevented from becoming irregular. It becomes possible to do.

Feature I8. The display control means is configured to perform a display effect in which the specific individual image is moved from an appearance source position to a movement destination position on the display surface,
The display restriction range according to the feature I7, wherein the display restriction range is set as a range up to a middle position in a movement direction when the specific individual image moves from the position of the appearance source to the position of the movement destination. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I8, it is possible to distinguish the display effect in which the specific individual image is displayed in correspondence with the operation of the player from the effect in which the specific individual image passes from the position of the appearance source to the position of the movement destination.

  Feature I9. The display control means is a non-restricting means for displaying the specific individual image at a position outside the display restriction range on the display surface without causing a restriction by the display restriction means when a specific condition is established ( The gaming machine according to feature I7 or I8, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2609 in the sound light side MPU 93).

  According to the characteristic I9, when the specific individual image is displayed in correspondence with the player's action, whether or not the specific condition is satisfied depending on whether or not the display position of the specific individual image is restricted. It is possible to teach a player.

Feature I10. The display control means is configured to perform a display effect in which the specific individual image is moved from an appearance source position to a movement destination position on the display surface,
The display restriction range is set as a range up to a middle position in the movement direction when the specific individual image moves from the position of the appearance source to the position of the movement destination,
The non-restricting means can execute a display effect in which the specific individual image moves past the intermediate position to the destination position according to the position of the recognition target part when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature I9, wherein:

  According to the feature I10, even when the display position of the specific individual image is limited, the specific individual image moves in the same direction as in the case where the display position is not limited to the intermediate position. It is possible to make the player expect that the specific condition is satisfied until it is done.

  Feature I11. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10.

  According to the feature I11, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specific processing is executed using the position information. Therefore, the display content is determined in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. It is possible to execute a process for this.

Feature I12. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Display control means for controlling display means (symbol display device 61) so as to have display contents corresponding to the action of the player specified based on the state information (function for executing continuous effect control processing in sound light side MPU 93) When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I12, since the state information is derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation or the like in a non-contact manner. In this case, since the display corresponding to the player's action specified based on the state information is performed, the display effect on the display means can be diversified, and the player's action can be reflected in the contents of the display effect. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that they are actively participating in the game.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound light side MPU 93) that generates a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) that enables the player to perform a selection operation;
Granting means for performing a selection operation that becomes a bonus generation mode in the selection period (a process of steps S2814, S2917, and S3015 in the sound side MPU 93 is performed) Function)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, since a privilege is given after a selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode is performed in the selection period, a player who expects the grant of the privilege selects the privilege generation mode in the selection period. It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature J2. A selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound light side MPU 93) that generates a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) that enables the player to perform a selection operation;
Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Granting means (sound light side MPU93) for specifying a mode of the selection operation based on the state information and for granting a privilege to a player after a selection operation as a privilege generation mode is performed in the selection period. In step S2814, step S2917 and step S3015).
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J2, since the privilege is given after the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is performed in the selection period, the selection operation performed in the selection period is selected by the player who expects the grant of the privilege. It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the player's selection operation is specified using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, the result of recognizing the player's movement itself in a non-contact manner is handled as the selection operation. Therefore, the content of the selection operation can be made novel. Thereby, the interest improvement of a game is aimed at.

  The information deriving means replaces the configuration in which the state information of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit can be derived, and the information deriving unit determines the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit. The state information may be derived.

Feature J3. A mode storage unit (selection target storage area 95g) for storing a mode of the selection operation specified based on the state information;
When the selection operation is specified based on the state information, the mode storage execution unit (steps S2809, S2909 and S3009 in the sound light side MPU 93) is stored in the mode storage unit. Function to execute)
With
The giving means specifies the mode of the last selection operation performed in the selection period as the current player selection operation by referring to the information stored in the mode storage unit. A gaming machine according to Feature J2, characterized by:

  According to the feature J3, the selection operation performed in the selection period is sequentially stored, and the finally stored selection operation is specified as the selection operation in the current selection period. It is possible to respect the final decision of the player while restraining.

Feature J4. A shape specifying means (function for executing the processing of steps S2807, S2907 and S3007 in the sound light side MPU 93) for specifying the shape of the player's hand based on the state information is provided,
The giving means specifies that the selection operation to be the privilege generation mode is performed when the shape of the hand specified by the shape specification unit is the shape of the privilege generation mode. Or the gaming machine described in J3.

  According to the feature J4, since the mode of the selection operation is specified by the shape of the hand, it is possible to facilitate the operation when the player performs the selection operation while diversifying the mode of the selection operation. .

Feature J5. Data storage means (display control device 96) for storing in advance image data corresponding to the mode of the selection operation;
Data reading means for reading out image data corresponding to the mode of the player's selection operation determined in the selection period from the data storage means (function for executing the processes of steps S2812, S2914 and S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93, display) A control device 96);
Image display execution means (display control device 96) for causing the display means (symbol display device 61) to display an image corresponding to the image data read by the data reading means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, comprising:

  According to feature J5, the mode of the selection operation performed by the player is displayed on the display means, so that the player grasps the mode of the selection operation performed by the player and recognized by the gaming machine. It becomes possible to do. In this case, the mode of selection operation is displayed by an image corresponding to the image data read from the data reading means. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly display the mode of the selection operation as compared with the configuration in which the image of the mode of the selection operation extracted from the state information is displayed as it is. Further, it is possible to clearly display the mode of the selection operation regardless of the accuracy of derivation of the state information in the information deriving unit.

  Feature J6. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5.

  According to the feature J6, since the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit and the mode of the selection operation is grasped using the position information, the game is related to the distance from the distance measurement reference. It becomes possible to recognize a person's hand etc., and to recognize the hand etc. correctly.

Feature J7. Predetermined notification control means (a function for executing the processing of step S2814, step S2815, step S2911, and step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93, the display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine,
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
The game according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein when a selection operation corresponding to the predetermined notification is performed as a privilege generation mode, the selection operation is a selection operation of the privilege generation mode. Machine.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to recognize whether the player's selection operation corresponds to the privilege generation mode in relation to the predetermined notification.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the kind of selection operation | movement corresponding as a privilege generation | occurrence | production aspect is defined with respect to the kind of predetermined alerting | reporting.

  Feature J8. Selection mode display control means (steps S2812, S2914 and S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93) for displaying on the display means (symbol display device 61) the mode of the player's selection operation determined in the selection period is executed. A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, comprising a function and display control device 96).

  According to the feature J8, the mode of the selection operation performed by the engineer is displayed on the display means, so that the player grasps the mode of the selection operation performed by the player and recognized by the gaming machine. It becomes possible to do.

Feature J9. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance, and is characterized in that the presence or absence of the profit is determined regardless of whether or not the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode is performed. Thru | or the game machine of any one of J8.

  According to the feature J9, the selection period can be generated without affecting the profit generation rate.

  Feature J10. When the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode is performed, the granting unit is configured to perform an effect with a higher expected generation degree of the profit in the expected effect than when the selection operation is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature J9, wherein there is a game machine.

  According to the feature J10, in the configuration in which the selection period is generated without affecting the profit generation rate, when a selection operation that is a privilege generation mode is performed, an effect with a high expectation of profit generation is achieved. Since it is executed, it becomes possible to raise the player's awareness of performing the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode.

Feature J11. The effect control means includes a period determining means (a function of executing the process of step S409 in the main MPU 83) for determining an effect continuation period from the start of the expected effect to the end when the expected effect is generated. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to Feature J10, wherein the production continuation period determined by the period determination unit does not vary regardless of whether or not the selection operation as the privilege generation mode is performed.

  According to the feature J11, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the selection operation without affecting the digestion rate of the expected effect.

Feature J12. As a selection result for a player's selection action in the selection period, there are a player's victory result, a player's defeat result, and a draw result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, wherein the granting unit does not generate the selection period again when the result of the draw is reached.

  According to the feature J12, in the configuration in which the selection result in the selection period is arbitrarily changed according to the player's selection operation, the selection period ends even if the result is a draw result. It is possible to set a period required for the process to be a predetermined period.

  Feature J13. The giving means determines whether to determine whether or not the player's selection operation is a privilege generation mode without taking into consideration the player's selection operation mode determined in the selection period (after the sound light side MPU 93) The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a control process that allows a take-out and a control process that cannot be executed later.

  According to the feature J13, since the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is determined at random, it is determined whether or not the privilege is given by the player's selection, and the consciousness to select the selection operation Can be increased.

Feature J14. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected effect, and is a configuration in which whether or not the profit is generated is determined regardless of whether or not the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode is performed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J14, even if the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is determined at random, the presence or absence of the profit does not change depending on whether or not the selection operation becomes the privilege generation mode. It is possible to produce the function and effect described in the feature J13 without affecting the rate.

Feature J15. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance,
When the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode is performed, the granting unit is configured to perform an effect with a higher expected generation degree of the profit in the expected effect than when the selection operation is performed. Yes,
The effect control means is configured to respond to an execution period of an effect that is performed in response to a selection operation that is the privilege generation mode and a selection operation that is performed in response to the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode. The game machine according to the feature J13 or J14, further comprising means for making the execution period of the performance performed in the same time.

  According to the feature J15, when a selection operation that is a privilege generation mode is performed, an effect with a high expectation of profit generation is performed, so the player's awareness of performing the selection operation that is a privilege generation mode Can be increased. In this case, even if the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is determined at random, it is possible to prevent the expected production duration from changing depending on whether or not the selection operation becomes the privilege generation mode. It becomes.

Feature J16. Predetermined notification control means (a function for executing the processing of step S2814, step S2815, step S2911, and step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93, the display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine,
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
When a selection operation corresponding to the predetermined notification is performed as a privilege generation mode, the selection operation is a configuration of selecting the privilege generation mode,
The predetermined notification control means includes pre-end control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2910 to S2911 in the sound light side MPU 93) for performing the predetermined notification before the selection period ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J15.

  According to the feature J16, the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed, and the player side can be forced to enter the privilege generation mode. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the selection period.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the kind of selection operation | movement corresponding as a privilege generation | occurrence | production aspect is defined with respect to the kind of predetermined alerting | reporting.

  Feature J17. The predetermined notification control means includes post-end control means (a function of executing the process of step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93) for performing the predetermined notification after the selection period ends. J16 The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J17, there are both a case where the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed and a case where the selection operation cannot be performed after the predetermined notification is performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of the selection period.

  Feature J18. Control target lottery means (function for executing the process of step S2711 in the sound light side MPU 93) for determining by a lottery which one of the pre-end control means and the post-end control means is to be subjected to the predetermined notification. A gaming machine according to Feature J17, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to feature J18, the case where the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed and the case where the selection operation cannot be performed after the predetermined notification is performed are randomly determined. It becomes possible to diversify the mode of the period.

  Feature J19. The selection period setting means is either the case where the predetermined notification control is performed by the pre-end control means or the case where the predetermined notification control is performed by the post-end control means. The game machine according to Feature J17 or J18, characterized in that is performed in a common mode.

  According to the feature J19, it is possible to cause the player to perform the selection operation after confirming the predetermined notification in any selection period, and to increase the player's attention to the selection period. .

Feature J20. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance,
One of the features J16 to J19, wherein the profit can be generated in the expected effect in which the predetermined notification is performed before the selection period ends by the pre-end control means. Gaming machine.

  According to feature J20, even if the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is made, a profit can be generated. Therefore, the player generates a profit by performing the selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode. It is expected to recognize that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the selection period.

  Feature J21. The game machine according to J20, wherein the pre-end control means is configured to perform the predetermined notification before the selection period ends in the expected effect corresponding to the generation of the profit. .

  According to the feature J21, since the situation where the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is generated occurs in the expected production corresponding to the occurrence of the profit, the self is generated without affecting the profit generation rate. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that a profit has been generated by the selection.

Feature J22. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance,
When the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode is performed, the granting unit is configured to perform an effect with a higher expected generation degree of the profit in the expected effect than when the selection operation is performed. Yes,
The effect control means responds to a case where a selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is performed in the expected effect in which the predetermined notification is performed before the selection period ends by the pre-end control means. It is characterized by comprising means for making the execution period of the effect performed and the execution period of the effect performed in response to the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features J16 to J21.

  According to the feature J22, when a selection operation that is a privilege generation mode is performed, an effect with a high expectation of profit generation is executed, so the player's awareness of performing the selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode Can be increased. In this case, even if the player can forcibly cause the selection operation to be the privilege generation mode, the duration of the expected effect does not vary depending on whether or not the selection operation is the privilege generation mode. It becomes possible to do so.

  Feature J23. The giving means is a forcing means (a forced effect control process in the light side MPU 93) that makes the selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode or a selection operation that does not become a privilege generation mode, regardless of which mode the player's selection operation is in any mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features J1 to J22.

  According to the feature J23, it is possible to determine whether or not a privilege is generated regardless of the result of the selection period, while allowing the player to recognize that the privilege has been generated by his / her selection.

Feature J24. Predetermined notification control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2814 and S2815 in the sound light side MPU 93, the display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine,
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
When a selection operation corresponding to the predetermined notification is performed as a privilege generation mode, the selection operation is a configuration of selecting the privilege generation mode,
The predetermined notification control means determines a content of the predetermined notification for the current selection period in accordance with the determined selection operation after the player's selection operation in the selection period is confirmed. The game machine according to feature J23, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S2813 to S2815 in the side MPU 93.

  According to the feature J24, it is possible to perform predetermined notification corresponding to the configuration in which it is forcibly determined on the gaming machine side whether or not the benefit generation mode is set.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the kind of selection operation | movement corresponding as a privilege generation | occurrence | production aspect is defined with respect to the kind of predetermined alerting | reporting.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features J1 to J24, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound light side MPU 93) that generates a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) that enables the player to perform a selection operation;
Granting means for performing a selection operation that becomes a bonus generation mode in the selection period (a process of steps S2814, S2917, and S3015 in the sound side MPU 93 is performed) Function)
Predetermined notification control means (a function for executing the processing of step S2814, step S2815, step S2911, and step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93, the display control device 96) for performing predetermined notification from the gaming machine;
With
There are multiple types of player selection actions,
When a selection operation corresponding to the predetermined notification is performed as a privilege generation mode, the selection operation is a configuration of selecting the privilege generation mode,
The predetermined notification control means includes pre-end control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2910 to S2911 in the sound light side MPU 93) that performs the predetermined notification before the selection period ends. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature K1, since a privilege is granted after a selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode is performed in the selection period, a player who expects the grant of the privilege selects the privilege generation mode in the selection period. It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed, and the player side can be forced to enter the privilege generation mode. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the selection period.

  Feature K2. The predetermined notification control means includes post-end control means (a function of executing the processing of step S3012 in the sound light side MPU 93) that performs the predetermined notification after the selection period ends. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature K2, there are both a case where the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed and a case where the selection operation cannot be performed after the predetermined notification is performed. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of the selection period.

  Feature K3. Control target lottery means (function for executing the process of step S2711 in the sound light side MPU 93) for determining by a lottery which one of the pre-end control means and the post-end control means is to be subjected to the predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to Feature K2, which is provided.

  According to the feature K3, the case where the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed and the case where the selection operation cannot be performed after the predetermined notification is performed are randomly determined. It becomes possible to diversify the mode of the period.

  Feature K4. The selection period setting means is either the case where the predetermined notification control is performed by the pre-end control means or the case where the predetermined notification control is performed by the post-end control means. The game machine according to the feature K2 or K3, characterized in that the game is performed in a common mode.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to cause the player to perform the selection operation after confirming the predetermined notification in any selection period, and to increase the player's attention to the selection period. .

Feature K5. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance,
Any one of the characteristics K1 to K4, wherein the profit can be generated in the expected effect in which the predetermined notification is performed before the selection period ends by the pre-end control means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K5, even if the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is performed, a profit can be generated. Therefore, the player generates a profit by performing the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode. It is expected to recognize that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the selection period.

  Feature K6. The gaming machine according to claim K5, wherein the pre-end control means is configured to perform the predetermined notification before the selection period ends in the expected effect corresponding to the generation of the profit. .

  According to the feature K6, the situation in which the selection operation can be performed after the predetermined notification is generated occurs in the expected production corresponding to the generation of the profit, so that it does not affect the profit generation rate. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that a profit has been generated by the selection.

Feature K7. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance,
When the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode is performed, the granting unit is configured to perform an effect with a higher expected generation degree of the profit in the expected effect than when the selection operation is performed. Yes,
The effect control means responds to a case where a selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is performed in the expected effect in which the predetermined notification is performed before the selection period ends by the pre-end control means. It is characterized by comprising means for making the execution period of the effect performed and the execution period of the effect performed in response to the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6.

  According to the feature K7, when the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is performed, an effect with a high expectation of profit generation is executed, so the player's awareness of performing the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode Can be increased. In this case, even if the player can forcibly cause the selection operation to be the privilege generation mode, the duration of the expected effect does not vary depending on whether or not the selection operation is the privilege generation mode. It becomes possible to do so.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features K1 to K7, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A selection period setting means (a function for executing a confrontation effect setting process in the sound light side MPU 93) that generates a selection period (a first confirmation period, a second confirmation period) that enables the player to perform a selection operation;
Granting means for performing a selection operation that becomes a bonus generation mode in the selection period (a process of steps S2814, S2917, and S3015 in the sound side MPU 93 is performed) Function)
With
The granting unit is a mode determining unit (after the sound light side MPU 93 determines whether or not to make the player's selection operation a privilege generation mode without taking into account the player's selection operation mode determined in the selection period. A gaming machine having a function of executing a control process for enabling a payout process and a control process for preventing a post-loading process.

  According to the feature L1, since a privilege is granted after a selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode is performed in the selection period, the selection operation performed in the selection period is selected by the player who expects the grant of the privilege. It is expected to be an operation, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is determined at random, it is determined whether or not the privilege is given by the player's selection, and this increases the awareness of selecting the selection operation. It becomes possible.

Feature L2. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance, and is characterized in that the presence or absence of the profit is determined regardless of whether or not the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is performed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature L2, even if the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is determined at random, the occurrence of the profit does not change depending on whether or not the selection operation becomes the privilege generation mode. It is possible to produce the function and effect described in the feature L1 while not affecting the rate.

Feature L3. Profit generating means for generating a profit when the profit generating condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S312 in the main MPU 83);
Effect control means for generating an expected effect for expecting whether or not the profit is generated (function of executing processes in steps S306 to S308 in the main MPU 83, processes in steps S601 to S609 in the sound light MPU 93) Function)
With
The selection period is a configuration that occurs in the expected performance,
When the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode is performed, the granting unit is configured to perform an effect with a higher expected generation degree of the profit in the expected effect than when the selection operation is performed. Yes,
The effect control means is configured to respond to an execution period of an effect that is performed in response to a selection operation that is the privilege generation mode and a selection operation that is performed in response to the selection operation that is the privilege generation mode. The gaming machine according to the feature L1 or L2, further comprising means for making the execution period of the performance performed in the same manner.

  According to the feature L3, when a selection operation that is a privilege generation mode is performed, an effect with a high expectation level of profit generation is executed. Therefore, the player's awareness of performing the selection operation that is a privilege generation mode Can be increased. In this case, even if the selection operation that becomes the privilege generation mode is determined at random, it is possible to prevent the expected production duration from changing depending on whether or not the selection operation becomes the privilege generation mode. It becomes.

Feature L4. As a selection result for a player's selection action in the selection period, there are a player's victory result, a player's defeat result, and a draw result,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the granting unit does not generate the selection period again when the result of the tie is achieved.

  According to the feature L4, in the configuration in which the selection result in the selection period is arbitrarily changed according to the player's selection operation, the selection period ends even if the result is a draw result. It is possible to set a period required for the process to be a predetermined period.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features L1 to L4, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the features of the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, the feature K group, and the feature L group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A discharge operation specifying means for specifying that a discharge operation has been performed to discharge a storage medium storing information corresponding to the number of usable media (in the first embodiment, the processing in step S1201 in the sound light side MPU 93 is performed). A function to be executed, a function to execute the process of step S3101 in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
Authentication execution means for executing an authentication process for specifying whether or not the discharging operation has been performed by an authorized player when the discharging operation is specified by the discharging operation specifying means ( A function of executing the process of step S1311 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main side MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
Abnormality response means for entering into an abnormal response state when the result of the authentication process is not normal (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1313 in the sound light side MPU 93, the second embodiment) Then, the function of executing the processing of step S3212 to step S3213 in the main MPU 83),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature M1, since the authentication process is executed when the ejection operation of the storage medium is performed and when the result of the authentication process is not normal, it becomes an abnormal response state. When a person who does not attempt to acquire the storage medium illegally, it is possible to deal with it in a game hall, for example.

  Feature M2. The feature according to M1, wherein the abnormality handling unit sets the abnormality handling state to a state in which the storage medium is not ejected when the result of the authentication processing is not normal. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature M2, it is possible to prevent the storage medium from being discharged in response to a discharging operation performed by a person who is not a regular player.

Feature M3. The authentication execution means does not execute a process for preventing the storage medium from being ejected even if the result of the authentication process is not normal.
The gaming machine according to the feature M1 or M2, wherein the abnormality handling means is configured to make the abnormality handling state by performing an abnormality handling notification.

  According to the feature M3, even if the result of the authentication process is not normal, the ejection of the storage medium is not prevented. Therefore, even if the authentication process is not accurately executed and the result of the authentication process becomes abnormal The discharge of the storage medium can be completed. Further, when the result of the authentication process becomes abnormal, an abnormality response notification is executed, so that it is possible to call attention to a game hall administrator or the like.

  Feature M4. In the feature M3, the authentication execution means executes the authentication processing before the discharge of the storage medium is started in response to the discharge operation when the discharge operation is performed. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature M4, when the result of the authentication process becomes abnormal, it is possible to start the abnormality response notification at an early stage with respect to the occurrence of the discharge operation.

Feature M5. First acquisition means for acquiring authentication reference information when information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set (in the first embodiment, the processing in steps S1212 to S1214 in the sound light side MPU 93 is executed. Function, in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3108 to step S3110 in the main MPU 83),
The authentication execution means includes
When the discharging operation specifying means specifies that the discharging operation has been performed, second acquiring means for acquiring authentication execution information (in step S1307 to step S1309 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment). A function for executing the process, a function for executing the processes of steps S3205 to S3207 in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
Means for executing a process for identifying whether or not the authentication reference information acquired by the first acquisition means and the authentication execution information acquired by the second acquisition means coincide with each other (the first process); In the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1311 in the sound light side MPU 93, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main side MPU 83),
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, comprising:

  According to the feature M5, the authentication standard information acquired when information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set and the authentication execution information acquired when the ejection operation is performed are used. Thus, the authentication process is executed, so that it becomes possible to directly authenticate the owner of the storage medium and the performer of the ejection operation.

Feature M6. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (information processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
The authentication execution means performs the verification as to whether or not the recognition target part of the player specified based on the state information corresponds to the recognition target part of the regular player as the authentication process. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5.

  According to the feature M6, since collation is performed using state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is not necessary to request a complicated operation from the player for authentication.

  The information deriving means replaces the configuration in which the state information of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit can be derived, and the information deriving unit determines the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit. The state information may be derived.

Feature M7. When information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set, the first acquisition unit (the first acquisition unit) specifies information on the recognition target part based on the state information and acquires the specified information as authentication reference information In the first embodiment, the sound side MPU 93 has a function of executing steps S1212 to S1214. In the second embodiment, the main side MPU 83 has a function of executing steps S3108 to S3110.
The authentication execution means includes
When the discharge operation specifying means specifies that the discharge operation has been performed, second information is acquired that specifies information on the recognition target part based on the state information and acquires the specified information as authentication execution information Means (function to execute the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment, function to execute the processing of steps S3205 to S3207 in the main side MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
Means for executing a process for identifying whether or not the authentication reference information acquired by the first acquisition means and the authentication execution information acquired by the second acquisition means coincide with each other (the first process); In the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1311 in the sound light side MPU 93, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main side MPU 83),
The gaming machine according to Feature M6, comprising:

  According to the feature M7, the authentication standard information acquired when information corresponding to the number of usable media is newly set and the authentication execution information acquired when the ejection operation is performed are used. Thus, the authentication process is executed, so that it becomes possible to directly authenticate the owner of the storage medium and the performer of the ejection operation. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to obtain both the authentication reference information and the authentication execution information by using the status information, so that the configuration can be simplified and the player can execute the authentication processing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid requiring complicated operations.

Feature M8. The authentication execution means does not execute a process for preventing the storage medium from being ejected even if the result of the authentication process is not normal.
The gaming machine according to the feature M6 or M7, wherein the abnormality handling means is configured to be in the abnormality handling state by performing an abnormality handling notification.

  According to the feature M8, since the ejection of the storage medium is not prevented even if the result of the authentication process is not normal, the result of the authentication process is abnormal because the state information is not accurately derived. Even if it becomes, it becomes possible to complete discharge of the storage medium. Further, when the result of the authentication process becomes abnormal, an abnormality response notification is executed, so that it is possible to call attention to a game hall administrator or the like.

  Feature M9. In the abnormality handling means, at least one event occurs when the authentication reference information is not acquired by the first acquisition means and when the authentication execution information is not acquired by the second acquisition means. The gaming machine according to Feature M8 is characterized in that abnormality response notification is also performed in some cases.

  According to the feature M9, in the configuration in which the authentication reference information and the authentication execution information are acquired based on the state information, it is assumed that any information is not acquired when executing the authentication process. On the other hand, even if the authentication process is not normally executed because these pieces of information are not acquired, the storage medium is ejected, so that it is possible to prevent a legitimate player from feeling uncomfortable. At the same time, since the abnormality response notification is executed, it is possible to cope with an unauthorized discharge operation.

  Feature M10. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features M6 to M9.

  According to the feature M10, position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and collation is performed using the position information. Therefore, collation is executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. Is possible.

Feature M11. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features M6 to M10, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit.

  According to the feature M11, it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the light receiving unit.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features M1 to M11, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific situation response means (when a specific situation predetermined as an unfavorable situation has occurred based on the status information derived by the information deriving means, a specific situation handling means ( A function of executing the first situation monitoring process and the second situation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N1, since it is configured to monitor whether or not a specific situation has occurred using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, the monitoring is uniquely performed in the gaming machine. It becomes possible. And when it is specified that a specific situation has occurred, it becomes possible to cope with the situation by entering a specific situation corresponding state.

  Feature N2. The specific situation handling means is configured to be in the specific situation handling status when it is identified based on the status information that a person is continuously present in the monitoring range in a situation where no game is played. The gaming machine according to Feature N1, wherein the gaming machine is a product.

  If a person stays in front of a gaming machine without playing a game, the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases because no other person can play a game on the gaming machine even though the game is not playing. As a result, the game hall suffers disadvantages. On the other hand, according to the feature N2, whether or not a person is staying in front of the gaming machine without playing a game is monitored using the state information, and when this is the situation Since it becomes a specific situation corresponding state, it becomes possible to cope with it.

Feature N3. Comprising information storage means (sound light side ROM 94) for preliminarily storing specific situation information corresponding to the specific situation;
The specific situation handling unit is configured to be in the specific situation handling state when the status information derived by the information deriving unit corresponds to the specific situation information stored in the information storage unit. The gaming machine according to the feature N1 or N2, wherein the gaming machine is a thing.

  According to the feature N3, when the derived state information corresponds to the specific situation information, the situation becomes a specific situation correspondence state. For example, when an operation with a possibility of fraud is performed, it is dealt with. It becomes possible.

  Feature N4. Production control means for performing production processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (first announcement production control processing, second announcement production control processing, divided production control processing, stop in sound light side MPU 93) The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the gaming machine includes a function of executing an operation effect control process and a continuous effect control process.

  According to the feature N4, it is possible to monitor whether or not a specific situation has occurred by using a configuration for deriving state information used for production.

  Feature N5. The specific situation handling means is configured to execute the notification process (the processes in steps S1414 and S1514 in the sound light side MPU 93) without preventing the progress of the game, thereby setting the specific situation handling state. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4.

  According to the feature N5, even if it is determined that the specific situation is generated based on the state information, the progress of the game is not prevented, so the specific situation is caused by the fact that the state information is not accurately derived. Even if it is determined that the occurrence has occurred, it is possible to prevent a legitimate player from being disadvantaged. In addition, when it is determined that a specific situation has occurred, a notification is executed, so that it is possible to call attention to a game hall manager or the like.

  Feature N6. The specific situation handling means executes the notification process (the processing in steps S1414 and S1514 in the sound light side MPU 93) different from the notification sound output process without executing the notification sound output process, The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, wherein the gaming machine is in a state corresponding to a specific situation.

  According to the feature N6, even if it is determined that a specific situation has occurred based on the state information, notification by sound output is not executed, so that the state information is not accurately derived. Even if it is specified that the situation has occurred, it is possible to prevent the legitimate player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, when it is determined that a specific situation is occurring, a notification different from the sound output is executed, so that it is possible to call attention to the manager of the game hall.

  Feature N7. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6.

  According to the feature N7, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the presence / absence of the specific situation is monitored using the position information, so the relationship with the distance from the distance measurement reference Thus, it becomes possible to execute the monitoring.

Feature N8. A window panel (window panel 22) provided on the front of the gaming machine and visually recognized by the player in order to confirm the contents of the game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on a rear side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel unit.

  According to the feature N8, it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the light receiving unit.

Feature N9. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific situation response means (when a specific situation predetermined as an unfavorable situation has occurred based on the status information derived by the information deriving means, a specific situation handling means ( A function of executing the first situation monitoring process and the second situation monitoring process in the sound light side MPU 93);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N9, since it is configured to monitor whether or not a specific situation has occurred by using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, the monitoring is uniquely performed in the gaming machine. It becomes possible. And when it is specified that a specific situation has occurred, it becomes possible to cope with the situation by entering a specific situation corresponding state.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features N1 to N9, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the features of the feature M group and the feature N group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, it is considered that in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, a situation that is not preferable for the game hall side may occur. For example, when an illegal act is performed on a gaming machine, the gaming hall or the player suffers a disadvantage. In addition, for example, if a gaming machine is occupied even though no game is played, the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases, and in this case, the gaming hall suffers a disadvantage. There is a need to provide a configuration that can suitably cope with such a situation unfavorable for the game hall side.

<Feature O group>
Feature O1. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the light receiving unit is provided at a position where the light receiving unit is not visible from the front of the gaming machine or is difficult to view.

  According to the feature O1, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, since the light receiving unit is provided at a position where the light receiving unit is not visible or difficult to view from the front of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the light receiving unit exists or to make it difficult to understand. Become. For example, if it is found that a camera or the like is installed in the gaming machine and that it is capturing the player itself, the player may feel uncomfortable and may refrain from playing the game. According to the configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to feel such a sense of incongruity.

  Feature O2. The game according to Feature O1, wherein the light receiving portion is provided such that a plate portion (stage member 68) having a beam splitter function is interposed between a viewpoint in front of the gaming machine and the light receiving portion. Machine.

  According to the feature O2, it is possible to make the light receiving unit invisible or difficult to view from the front of the gaming machine while allowing the light receiving unit to receive light.

Feature O3. A window panel portion (window panel 22) that is provided on the front portion of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and that allows a gaming area where gaming balls flow down to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine;
The gaming machine according to the characteristic O1 or O2, wherein the light receiving portion is provided on a back side of a member (stage member 68) that generates the gaming area.

  According to the feature O3, it is possible to hide the light receiving unit by using the member that generates the game area while including the player facing the window panel unit in the monitoring range.

Feature O4. Display means (symbol display device 61) having a display surface at a position behind the gaming machine with respect to the board surface of the gaming board (game board 51) in which a gaming area in which gaming balls flow down is formed
A stage (stage unit 67) provided below the display means so as to extend between the display surface and the board surface and having a rolling surface on which a game ball rolls;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3, wherein the light receiving unit is provided on a back side of a member (stage member 68) constituting the stage.

  According to the feature O4, the light receiving unit can be provided by using a stage having a predetermined dimension in the front-rear direction. Since the stage is provided below the display means so as to extend between the display surface and the board surface, a space in the front-rear direction between the display surface and the board surface exists above the light receiving unit. It will be. This facilitates light reception at the light receiving unit.

Feature O5. Provided on the front of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) is provided with a window panel (window panel 22) that can be seen by the player to confirm the contents of the game,
The light receiving unit is provided at a position where the light receiving unit is not visible or difficult to view even when the front surface of the gaming machine is opened toward the front of the gaming machine, according to any one of the characteristics O1 to O4. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature O5, it is possible to make the light receiving unit invisible or difficult to view even when the front side of the gaming machine is opened toward the front of the gaming machine for maintenance in a situation where a game is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the light receiving unit.

Feature O6. A support body (main body frame 13) supported to be openable and closable on a support base (outer frame 11),
In any one of features O1 to O5, the light receiving portion is provided at a position where the support is not visible or difficult to see even when the support is opened with respect to the support base. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature O6, even when the support is opened with respect to the support base, it is possible to make the light receiving unit invisible or difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the existence of

  Feature O7. The information deriving means derives position information corresponding to a distance to a monitoring target existing in front of the gaming machine as state information of the monitoring range based on a light reception result in the light receiving unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O6.

  According to the feature O7, the position information is derived based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit, and the specifying process is executed using the position information. Therefore, the specifying process is executed in relation to the distance from the distance measurement reference. It becomes possible to do.

Feature O8. Status information (distance data or image G for one frame) of the monitoring range existing in front of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (the imaging device 73 in the first embodiment or the like, the imaging device 131 in the third embodiment). ) Can be derived (the signal processing circuit 75 in the first embodiment, the signal processing circuit 141 in the third embodiment),
Specific execution means for executing specific processing using the state information derived by the information deriving device (cancellation monitoring processing, height position monitoring processing, face authentication processing, first situation monitoring processing in the sound light side MPU 93, A function of executing the second situation monitoring process, the operation effect control process, and the imaging control process);
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the receiving unit is provided at a position where it cannot be viewed from the front of the gaming machine or is difficult to view.

  According to the feature O8, since the specific process is executed using the state information derived based on the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to recognize the player's operation and state in a non-contact manner. Become. In this case, since the receiving unit is provided at a position where the receiving unit is not visible from the front of the gaming machine or is difficult to see, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the receiving unit exists or to make it difficult to understand. Become. For example, if it is found that a camera or the like is installed in the gaming machine and that it is capturing the player itself, the player may feel uncomfortable and may refrain from playing the game. According to the configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to feel such a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features O1 to O8, the features A1 to A20, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D8, the features E1 to E13, the features F1 to F8, and the features G1 to G16. , Features H1 to H6, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J24, features K1 to K7, features L1 to L4, features M1 to M11, features N1 to N9, and features O1 to O8. You may apply. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the features of the feature O group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, by providing a configuration capable of recognizing the player's operation and appearance in a non-contact manner, for example, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's non-contact operation. It is possible to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. In this case, it is necessary to be able to suitably recognize the player's operation and appearance in a non-contact manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 13 ... Main body frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 22 ... Window panel, 51 ... Game board, 61 ... Symbol display device, 67 ... Stage unit, 68 ... Stage member, 73 ... Imaging 75 ... Signal processing circuit 83 ... Main side MPU 84 ... Main side ROM 85 ... Main side RAM 91a ... Reference switch 93 ... Sound light side MPU 94 ... Sound light side ROM 95 ... Sound light side RAM, 96 ... display control device, 131 ... imaging device, 141 ... signal processing circuit, CA1 to CA3 ... variable display area, CH1 ... fish character, G ... image for one frame.

Claims (1)

A selection period setting means for generating a selection period that allows the player to perform a selection operation;
Information deriving means capable of deriving state information of the monitoring range existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the light reception result in the light receiving unit;
A granting means for identifying a mode of the selection operation based on the state information and for granting a privilege to a player after a selection operation that becomes a privilege generation mode is performed in the selection period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images